CREO Module 2

Creo for Design Engineers
ACAD-4343B
Training Agenda
Module 01 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process
Module 02 ― Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts
Module 03 ― Using the Creo Parametric Interface
Module 04 ― Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models
Module 05 ― Editing Geometry, Features, and Models
Module 06 ― Creating Sketches for Features
Module 07 ― Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes
Module 08 ― Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs
Module 09 ― Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft
Module 10 ― Creating Rounds and Chamfers
Module 11 ― Creating Patterns
Module 12 ― Assembling with Constraints
Module 13 ― Exploding Assemblies
Module 14 ― Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views
Module 15 ― Advanced Selection
Module 16 ― Creating Sweeps and Blends
Module 17 ― Sweeps with Variable Sections
Module 18 ― Helical Sweeps and Volume Helical Sweep
Module 19 ― Swept Blends and Advanced Bends
Module 20 ― Family Tables
Module 21 ― Reusing Features
Module 22 ― Measuring and Inspecting Models
Module 23 ― Relations and Parameters
Module 24 ― Capturing and Managing Design Intent
Module 25 ― Resolving Failures and Seeking Help
Module 26 ― Creating and Using Component Interfaces
Module 27 ― Creating and Using Flexible Components
Module 28 ― Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies
Module 29 ― Replacing Components in an Assembly
Module 30 ― Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps
Module 31 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process
Module 32 ― Sheetmetal Model Fundamentals
Module 33 ― Creating Primary Sheetmetal Wall Features
Module 34 ― Creating Secondary Sheetmetal Wall Features
Module 35 ― Bending and Unbending Sheetmetal Models
Module 36 ― Sheetmetal Form Features
Module 37 ― Introduction to Drawings
Module 38 ― Creating New Drawings
Module 39 ― Creating Drawing Views
Module 40 ― Adding Model Details to Drawings
Module 41 ― Adding Tolerance Information
Module 42 ― Adding Draft Geometry and Symbols
Module 43 ― Using Layers in Drawings
Module 44 ― Creating and Using Tables in Drawings
Module 45 ― Using Report Information in Drawings
Module 46 ― Detailing Sheetmetal Designs
Module 47 ― Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners
Module 48 ― Utilizing Design Exploration
Module 49 ― Using Unite Technology
Module 50 ― Introduction to Flexible Modeling
Module 51 ― Shape Surface Selection
Module 52 ― Flexible Move
Table of Contents
Creo for Design Engineers
Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
Retrieving Assembly Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Using Automatic Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
Creating Part Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
Opening Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-27
Exercise 1: Using Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Exercise 2: Using Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1
Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Sheetmetal Model Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1
Sheetmetal Model Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
Understanding Developed Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
Creating a New Sheetmetal Part in Assembly Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6
Creating a New Sheetmetal Model in Part Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-8
Converting Solid Models to Sheetmetal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Creating Primary Sheetmetal Wall Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1
Understanding Sheetmetal Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
Creating Planar Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
Extruded Sheetmetal Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
Revolved Sheetmetal Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
Blend Sheetmetal Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Creating Offset Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
Sheetmetal Wall Sketching Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-14
Advanced Primary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-16
Creating Secondary Sheetmetal Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1
Understanding Secondary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
Creating Secondary Flat Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
Using Flange Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
Using Extruded Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
Wall Dashboard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
Using Partial and Overextended Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-19
Understanding Relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23
Creating Twist Wall Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-30
Extending and Trimming Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-34
Using the Merge Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-38
Bending and Unbending Sheetmetal Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Creating Bend Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
Adding Transition to Bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-10
Bending in Multiple Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
Creating Planar Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
Creating Unbend Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
Creating Bend Back Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-25
Previewing and Creating Flat Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-28
Creating Flat States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-32
Creating Flattened Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-35
Creating Split Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-37
Sheetmetal Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Punch Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2
Utilizing Punch Model Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6
Creating Die Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8
Creating Die Forms Using Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-12
Creating Sketched Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16
Flattening Forms and Unstamping Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-23
Utilizing Dependency Control with Punch and Die Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-27
Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Drawing Development Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-2
Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-17
Exploring Drawing Ribbon Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-18
Using Undo and Redo Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-22
Creating New Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1
Creating Drawings Using Formats and Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
Creating Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
Exercise 1: Creating Different Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
Creating Drawings Using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-12
Creating Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Configuring Drawing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-2
Configuring Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-4
Adding General Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-6
Adding Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-8
Editing Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-11
Editing Visible View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-14
Exercise 1: Creating Gearbox Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-17
Adding Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-20
Adding Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-23
Understanding Cross-Section Concepts and View Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-24
Adding 2-D Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-26
Modifying Cross Hatching Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-29
Exercise 2: Creating Gearbox Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-32
Adding Assembly Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-37
Replacing View Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40
Adding Model Details to Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Understanding Annotations in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3
Inserting Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
Inserting Ordinate Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10
Using Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-14
Adjusting Dimensions and Detail Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-15
Changing Dimension Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-18
Exercise 1: Adding Dimensions to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-22
Adding Tolerance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-1
Understanding Dimensional Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
Configuring Dimensional Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-3
Exercise 1: Configuring Dimensional Tolerances in the Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-7
Understanding Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-11
Setting Up Geometric Tolerance References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-13
Creating Datum Feature Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-15
Creating Datum Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-20
Applying Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-25
Exercise 2: Creating and Editing Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-30
Adding Draft Geometry and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-1
Creating and Editing Draft Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-2
Exercise 1: Adding Draft Geometry to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-6
Understanding Drawing Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-15
Using Surface Finish Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-16
Using the Symbol Palette and Custom Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-20
Creating Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-23
Embedding Images in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-26
Exercise 2: Creating and Using Generic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-27
Using Layers in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-1
Understanding Layers in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-2
Using Layers in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4
Exercise 1: Managing Layers in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-7
Creating and Using Tables in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-1
Inserting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-2
Editing Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-5
Creating Tables from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-8
Creating Hole Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-11
Exercise 1: Creating a Revision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-13
Using Report Information in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-1
Creating Report Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-2
Exercise 1: Adding a Bill of Materials Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-5
Editing Report Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-10
Creating BOM Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-14
Creating Part Catalog Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-18
Detailing Sheetmetal Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-1
Adding Flat and Formed States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-2
Auto Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-5
Bend Line Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-8
Bend Order Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-11
Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-1
Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-2
Assembling Intelligent Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-4
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-8
Utilizing Design Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-1
Understanding Design Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-2
Exploring Part and Assembly Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-3
Creating Design Exploration Branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-7
Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-14
Using Unite Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1
Understanding Unite Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-2
Creating and using Unite Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-3
Using Unite Technology to Assemble Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-6
Introduction to Flexible Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1
Understanding Flexible Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-2
Understanding the Flexible Modeling User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-3
The Flexible Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-4
Shape Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-1
Using the Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-2
Using the Shape Selection Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-4
Applying Boss Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-5
Applying Cut Selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-7
Applying Round and Chamfer Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-10
Flexible Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 52-1
Applying Flexible Move using the Dragger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-2
Applying Flexible Move by Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-6
Applying Flexible Move using Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-9
Student Preface — Using the Header
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each
lab in Creo Parametric.
Course Handbook Layout:

• Modules
– Topics
¨ Concept
¨ Theory
¨ Procedure
¨ Exercise (if applicable)
Procedure/Exercise Header:
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the
course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each
module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept – This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the class
lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.
• Theory – This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is
discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains
additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure – This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within
Creo Parametric. Procedures are short and focused, and they cover a specific topic. Procedures are
found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge
topics that contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise – Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer and more
involved, and they use more complicated models. Exercises may also cover multiple topics, so not
every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
Note: The first module for certain courses is known as a “process module.” Process modules introduce you
to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
Procedure/Exercise Header
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as concise as possible, each
begins with a “header.” The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you
are to open.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name – This is the name of the lab.
2. Scenario – This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in
Exercises.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed – A reminder that you should close any open files and
erase them from memory:
• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.
• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.
4. Folder Name – This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within
specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is:
• PTCU\CreoParametric5\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would
set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric5\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select
Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open – This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example,
VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and
so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new
model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
6. Task Name – Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps – These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving – Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated.
• Exercises – Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to
ensure that the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the
training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\
CreoParametric5\.
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For
example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric5\.
• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric5 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for
each lab in the course.
Close Window Erase Not Displayed
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1 _Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT
Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure that the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.
Note: Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center;
otherwise, proceed to Task 2.
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as
C:\PTCU\CreoParametric5.
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric5.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric5 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts.
1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access toolbar, until the icon no
longer displays.
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.
• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated
in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1 _
Folder as indicated in the header above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser tab
from the navigator.
3. Click Working Directory to view the current

working directory folder in the browser.
• Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
4. Right-click the Topic1 _Folder folder and select Set Working Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new
working directory in the browser.
Note: Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder,
and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.
1. Notice that the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above.
• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
• Read the first task.
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the
procedure or exercise.
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and
disable. For example, “Enable only the following Datum Display types: .”
2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics
toolbar.
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as

necessary. For example, you could disable the
Select All check box, and then enable only the
desired datum types.
4. The model should now appear as shown.
This completes the procedure.

Module 30
Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps
© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 1

Retrieving Assembly Subsets
A subset of assembly components can be retrieved.
• Faster retrieval of large assemblies.
• Retrieval Customization dialog box.
• Apply places a subset in the main graphics window.
• Can save a simplified representation in the main assembly.
Figure 1 – Retrieval Customization Dialog Box

Retrieving Assembly Subsets
When opening an assembly, you can retrieve a subset of assembly components. In the Open dialog
box, select an assembly and click Open Subset. This enables faster and smarter retrieval of large
assemblies.
Retrieval Customization Dialog Box
Objects selected in the Retrieval Customization dialog box, shown in Figure 1, are set to Master Rep,
but can be configured as required. The Basic View keeps selection simple and enables you to decide
which components to retrieve or not to retrieve.
The Advanced View enables you to customize component retrieval further by selecting from the
following list of retrieval methods:
• Automatic Rep
• Master Rep
• Exclude
• Other simplified representation settings
For large assemblies, you may find it beneficial to search for components rather than browse in the tree
structure to select components of interest. You can supply simple text searches in the Search text
box. Objects get highlighted as you type matching names. Additionally, you can access the Search
Tool dialog box or select components directly in the main window.
You can use Model Rules to determine which objects to select. You can evaluate and edit model
rules in the Retrieval Customization dialog box.
The Retrieval Customization dialog box has its own In Graphics toolbar and several available options,
including the following:
• Remove By Size
– Uses a scroll bar to set the size.
– Toggles between remove small components and remove large components.
– Selects a model to set the size.
• Remove Internal Components
• Remove External Components
Module 30 | Page 2 © 2021 PTC
• Invert Selection
• Include Selected Components
– Select components inside a 2-D rectangle.
– Select components intersected by a 2-D rectangle.
Once you have established the retrieval options for the components, you can click Apply to place a
subset in the main graphics window. Then, you have the option to save a simplified representation
based on the retrieval settings.
Note: This does not replace the Open Automatic option which is still available in the Open drop-down menu.
PROCEDURE - Retrieving Assembly Subsets

Advanced_Assembly\Subset NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Retrieve an assembly subset by selection.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.

2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)
3. Click Open Subset.
4. Click Advanced View.
5. Expand the CRANK.ASM node.
6. Select CRANKSHAFT.PRT and then select the
check box twice.
7. Select PISTON.ASM and then select the check
box twice.
8. Select CONNECTING_ROD.PRT and then select
the check box twice.
9. Expand the PISTON.ASM node.
Note: Notice that the tree displays as shown.
10. Orient the model in the preview window.
11. Click Open > Yes and press ENTER to accept

the default simplified rep name.
12. Disable all Datum Display types.
13. Orient to Standard Orientation.

14. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
• If necessary, select the Simp Rep tab and notice that Rep0001 is created.
15. Click Close.
16. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
17. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Home tab in the ribbon.
• Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files.
18. Click OK.
Task 2: Retrieve an assembly subset by geometric size.
1. Click Open .
2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)
3. Click Open Subset.
4. Click Basic View, if necessary.
5. Click Remove By Size in the Retrieval

Customization dialog box.
6. Drag the slider to the right until CYLINDER.PRT is
no longer highlighted in the Model Tree section.
Note: The preview window in the Model Graphics
section may not update reliably in response to the
slider movement.
7. Drag the slider to the left until CYLINDER.PRT

highlights in the Model Tree section.
8. Click Remove Large Components .

9. Right-click and select Retrieve.
10. Click Open.
11. Click Close .

12. Click Erase Not Displayed .
• Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files.
13. Click OK.
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps

Simplified reps enable you to manage memory usage of large parts and assemblies.
Standard Simplified Reps:
• Default Rep
• Master Rep
• Automatic Rep
• Default Envelope Rep
Figure 1 – Simplified Reps Tab

Understanding Standard Simplified Reps
For every Creo Parametric part and assembly, you can find a list of standard simplified reps in the view
manager. You can use these standard reps to help manage the amount of system memory required to
open and work with large parts and assemblies.
For example, using default envelope or automatic reps increases system performance because these
reps require less memory to open and manipulate than a master rep.
The standard simplified rep types available in Creo Parametric are as follows:
• Default Rep – The default rep and the master rep are initially identical, however:
– The default rep type is only available in assemblies.
– You can edit and save a default rep. You can temporarily edit, but not save, other standard
representations.
– If you edit and save the default rep, the assembly always opens in the default rep state.
• Master Rep – The master rep is the default representation of a Creo Parametric model. It contains
all geometry and features.
• Automatic Rep – The automatic rep uses the minimum required data in session by enabling the
system to determine the minimal level of details to open.
• Default Envelope Rep – The default envelope rep enables you to represent an assembly with an
envelope part. A pre-existing envelope can be selected as the default envelope. If no envelope
exists, Creo Parametric enables you to create a default envelope on the fly.
Opening and Activating Simplified Reps
You can open an existing simplified representation by clicking the Open Rep button at the bottom of
the Open dialog box. This enables you to open large models without first opening the master rep.
In the view manager, you can toggle between different representations by double-clicking their name.
Note: Simply editing a master rep to a newly defined rep does not reduce the amount of memory used by
the system. Models from the master rep stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage
Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.
Important Notes About Simplified Reps
When working with simplified reps, you should keep the following in mind:
• Graphics Display Control – The save_model_display CONFIG.pro option controls the level of display
saved in a model. The default shading_lod option is typically satisfactory for most designs; however,
some organizations may want to investigate the performance and file sizes provided by the other
options.
– shading_lod (the default setting) – Saves all levels of detail according to the setting in the View
Performance dialog box.
– wireframe – Saves only wireframe information for the graphics display of all models.
– shading_high – Saves a high level of shaded detail with the model.
– shading_low – Saves a low level of shaded detail with the model.
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps

You can create custom simplified reps for better performance, visualization, and workability.
Simplified Rep Status Types:

• Exclude
• Master Rep
• Automatic Rep
• User Defined
Figure 1 – User Defined Type
Figure 2 – Simplified Content Figure 3 – Reduced Clutter

Understanding Custom Simplified Reps
To create a new customized simplified rep, you can apply a status to selected components of an
assembly. You can configure these custom reps to improve performance or to make working with an
assembly easier.
Simplified reps are configured views of a part or assembly. You should never use them to create a new
assembly or part numbers.
Customized simplified reps provide the following two primary benefits:
• Increase system performance by managing the number or complexity of components in an assembly.
Simplified representations accomplish this by removing unnecessary components or features from a
model, thus reducing the memory required to open and work with the model.
• Customize a model for a specific task. You can use simplified representations to remove components
that are unnecessary or not desired while performing specific tasks. For example, you can use
the simplified rep functionality to easily exclude components from view that are obstructing your
view or access to other components.
Simplified Rep Status
Every simplified rep has a default status applied to its top level. For example, a master rep has the
Master Rep status applied to its top level. The automatic rep has the Automatic Rep status applied
to its top level.
You can create custom simplified reps by editing the default status applied to the top level of a rep,
along with the status applied to individual components in the rep.
You can apply various statuses to create custom simplified reps. You can apply a status from the
following list to the top level, default condition, and/or to individual components of an assembly.
• Exclude – Select components to exclude from the assembly without regard for parent-child
relationships. Memory usage is significantly reduced by excluding components from an assembly
and then erasing those components from memory.
• Master Rep – Select components to represent in their default status. All geometry and features
are present.
• Automatic Rep – Select components whose representation is determined by system.
• Default Envelope Rep – Select a sub-assembly to substitute with a simplified envelope part that
represents the assembly.
• User Defined – Select components to substitute with a custom simplified rep of that component.
You cannot substitute standard simplified reps.
Creating and Editing Custom Simplified Reps
Use the following select and set status workflow to either create or edit custom simplified reps:
• Select a component(s) in the model tree or graphics window to which you wish to apply a status.
• Right-click and select Set Representation to to apply a status to the selected component(s). You
can also specify the status for the corresponding component drop-down list. This action marks
the current rep as modified.
• Save the modified simplified rep in the view manager. Once saved, you can toggle between various
simplified reps.
To revert to the representation as it was prior to your edits, double-click the modified rep rather
than save it.
Simplified Reps Description
The description for each custom simplified rep can be edited to describe the content of the rep. When
you cursor over a simplified rep name in the view manager or in the Open Rep tool, the description is
displayed as a tool tip. A description makes it easier for other users of your assembly to understand
what is contained in the simplified rep you created and how it may be useful to them.
Use one of the following two methods to open the Description dialog box and edit the description
of a custom simplified rep:
• Right-click the representation’s name in the view manager and select Description.
• Select a rep in the view manager and then click Edit > Description from the view manager.
In the Description dialog box, you can edit the default description manually and then close the dialog
box. You can also erase the existing description, insert a description from a text file, and save the
description to a text file.
Using Automatic Representations

With automatic simplified representations, the system decides how to open the minimal level
of details.
• Open any assembly/simplified rep as Automatic.
• Minimum required data in session.
– System decides how to open minimal level
of details
– On-demand/manual upgrade
• Perform geometry-based functions.
• Various pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified reps
made obsolete.
– Configurable
Figure 1 – Opening an Automatic Rep
Figure 2 – Opening a Simplified Rep as

an Automatic Rep Figure 3 – Viewing Available Simplified Reps
Using Automatic Representations
With automatic simplified representations, the system decides how to open the minimal level of details.
This method helps to maintain minimum data size in memory. The system opens the equivalent of a
graphics representation by default, which is the minimum required data set. However, the automatic
representation upgrades the level of detail on demand when needed. You can also manually upgrade
the level of detail as desired by selecting geometry on the desired component and clicking Retrieve
from the mini toolbar.
Automatic representations support the whole geometry focus of Creo Parametric 4.0. With an
automatic representation you can still perform the following geometry-based functions:
• Light surface selection – Within an automatic representation surfaces display as light surfaces.
• Summary and point-to-point distance measurements. The other measurement types do not work for
light surfaces. However, if you select one of the other measurement types, the system automatically
gets an on demand Geometry Rep.
• Cross-sectioning
• Component explode
You can upgrade the automatic representation to a geometry representation from the mini toolbar.
However, if you need to perform a type of operation or measurement that requires the geometry, the
system automatically upgrades the model to the geometry representation on demand.
Opening Legacy Simplified Representations
You can open legacy simplified representations as you would conventionally. Furthermore, you can
open an existing legacy representation as an automatic representation, also. In this case, all models
that were at Master Rep, Geometry Rep, Graphics Rep, and so on, in the assembly are opened as
automatic. This helps to further decrease the memory required of existing simplified representations.
You can either open an existing simplified representation as an automatic representation from the Open
Representation dialog box, or by right-clicking the simplified representation in the view manager
and selecting Activate as Automatic.
Obsolete Simplified Representation Types
Automatic representations make the following pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations
obsolete:
• Assembly Only
• Geometry representations
• Graphics representations
• Symbolic representations
• Boundary box representations
• Light graphics representations
However, this is configurable, using the hide_pre_creo4_reps config.pro option. The following values
are available:
• Yes – Hides all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations except for the Exclude Rep type.
Also, when you click File > Open and select an assembly, the default option is Automatic Rep, rather
than Master Rep.
• No – Maintains all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations.
• Maintain master – The default option, hides all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations
except for the Master Rep and Exclude Rep.
PROCEDURE - Using Automatic Representations

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Automatic NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Open a model as an automatic representation.

2. Select AUTOMATIC .ASM (Do NOT double-click
it).
3. After selecting AUTOMATIC .ASM, click the Open
drop-down menu and select Open Automatic.
6. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data
group and click OK.

Task 2: Open an existing simplified representation.
1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC .ASM (Do

NOT double-click it).
2. After selecting AUTOMATIC .ASM, click the
Open drop-down menu and select Open
Representation.
3. In the Open Representation dialog box, select
MASTER_ENGINE and click Open.
4. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.

• Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and
notice that this simplified representation has
Automatic Reps, as well as having various
components excluded.
• Click Close.
5. Click Close , click Erase Not Displayed , and click OK.

Task 3: Open an existing simplified representation as an Automatic Rep.
1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC .ASM (Do

NOT double-click it).
2. After selecting AUTOMATIC .ASM, click the
Open drop-down menu and select Open
Representation.
MASTER_ENGINE.
• Click the Open drop-down menu and select
Open Automatic.
4. In the model tree, notice that the components

excluded from the Master_Engine rep are still
excluded.

• Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and
notice that all the different types of reps have
been collapsed into Automatic Reps.
• Click Close.
6. In the graphics window, cursor over the

horizontal surface of the FRAME.PRT
component.
7. Notice that the surface is a Light Surface.
8. Select the surface.

9. Notice that there are no feature options
available in the mini toolbar for the selected
surface.
10. Click Retrieve from the mini toolbar.
11. Click in the background to de-select all
geometry.
12. Cursor over the horizontal surface again.
13. Notice that the surface is now a normal surface
instead of a Light Surface.
14. Select the surface again, and notice that the
feature tools are now available in the mini
toolbar.
geometry.

• In the INFORMATION WINDOW notice that
the FRAME is an On-demand Automatic Rep.
• Click Close.
Task 4: Measure the automatic rep geometry.

1. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
2. Select Distance from the Measure types
drop-down menu in the Measure group.
3. Zoom in on the ribs of the IMPELLER_HOUSING.
PRT, press CTRL, and select the left face of
each rib.
4. Notice that the distance between these surfaces
is approximately 10mm.
5. Expand the measure dialog box.

6. Notice that the references are points on the
light surfaces.
Task 5: Enable an On Demand Geometry Rep to measure a diameter.
1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter .

2. In the graphics window, select FLANGE.PRT to
retrieve the additional model data.
3. Select the outer edge to measure the diameter.
4. Click Close in the Measure dialog box.

• In the INFORMATION WINDOW notice that
the FLANGE is an On-demand Automatic Rep.
• Click Close.
6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.
• Click File > Manage Session > Object List.
• Since the geometry is no longer needed, the model reverts back to an Automatic Rep.
• Click Close.
Task 6: Activate another automatic simplified representation from the view manager.
1. Click View Manager from the In Graphics

toolbar.
2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab.
3. Notice the lack of other simplified rep types
available, for example, the Light Graphics Rep,
Symbolic Rep, Geometry Rep, and Graphics
Rep.
4. In the view manager, right-click simplified rep

Inside and select Activate as Automatic.
• Click Close.

Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps
You can exclude components from a simplified rep for better assembly performance and
accessibility.
Exclude Components:
• Without regard for parent-child relationships.
• For better performance.
• For better access.
Figure 1 – Master Rep Figure 2 – With Excluded Components
Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps

You can remove components from a simplified rep using the Exclude status. You can exclude
components to reduce memory usage or provide better access when working in an assembly.
Removing components from an assembly using the Exclude status in a simplified rep provides benefits
not found using other methods:
• Layers or Hide – You can hide components from display using the Hide or Layer tool; however,
hidden components remain in system memory. This method does not improve system performance
of large assemblies.
• Suppress or Delete – You can remove components from regeneration and system memory using
suppress and delete; however, this method requires that you manage parent-child relationships.
• Exclude – You can exclude components from regeneration and system memory without regard for
parent-child relationships. Also, you can toggle between saved simplified reps without having to
recreate each representation.
Note: Simply excluding a component does not reduce the amount of memory used by the system. Models
stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.

PROCEDURE - Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exclude EXCLUDE.ASM
Task 1: Exclude components from the assembly to create a simplified rep.
2. In the graphics window, select any section of
the red IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT.
3. In the mini toolbar, click the Parents drop-down
list and select BLOWER.ASM.
4. Right-click and select Representation >
Exclude to exclude the BLOWER.ASM.
5. In the model tree, press CTRL and select the
eight BOLT _8.PRT models.
Exclude.
• In the list of simplified reps, notice that the Master Rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol,
indicating that it has been modified.
8. Right-click and select Save.
9. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to no_blower and click OK.
10. In the View Manager, right-click No_Blower and
select Description.
11. Click Erase .
12. Click Insert and double-click
NO_BLOWER.TXT.
13. Click OK.
14. In the Names list of the View Manager, cursor
over No_Blower.
• Notice the tool tip displaying the description
that was just added.
Task 2: Create a new simplified rep by editing the current simplified rep.
1. With the View Manager still open, expand the
ENGINE.ASM node in the model tree.
2. Press CTRL and select ENGINE_COVER.PRT,
MUFFLER.PRT, and CARBURETOR.PRT.
Exclude.
Note: The No_Blower simplified rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol, indicating that it has been
modified.

4. Right-click in the View Manager and select Save.
5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to No_Blower_2 and click OK.
6. Click Close.
7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
Note: The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists each component excluded from the simplified rep. To
improve system performance, you can erase these components from system memory.
8. Click OK.
Task 3: Edit and then restore the current active simplified rep.
1. Select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and
select Representation > Exclude.
2. Click View Manager .
3. Double-click No_Blower_2(+).
4. Read the Confirmation dialog box and click
OK to restore the modified rep to its previous
condition.
Tip: You can temporarily modify and then restore any
simplified rep to its saved condition by double-clicking
the modified rep name.Temporarily excluding
components from display in this manner is a useful
tool for working with assemblies.
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser

Use the component chooser to preview and select components when defining a simplified rep.
• Component Chooser Dialog Box
– Structure Tree
– Preview Window
• Default Exclude status
– Component Status derived from Top
level
– Select to keep
• Easy to customize
– Change top to Master Rep Figure 1 – Component Chooser
– Select to remove
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser
When you select New or Redefine on the Simp Rep tab of the view manager, the component chooser
opens. Use the dynamic preview and selection tools in the component chooser to create and edit
simplified reps.
The Component Chooser Dialog Box
The component chooser contains a variety of tools used to configure a simplified rep:
• Model Tree – On the left side of the chooser, you view a tree structure. From the tree, you can
multi-select components and apply statuses to them. As statuses are edited in the structure tree, the
preview window updates accordingly.
Apply statuses to selected models using the following methods:
– Click a component status and select a new status from the drop-down list.
– Right-click a component name and select a status from the Representation shortcut menu.
– Use the check box next to each component in the tree to easily toggle statuses or reset the
rep. An assembly with components of different statuses is considered mixed and is indicated
by a filled check box.
• Model Graphics – On the right side of the chooser, you view the preview window. As edits are made to
the status of models in the tree, the model displayed in the preview window is updated accordingly. If
you select a component in the preview window, that component is also selected in the structure tree.
• Undo and Redo – The undo and redo buttons enable you to undo and redo statuses applied in
the current session of the component chooser.
• Find – The Find field provides a quick and easy way to search for and select components in the
structure tree. For example, if you type bolt, every component starting with the word bolt is selected
in the structure tree.
• Select – From the Select menu, you can use Advanced Search or the Select in main window tool to
select components in the main window.
• Model Rules – From the Model Rules menu, you can click Evaluate Rules or Edit Rules to view
rules associated with the rep.
• Settings – From the Settings drop-down menu in the model tree section, you can expand or
collapse the model tree. You can also edit the column display in the structure tree and save the
structure tree to a text file.
• Show – The preview window defaults to Show: Active components in the window. You can set
the preview to Show: Inactive or Show: Envelopes. From the Settings drop-down menu in the
model graphics section, you can toggle Auto update preview off for better performance when
working with very large assemblies.
• Layout – Edit the position of the preview window to be below, above, right, or left of the structure tree.
Derived Status
A Derived status indicates that a component's status is a driven status. The derived status changes
when the driving component’s status is edited. For example, if components of an assembly are set to
Master Rep (Derived) and the status of the assembly is edited to Automatic Rep, all components in the
assembly change to Automatic Rep (Derived).
Default Status
When you create a new simplified rep, the default simplified rep rule is Exclude. This simplifies large
assembly management by eliminating unintentional retrieval of a new representation where all parts
are set to Master Rep. You can easily edit the default rule of a new simplified representation by
selecting the top assembly in the component chooser and editing its status to Master Rep, Automatic
Rep, or Default Envelope Rep.

PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Chooser
CHOOSER.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Exclude.
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View
Manager .
3. Click New on the Simp Rep tab.
4. Edit the name to inside and press ENTER.
Note: The default status at the top level of a new simplified rep is Exclude. Every component in the rep
has an Exclude (Derived) status applied.
5. In the component chooser dialog box, do the
following:
• Click Settings and click Expand All .
• In the structure tree, click twice for the
check boxes next to CRANKSHAFT.PRT,
PISTON_ASSY.ASM, ENGINE_COVER.PRT,
and IMPELLER.PRT to set their status to
Master Rep.
• Click Open to complete the rep.
Note: As you edit the status of components to Master
Rep, each displays in the preview window of the
component chooser.
Task 2: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Master Rep.
1. In the view manager, click New.
2. Edit the name to outside and press ENTER.

3. In the component chooser, do the following:
• Click Settings and click Expand All .
• In the model tree section of the dialog box,
right-click CHOOSER.ASM and select Set
Representation to > Master. This sets the
default status of the entire assembly to
Master Rep.
• In the Find field of the dialog box, type bolt.
• Right-click any of the highlighted bolt parts
and click Set Representation to > Exclude.
• Right-click CRANKSHAFT.PRT and select Set
Representation to > Exclude.
• Set the status of PISTON_ASSY.ASM to
Exclude by clicking the check box next to its
name twice.
• Set the status of IMPELLER.PRT to Exclude
using either the right-click or double-click
methods.
• Click Open to complete the rep.
Note: The parts in PISTON_ASSY.ASM have their
status set to Exclude (Derived), indicating that they
derive their status from PISTON_ASSY.ASM.
Task 3: Redefine the Outside rep to exclude the carburetor model.
1. In the view manager, right-click Outside and select Redefine.
2. In the component chooser, click Select > Select in main window.
3. Select CARBURETOR.PRT, as shown in the
figure.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
• Notice that CARBURETOR.PRT is now
highlighted in the structure tree.
5. Right-click CARBURETOR.PRT and click Set
Representation to > Exclude.
6. At the top of the structure tree, select the check box next to CHOOSER.ASM.
7. The ATTENTION dialog box confirms whether or not you want to change the status of all
sub-models to Master Rep. Click Cancel.

8. Right-click CHOOSER.ASM and click Set
Representation to > Automatic.
Note: The default status of the rep and all derived
models is now Automatic Rep.
9. Click Open to complete the rep.
Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep

Use the Default Envelope status to create a simplified rep that represents an assembly with a
single part.
• Shrinkwrap
• Envelope
• Automated process
Figure 1 – Process Diagram
Figure 2 – Complete Assembly Figure 3 – Single Solid Envelope Part

Each assembly contains a standard simplified rep named Default Envelope Rep. You can create
a default envelope part that this standard rep uses to represent the entire assembly. There is also a
Default Envelope status that can be applied to any assembly. The Default Envelope status enables you
to create custom reps that use a selected default envelope part.
The geometry in the default envelope part is created using an associative shrinkwrap feature. You
control the subset of components that contribute to the shrinkwrap feature, as well as the detail
of geometry collected. When closed volumes of surface geometry are collected, the shrinkwrap
feature can be made solid. Then, you can substitute the simplified rep containing envelope geometry
into higher level assemblies.
Bottom-Up or Top -Down Creation
Default envelope simplified reps can be created using either a bottom-up or top-down process:
• Bottom-Up – Create the default envelope simplified rep in a sub-assembly before you use it in a
higher level assembly. In the higher level assembly, you substitute the fully defined sub-assembly
with the default envelope simplified rep.
• Top -Down – If no default envelope simplified rep exists for a selected sub-assembly, you can easily
create a default envelope simplified rep when needed in a higher level assembly. The default
envelope simplified rep of the sub-assembly is created in the sub-assembly and simultaneously
used in the higher level assembly.
You create a default envelope simplified rep by activating an undefined standard Default Envelope Rep
in the view manager or by setting the default status of an assembly to Default Envelope.
If the assembly already contains a default envelope(s), you select the one you wish to use in the
Select envelope dialog box.
Note: Default envelopes can be created in the Envelope dialog box. Open the dialog box by selecting the
View tab and clicking Envelope Manager from the Manage Views types drop-down menu.
If the assembly does not contain a default envelope, an automated process begins to create the
simplified rep, the default envelope, and the shrinkwrap feature used to define the geometry of the
envelope.
• In the Default envelope dialog box, type the following:
– Envelope Name – The name of the envelope.
– Part Name – The name of the part contained in the envelope.
– Common Name – You can type a common name for the part if desired.
• Select the template model to be used to create the envelope part.
• Use the shrinkwrap feature to collect geometry that defines geometry of the envelope. At this stage
in the process, you determine the subset of models the shrinkwrap feature will reference when
collecting geometry. You can also define the amount of geometry detail to be collected using
settings on the Options tab.
• Close the Simplified Rep component chooser to complete the creation of the rep.
Best Practices
Typically, the intent of a simplified rep is to reduce the amount of data in session, yet still provide the
detail required for completing tasks using the assembly. Limiting the subset of components referenced
by the shrinkwrap feature is one way to reduce memory requirements of an envelope part. Also, a solid
shrinkwrap feature requires more memory than the default surface shrinkwrap and should only be
used when required.
PROCEDURE - Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Default-Rep ENV_REP.ASM
Task 1: Begin defining the standard Default Envelope Rep.
2. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Envelope components check box and click OK.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager .
5. Double-click Default Envelope Rep on the Simp Rep tab.

6. In the Create Default Envelope dialog box, do
the following:
• Edit the Envelope name to solid_outer.
• Edit the Part name to solid_outer_env.
• Click OK.
7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box to complete the creation of the envelope part.
8. Click OK in the Info dialog box, if necessary.
Task 2: Create the shrinkwrap feature in the envelope part.
1. In the shrinkwrap creation dashboard, click
Subset.
2. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser,
do the following:
• Set the derived status of the assembly to
Ignore by selecting the check box next to
ENV_REP.ASM in the structure tree.
• Click twice in the check boxes
next to ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT,
ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT, CYLINDER.PRT,
and CRANK.ASM to set their statuses to
Consider.
• Click Open to close the Shrinkwrap Comps
component chooser.
3. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, select the Options
tab and select the Solidify resulting geometry
check box.
4. Click Complete Feature .
5. Click Close from the view manager.

6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden
Line from the Display Style types drop-down
menu to verify that the envelope model is solid.
7. Select Shading from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
8. Edit the selection filter to Part.
9. Cursor over the envelope model and notice that
it highlights as a single solid component.
• Notice also the envelope at the bottom of the
model tree.
10. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not
Displayed.
11. Click OK.
Note: By default, envelope models are always
displayed in the model tree. Envelope models never
appear in BOMs or in the assembly unless they are
substituted into a simplified rep.
13. In the File Open dialog box, click In Session .
• Notice that only the top level assembly and
envelope part are in memory.
14. Click Cancel.
Creating Part Simplified Reps

You can substitute part simplified reps in assembly level simplified reps.
• Specify attributes.
• Include or Exclude features.
– Available status determined by attributes
specified.
• Create a cut feature to specify a work region.
– Only visible in the simp rep.
• Select surfaces to be visible. Figure 1 – Copied Surfaces
Figure 2 – Work Region Figure 3 – Excluded Features

Creating Part Simplified Reps
Like assemblies, every Creo Parametric part contains a set of standard simplified reps. You can use
geometry, graphics, and symbolic reps of a part to reduce the memory required to open a part.
You can create and use customized part simplified reps to do the following:
• Reduce the time required to open complex parts.
• Reduce complexity of a model.
• Create work regions or cutouts in the part that can be viewed in assembly simplified reps.
• Create a different representation or display of a component. You can view this simplified rep in part
mode, substitute it into an assembly, or place it in a drawing view.
Like assembly simplified reps, you should never use part simplified reps to create new part numbers.
The workflow and options available for creating part simplified reps are much different than those
found in an assembly simplified rep. To create a new part simplified rep, click View Manager from
the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, click New.
Type a name for the new simplified rep and press ENTER. This opens the EDIT METHOD menu manager
where you can define properties of the new rep, such as the following:
• Attributes – Select attributes to control the creation and updating of the simplified rep. Attributes are
as follows:
– Include Feat – By default, all features are included in the rep unless selected to be excluded.
– Exclude Feat – By default, all features are excluded from the rep unless selected to be included.
– Regenerate – Always recreate the simplified rep by regenerating the master rep.
– Accelerate – Use the accelerator file to speed up retrieval of simplified reps.
– Whole Model – Include all feature information in the simplified rep.
– GeomSnpshot – The representation is a geometry only model; it includes no feature information
and is only available when used with the Accelerate attribute.
• Features – Select features to be excluded or included in the model. The available status, either
Exclude or Include, is dependent on the status applied in the Attribute element.
• Work Region – Create a cut feature to remove material from the model. A work region cut is only
visible in the simplified rep.
• Surfaces – Select surfaces from the model to be visible in the simplified rep. Using this option
ensures that all part features are automatically excluded from display.
Substituting Part Simplified Reps
The User Defined option of an assembly simplified rep enables you to substitute a selected part with
one of its simplified reps. This can be a rep that reduces feature count in a model, only includes surface
selected geometry surfaces, or contains a work region cutout.
Best Practices
Part simplified reps are best used for creating work regions to display in assembly simplified reps. In
rare situations, you can use part simplified reps for large complicated models.

PROCEDURE - Creating Part Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Part
ENGINE_BLOCK. PRT
Task 1: Create an exclude simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
3. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New.
4. Type no_fins_ribs as the new rep name and press ENTER.
5. In the menu manager, click Features.
6. In the model tree, select the groups
FIN_PATTERN and RIBS.
7. Click Done and Done/Return from the menu
manager.
Task 2: Create a work region simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

1. Double-click Master Rep and click New.
2. Type cutaway as the new rep name and press ENTER.
3. In the menu manager, click Work Region and Done.
4. In the model tree, select the CUTAWAY _
SKETCH sketch feature.
5. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Through All
.
6. Click Change Depth Direction to make the
cut upward.
7. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return
from the menu manager to complete the rep.
8. Double-click Master Rep.

Task 3: Create a surfaces simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
2. Type surfs as the new rep name and press
ENTER.
3. In the menu manager, click Surfaces.
4. Press CTRL, and in the graphics window, select
the five model surfaces shown.
5. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return

from the menu manager to complete the rep.
7. Click Close.
Task 4: Substitute the No_Fins_Ribs simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click ENGINE.ASM.
2. In the graphics window, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and select Representation
> User Defined.
3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select NO_FINS_RIBS and click OK.
5. In the view manager, right-click Master Rep(+)
and select Save.
6. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit
the Simplified rep field to block_no_fins_ribs
and click OK.
Task 5: Substitute the cutaway simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. In the graphics window, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and select Representation
> User Defined.
2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select CUTAWAY and click OK.

3. In the view manager, right-click Master Rep(+)
and select Save.
the Simplified rep field to block_cutaway and
click OK.
Opening Simplified Reps

Directly open simplified reps in the Open dialog box.
Opening a simplified rep directly enables you to do the following:

• Open large assemblies without first bringing everything into session.
• Save time by opening only the components you want to open (those predefined in the simplified
rep).
• Define a new simplified rep prior to opening an assembly.
• Preview the simplified rep before you open it.
• Read the simplified rep's description in a tool tip.
Figure 1 – Open Rep with Preview
Opening Simplified Reps

Typically, you activate simplified reps when you first open the full master rep of an assembly. You can
avoid bringing the entire assembly into session by directly opening a simplified rep in the File Open
dialog box.
To open a simplified rep directly, select the assembly in the File Open dialog box. Then click Open >
Open Representation.
Preview
In the Open Representation dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep to expand the preview pane
and view a simplified rep before opening it.
When you cursor over the name of a simplified rep in the Open Rep dialog box, you can read that
rep's description in a tool tip.

Define a Simplified Rep
Click Define in the Open Representation dialog box to create a new simplified rep prior to opening an
assembly into session.
Open an External Simplified Rep
Click External Rep in the Open Representation dialog box to open an External simplified rep that is
related to the model.
Auto Evaluate Model Rules
You have the option to evaluate rules when retrieving a simplified representation by selecting the
Evaluate Rules check box in the Open Representation dialog box. When opening a simplified rep that is
defined using rules, retrieving the rep as it was last evaluated can make some retrieval times faster.
The auto_evaluate_simprep_rules configuration option controls the default behavior during retrieval
and regeneration of rule-based simplified representations. The Evaluate Rules check box enables you
to override the default setting during retrieval.
Other Methods for Opening a Simplified Rep
There are two other ways to directly open a simplified rep:
• The open_simplified_rep_by_default configuration option enables you to open an assembly in a
selected simplified representation. When this option is edited to yes, the Open Representation dialog
box prompts you to select a simplified representation whenever an assembly is retrieved. This
way, you can avoid opening large assemblies in their master representations and conserve system
resources.
• If you edit the default rep of an assembly, that representation is opened instead of the master rep
every time the assembly is opened.
PROCEDURE - Opening Simplified Reps

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Open NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Open a graphics rep directly in the Open dialog box.

2. In the File Open dialog box, select but DO NOT
open TLA.ASM.
3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open
drop-down menu and select Open
Representation.
Automatic Rep and click Open.
toolbar.
7. Select the Simp Rep tab and notice that
Automatic Rep is already selected.
8. Click Close and click Close from the Quick
Access toolbar.

9. Click Erase Not Displayed . If necessary, drag the dialog box wider to view the complete list
of objects.
Note: The list of models in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box includes four assembly files and an
automatic rep for each part in the assembly.
10. Click OK to erase the listed models from session.
Task 2: Open a user-defined rep directly in the Open dialog box.
1. Click Open .
2. In the File Open dialog box, select but DO NOT open TLA.ASM.
3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open drop-down menu and select Open Representation.
4. In the Open Representation dialog box, click
Preview Simplified Rep to expand the
preview pane.
5. Select NO_BLOWER_2.
• Notice that the preview updates.
6. Cursor over the custom rep names and notice
the description for each rep opens in a tool tip.
7. Click Open to open the rep.

• Notice that NO_BLOWER_2 is already
selected.
9. Click Close.
Displayed.
• Notice there are no objects to erase.
Note: Because you directly open this simplified
rep in the Open Representation dialog box, it
opens without bringing excluded components into
session. Since you open the simplified rep in this
manner, you do not have to manually remove
excluded components from session.

Exercise 1: Using Simplified Reps
Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Exclude components from an assembly using simplified reps.
• Reduce memory requirements of an assembly using simplified reps.
• Edit simplified reps.
• Create a simplified rep by editing the default status to Exclude.
Scenario
Use simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements and remove unnecessary detail from the
DRILL.ASM.
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Drill-1 DRILL.ASM
Task 1: Create a NO COVERS simplified representation.
2. In the model tree, press CTRL and select
ENGINE_COVER.PRT and RECOIL.ASM.
3. Expand the CARBURETOR.ASM node.
4. Press CTRL and select CARBURETOR_PLATE.
PRT and AIR_FILTER _COVER.PRT.
Exclude.

toolbar.
7. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+) from
the list of simplified reps, right-click, and select
Save.
8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the
Simplified rep field to no_covers and click OK.
9. Double-click Master Rep and then click Close
from the view manager.

Task 2: Create the POWERTRAIN simplified representation.
1. Reset the model tree by clicking Show and

selecting Collapse All.
2. Double-click DRILL.ASM and click in the
graphics window to de-select all geometry.
3. In the model tree, select MUFFLER.PRT, press
SHIFT, and select HANDLE_SIDE.ASM.
4. Press CTRL and select GEARBOX_CHUCK.ASM
to de-select it.
Exclude.
6. In the graphics window, select the
STD_BIT_12MM.PRT drill bit.
Exclude.
9. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, right-click, and select
Save.
10. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to powertrain and click OK.
11. Click Close to close the view manager.
12. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
• Notice that several components can be removed from session memory.
13. Click OK.
Note: Excluded components remain in session memory until they are erased.
14. Click View Manager and double-click Master Rep.
• Notice that components are being retrieved from disk into session.

Task 3: Experiment with simplified representations.
1. Orient to the 3D_3 view orientation.
2. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Click View Manager and double-click Internal.
4. From the view manager, right-click Internal and select Redefine.
5. In the chooser tree, select the CLUTCH.ASM check box to edit its status to Master Rep.
6. Middle-click and spin the model in the preview window.
• Notice that CLUTCH.ASM is now visible.
7. Click Open to close the component chooser.
8. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep.

• Notice that components are being retrieved
from disk into session.
Task 4: Assemble the RATCHET .PRT by temporarily editing the Master Rep.
2. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM.
3. Right-click CRANK.ASM and select
Representation > Master.

4. Click View Manager and click Properties.
• Notice that CRANK.ASM is edited to Master
Rep and the entire DRILL.ASM has a default
status of Exclude .
5. In the view manager, click List and Close.
Displayed.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Assemble from the Component group,

select RATCHET .PRT, and click Open.
9. Select the appropriate surfaces to create
Coincident constraints.
10. Click Complete Component from the
dashboard.
11. Click View Manager and double-click the
modified Master Rep(+).
12. Read the Confirmation dialog box and click
OK to restore the modified rep to its previous
condition.
• Notice that components are being retrieved
from disk into session.
This completes the exercise.

Exercise 2: Using Part Simplified Reps
Objectives
• Create a part simplified rep.
• Add a work region to a part simplified rep.
• Apply Graphics Only status to a sub-assembly.
• Substitute part simplified reps into an assembly.
Scenario
Improve assembly performance by substituting a part simplified rep into the drill assembly and
applying Graphics Only status to a sub-assembly. To improve assembly usability, substitute a part
simplified rep containing a work region into the assembly.
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Drill-2 DRILL.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep of the chuck collar part.
2. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_COLLAR.
PRT, and select Open from the mini toolbar.
toolbar.
4. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab
and click New.
5. Type no_teeth as the new rep name and press
ENTER.
6. In the menu manager, click Features.

7. In the model tree, select the COLLAR_TEETH
group to be excluded.
8. Click Done and Done/Return from the menu
manager.
9. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep
to display the teeth features again.
10. Click Close from the view manager and click
Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
Task 2: Create a simplified rep using a work region cut away of the recoil cover.
1. In the graphics window, select RECOIL_COVER.
PRT, and select Open from the mini toolbar.
4. Type cut_away as the new rep name and press
ENTER.

5. In the menu manager, click Work Region >
Done.
6. At the bottom of the model tree, select the
CUTAWAY _SKETCH sketch feature.
7. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Through All
and click Change Depth Direction to flip
the cut downward.
8. Click Change Material Direction .
9. Click Complete Feature and click
Done/Return from the menu manager.
10. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep.
11. Click Close from the view manager and click
Close to return to the assembly.
Task 3: Substitute the NO_TEETH simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_COLLAR.
PRT, right-click, and select Representation >
User Defined.
2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select NO_TEETH
and click OK.
3. Click View Manager , right-click Master
Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, and select
Save.
the Simplified rep field to no_collar_teeth and
click OK.
and click Close.
Task 4: Substitute the CUT_AWAY simplified part rep into the assembly.
2. In the graphics window, select RECOIL_COVER.
PRT, right-click, and select Representation >
User Defined.
3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select CUT_AWAY
and click OK.
Rep(+), and select Save.
the Simplified rep field to review_engine and
click OK.
and click Close.

Task 5: Create a simplified rep to simplify the handle sub-assembly and increase assembly
performance.
1. Press CTRL and select HANDLE_MAIN.ASM and
HANDLE_SIDE.ASM in the model tree.
2. Right-click in the graphics window and select
Representation > Automatic.
Rep(+), and select Save.
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, click
OK.
5. In the view manager, click Close.
6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.

Module 31
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process

Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process
The typical sheetmetal design process can be summarized by five high-level steps.
• Primary Walls
• Secondary Walls
• Other Sheetmetal Features
• Flat States
• Detail Drawings Figure 1 – Primary Walls
Figure 3 – Other Sheetmetal Features
Figure 2 – Secondary Walls
Figure 4 – Flat States Figure 5 – Detail Drawings
Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process

All Creo Parametric sheetmetal designs start with a primary sheetmetal wall. There are many different
types of primary walls that you can start with, but the most common are the Planar and Extrude walls. In
addition to these two types of primary walls, there are other types of primary walls including: Revolve,
Blend, Offset, Variable Section Sweep, and Swept Blend.
Any of these primary wall types can be used to create the primary wall for your sheetmetal model.
Creation of the base primary wall requires the same care that you would use when creating the
base feature in a regular solid model. The base primary wall is the parent feature to all of the other
sheetmetal features in your model. As much as is possible, create the primary wall with the correct
feature type, orientation, and dimension scheme. Changing them at a later time is possible, but it can
be challenging.
Secondary Walls
After you have created a primary wall, you can add a number of different types of secondary walls to
your sheetmetal model. As the name suggests, these walls are secondary to a primary wall in that
they need to reference the edge of an existing wall to be created.
You use these walls to continue to populate your model with sheetmetal walls to match your design
intent. The types of secondary walls you can create are Flat, Flange, Twist, Extend, and Merge as
well as any of the primary wall types.

Adding Other Sheetmetal Features
Once you have at least one wall in the model (either a primary wall or a secondary wall) you can begin
to use other sheetmetal features to further capture the design intent of your model. These features
include bends, unbends, sheetmetal cuts, forms, punches, notches, rips, edge bends, and corner reliefs.
Creating Flat States
When nearing completion of your sheetmetal model, you can create a flat state of the sheetmetal
model. A flat state is essentially an unbent and flattened blank that can be used to manufacture the
part. The most useful aspect of the flat state is that it is created as a family table instance, so you can
easily put it in a drawing with the fully formed state.
By doing this, you can provide the necessary dimensions for both the flat state and the finished “form”
state to manufacture the part in a drawing.
Detailing Sheetmetal Models
The final step in the sheetmetal design process is the detailing step. You can make a drawing of any
sheetmetal part and detail it as necessary by creating views, dimensions, and notes for both flat and
formed states of the same model in the same drawing.
Furthermore, you can add a Bend Order table with associative notes if you want to help document the
order, sizes, and characteristics of bends used to fabricate the finished model.
PROCEDURE - Process Exercise

Objectives
• Understand the basic process used when modeling sheetmetal designs in Creo Parametric.
• Create a primary planar wall feature to use as the base feature for a sheetmetal design.
• Create secondary flat wall and flange wall features.
• Create notch and form features.
• Create a flat pattern for a sheetmetal design.
• Create a drawing to detail both the formed and flat patterns of sheetmetal designs.
• Create a bend order table and add it to a drawing along with associative notes.
• Create automatic ordinate dimensions for the flat pattern of a sheetmetal design.
Process\Sheetmetal CREATE NEW
Step 1: Create a new Creo Parametric sheetmetal model.
1. Click New from the Data group.

2. Select Sheetmetal as the Sub-type in the New
dialog box.
3. Type ENCLOSURE in the File name field.
4. Clear the Use default template check box and
click OK.
5. Select the mmns_part_sheetmetal template
and click OK to create the new part.
6. Enable only the following Datum Display types:
.

Step 2: Create a primary planar wall 200 mm x 100 mm x .5 mm thick.
1. In the graphics window, select the datum plane TOP and click Planar from the mini toolbar.
2. Disable Plane Display .
3. Right-click and select Corner Rectangle .
• Sketch and dimension a rectangle, as shown.
• Click OK .
4. In the dashboard, type 0.50 in the thickness

field and click Complete Feature .
Step 3: Create a secondary flat wall with a trapezoidal shape.

1. Zoom in on the model to view the right lower
edge.
2. Select the edge and click Flat from the mini
toolbar.
3. In the dashboard, select Trapezoid from the

shape drop-down list to override the default of
Rectangle.
4. Double-click the wall height dimension, then
type 50 and press ENTER.
Note: Alternatively, you can drag the drag handle to
a height of 50.

5. In the radius field, type 2.0 and press ENTER.
The model should now appear as shown.
6. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
Step 4: Create a secondary flange wall with an “I” profile.
1. Click Flange from the Shapes group.

2. Zoom in and select the lower edge on the front
of the model as the reference for the flat wall.
3. Press SHIFT and select the surface as shown to

select the surface loop.

4. The surface loop appears, as shown.
5. In the dashboard, edit the radius to 5.0 and
press ENTER.
6. Double-click the wall height dimension, then

type 50 and press ENTER.
Step 5: Create points and pattern them to use as references for notch features.
1. Rotate the model approximately as shown in
the figure.
2. Select the surface and click Point from the

mini toolbar.

3. Right-click and select Offset References.
4. Press CTRL and select datum planes TOP
and FRONT from the model tree as the offset
references.
5. Double-click the vertical dimension, then type
20.0 and press ENTER.
6. Double-click the horizontal dimension, then
type 25.0 and press ENTER.
7. Click OK in the Datum Point dialog box.
8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard
Orientation.
9. With datum point PNT0 still selected, right-click

and click Pattern from the mini toolbar.
10. Select the 25 dimension, and press ENTER to
accept the default value of 25.00.
11. In the dashboard, type 3 as the number of
Pattern members in the first direction, and click
Complete Feature .
Step 6: Create three sheetmetal notch features using the points you created in the previous task as
references.
1. Select Punch from the Engineering group drop-down menu.

2. Select CIRC_NOTCH_20MM_W_TABS.GPH and click Open.
3. Verify that the Advanced reference configuration check box is selected and click OK in the Insert
User-Defined Feature dialog box.
4. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog
box, notice that the first SURFACE reference is
selected, then select datum plane RIGHT from
the model tree.
5. Notice that the second SURFACE reference is
selected and select the FRONT datum plane
from the model tree.
6. Notice that the POINT reference is selected and
select datum point PNT0 from the model.
7. Select the Adjustments tab, then select
Direction: EXTRUDE_1 and click Flip.
8. Click Accept Settings in the User Defined
Feature Placement dialog box.

9. In the model tree, select Group CIRC_NOTCH_20MM_W_TABS and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.
10. Click Complete Feature to create a reference pattern.
Step 7: Create a sheetmetal punch form feature.
1. Select Punch Form from the Form types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
2. Click Open Punch Model from the dashboard.
3. Select BOSS_FORM.PRT and click Open.
4. Select the Options tab in the dashboard.
• Click in the Excluded punch model surfaces
collector.
• Press CTRL and select the three surfaces, as
shown.
5. Select the Placement tab.

• Select Coincident from the Constraint
Type drop-down menu, and select the first
reference from the form model.
6. Select the second reference from the

sheetmetal model.

7. Enable Plane Display .
8. Click New Constraint from the Placement tab
and select Coincident as the constraint type.
9. Select the FRONT datum plane from the form
model and the TOP datum plane from the
sheetmetal model and click Flip.
10. Click New Constraint and select Distance
as the constraint type.
11. Select the RIGHT datum plane from the form
model and the RIGHT datum plane from the
sheetmetal model.
12. Disable Plane Display and Point Display .
13. Double-click the offset dimension, type 30, and
press ENTER.
Step 8: Create a flat pattern of the model to use later in a drawing.
1. Select Flat Pattern from the Flat Pattern

types drop-down menu in the Bends group.
3. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Corner
Relief Notes and Bend Notes from the
Annotation Display types drop-down menu to
disable their display.
Note: The form feature was flattened automatically, because in the Options tab the Flatten forms
check box is selected.
4. In the model tree, select Flat Pattern 1 and click
Edit Definition .
5. In the Dashboard, select the Options tab and
clear the Flatten forms check box.
Note: The form feature is now not flattened.

7. In the model tree, select Flat Pattern 1 and click Edit Definition .
8. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Flatten forms check box.
Step 9: Create a bend order table.

1. In the model tree, right-click Flat Pattern 1, and
select Delete .
2. Click OK in the Delete dialog box.
3. Click the Bends group drop-down menu and
select Bend Order.
4. When prompted to select a bend to add to the

current sequence, select the bend surface on
the left end of the model, as shown.
5. Select the next bend surface toward the back of

the model, as shown.
Note: Notice that each bend surface is added to the
current sequence.
6. Select the next bend surface near the front of


7. Select the final bend surface on the right end of
8. Review the finished bend order table.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.

10. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the model.
Step 10: Begin creating a new drawing to document the formed and flat pattern for the
ENCLOSURE.PRT.

2. Select Drawing as the Type in the dialog box.
3. Type ENCLOSURE_C_DRW in the File name field.
4. Click OK.
5. The New Drawing dialog box appears. Notice the default template is set to c_drawing.
• Click Browse in the Template section of the dialog box.
Note: There are two ways to Browse in this dialog box. You need to click the lower one in the Template
section.

6. In the Open dialog box, select PTC_C_DRAWING.DRW and click Open.
7. Click OK in the New Drawing dialog box to create the drawing.
Note: The drawing is populated with views and dimensions. In a production drawing, the next step
would be to clean up the placement of the dimensions and add any other drawing elements needed
to document the model. Since this is just an educational example, you can leave this sheet as is and
move on to the next task.
Step 11: Continue the drawing creation process by adding a second sheet to document the flat
pattern of the model.
1. Click New Sheet from the Document group.

2. Click Drawing Models from the Model Views group.
3. Click Add Model from the menu manager.
4. Select ENCLOSURE_FLAT1.PRT in the Open dialog box and click Open.
5. Right-click in the drawing background and select General View .
6. Select No Combined State, if necessary, and click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box.
7. Click in the center of the drawing to place the view.
8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select TOP from the Model view names list.
9. Click Apply.
10. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the Scale category.
11. Select the Custom scale option and type 1.75 as the scale value.
12. Click Apply.

13. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View Display category.
14. Select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
15. Click OK to complete the drawing view.
Step 12: Add the bend order table, bend notes, and auto ordinate dimensions to the drawing.
1. Select the Annotate tab.
2. With the view still selected, click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
3. Select the Datums Tab in the Show Model Annotations dialog box.
4. Click Select All to select all of the Datum Axes.
Note: Notice the appearance of the bend axes for each of the bends.

5. Select the Note Tab in the Show Model Annotations dialog box.
• Click Select All .
• Click OK.
6. Click in the drawing background to de-select all geometry.
Note: The bend notes are associative. The note leader for each is attached to the corresponding bend
axis for each bend.
7. Select Auto Ordinate Dimension from the Ordinate Dimension types drop-down menu
in the Annotations group.
8. Click and drag a box around all surfaces, as shown.

9. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
10. Click Select Base Line from the menu manager and select the far left edge of the model's
geometry, as shown.
• Note the resulting ordinate dimensions.
11. Click Select Base Line and select the bottom-most edge of the model's geometry, as shown.

12. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
Note: In a production drawing, the next step would be to clean up the resultant ordinate dimensions and
keep only the ones you need to document the model. However, it is generally more convenient to have
Creo Parametric create the ordinate dimensions for you and then to delete the ones you do not want,
as opposed to creating each of the ones you do want individually.
Step 13: Save the models and erase them from memory.
1. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.

2. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the model.
4. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group.
5. Click OK to erase all objects from memory.

Module 32
Sheetmetal Model Fundamentals

It is important to understand some fundamental characteristics of the Sheetmetal mode in Creo
Parametric.
• Constant thickness
• Driving (green) and offset (blue) sides
• Formed or flat
• Developed length
Figure 2 – Formed Model
Figure 1 – Wireframe Display of Driving

(Green) and Offset (Blue) Sides Figure 3 – Flat Pattern
Sheetmetal models are solid parametric models that have a constant thickness throughout. Therefore,
they do not accurately represent real world models that undergo deep drawing forming operations
or other manufacturing processes that involve large amounts of plastic deformation of the material
during formation.
Sheetmetal models have a driving side and an offset side. When displayed as a wire frame, the driving
side of the model is shown in green and the offset (or driven side) is shown in blue. The side surfaces of
sheetmetal models are formed only after the driving and offset surfaces have been regenerated. You
can view an example of this in Figure 1.
Sheetmetal models can be displayed in either the formed design state (bent into the final shape used
in the design) or the flat pattern (unbent to display the blank of metal needed prior to bending). An
example of the formed model is shown in Figure 2. An example of the flat pattern for the same model
can be seen in Figure 3.
Creo Parametric can accurately calculate the developed length of most bends in a sheetmetal model.
This enables you to design the model in its formed model. If you unbend it later to form the flat pattern,
you can apply the developed length to each of the bends in the model so that an accurate flat model
can also be generated for manufacturing.
Best Practices
Because of the general thinness of a sheetmetal part, you should select flat surfaces as references
when placing a feature. If a flat surface is not applicable, edges are more convenient than side surfaces.
When you orient a sheetmetal part, the first selection must be a planar surface or a datum plane
and the second selection may be an edge. This is contrary to orienting non-sheetmetal solid parts
(where it is recommended that the second reference be a surface instead of an edge). Edges are
often references in sheetmetal models.
Understanding Developed Length
Creo Parametric can automatically calculate the developed length of most sheetmetal bends.
Developed Length (Bend Allowance) can be

determined by:
• System Equation (Y/K Factor)
• Provided Bend Tables (soft, medium and hard
materials)
• User-defined Bend Tables
• Entered Value
Applied to whole part or to individual features, as
necessary. Figure 1 – Before Bend
N is the Neutral Axis
L = (π/2 x R + y x T) q/90
• L= Developed Length
• R = Inside Radius
• T = Material Thickness
• q = Bend Angle (measured as angle of deflection)
• y = (π/2) * K
• K = d/T
Figure 2 – After Bend
Understanding Developed Length

Accurate developed length calculations (often referred to as bend allowances) enable you to
capture your design intent in the solid model while also developing a precise flattened model that
manufacturers can use when developing the actual product. Physical sheetmetal parts are often
manufactured by taking a flat piece of sheetmetal material and bending it into the finished part. This
final shape is often referred to as the developed or formed model. When you bend or form a piece of
sheetmetal, the material on the outside of the neutral bend axis stretches while the material on the
inside of the neutral bend axis compresses. The neutral bend axis itself remains the same before and
after the bend because it is neither stretched nor compressed. You can account for this material
behavior by establishing appropriate material descriptions and formulae for accurately calculating the
bend allowance. It is very helpful to be able to provide the manufacturers of your sheetmetal models
with the overall dimensions of the flat stock (often referred to as the blank) that they need to begin
the manufacturing process. Creo Parametric can create a blank that incorporates the developed
lengths of the formed mode into the flat model.
Calculating Developed Length
The developed length of a bend depends on the thickness, bend radii, bend angles, and other material
properties (principally the hardness of the material). The developed length calculation compensates
for stretching in the area of a bend.
The developed length of a bend is determined in Creo Parametric using one of four methods:
• System Equation (default)
• Entered Value
• Provided Bend Tables
• User-defined (Customized) Bend Tables
Bend Tables are covered in a separate topic.

System Default Equation
By default, Creo Parametric uses a default bend formula to calculate the developed length that uses
y-factor or k-factor values.
The equation, shown in figure 1, is stated as L = (π/2 x R + y x T) q/90 Where: L = developed length, R =
inside radius, T = material thickness, q = bend angle (deflection angle, in °), and y = y-factor.
Note: The bend angle is measured as the angle of deflection, and not the inside angle. For example, if
a flat wall section was bent 30°, the bend angle (q) is 30°, not 150°.
The y-factors and k-factors are part constants defined by the location of the sheetmetal material's
neutral bend line, which is largely based on the hardness of the material. The k-factor is a value that
expresses a parameterized location of the neutral bend axis. It is calculated as k = d/T. In the figure, you
can view that d is the distance away from the inside radius where the neutral bend axis lies. Therefore, a
value of k = 0 would indicate that the neutral bend axis is on the innermost surface of the bend, while a
value of k = 1 would indicate that the neutral bend axis is located on the outermost surface of the bend.
Both the k-factors and y-factors increase as the hardness of the material increases. Therefore, harder
materials have larger developed lengths than softer materials.
The y-factor is calculated with the equation y = k * π/2. The default value for the y-factor is 0.50.
Entered Values
Another way to control the developed length of a given bend is to override whatever value is given to
the bend (by a bend table or the default equation) with a user supplied value. This approach can be
useful when the developed length is known heuristically from some source (such as a manufacturing
vendor) and just needs to be incorporated into the model.
Best Practices
Before beginning the development of sheetmetal models in Creo Parametric, determine how the
developed length will be calculated. Accurate developed length calculations enable you to capture
your design intent in the solid model and to create accurate flat models that manufacturers can use to
develop the actual product.
PROCEDURE - Understanding Developed Length

Sheetmetal\Developed-Length WIDGET.PRT
Task 1: Examine and modify the developed length of a bend by changing the Y factor.
2. Select the Extrude 1(First Wall) feature in the
model tree and select Edit Dimensions from
the mini toolbar.
Note: The value for the developed length of the bend
is currently 4.14 (highlighted in green), in the image.
3. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.

• In the Sheetmetal section of the Model Properties dialog box, click change in the Bend
Allowance Y factor row.
• In the Sheetmetal Preferences dialog box, type 0.70 for the new Factor value.
• Click OK in the Sheetmetal Preferences dialog box.
• Close the Model Properties dialog box.

4. Note that the value for the developed length of
the bend is now 4.54, in the image.
Task 2: Unbend the model and measure the length of the flat model.
1. Select Unbend from the Unbend types drop-down menu in the Bends group.
3. Select the Analysis tab.
4. In the Measure group, select Distance from
the Measure types drop-down menu.
5. Press CTRL and select the edges shown for the
references.
Note: The resulting distance is 71.5416.
6. Close the Measure dialog box.
Task 3: Override the calculated developed length with a user-defined value and measure the length of
the flat model again.
1. Select Extrude 1(First Wall) and click Edit
Dimensions .
2. Double-click the 4.54 DEV.L dimension, and
type 5.12 as the new value and press ENTER.

4. Select Distance from the Measure types
drop-down menu.
5. Press CTRL and select the edges shown.
Note: The distance measured is now 72.1200. This
is because the user-defined value for the developed
length of the bend is now being used to drive the flat
length of the model instead of the Y factor calculated
value.

Creating a New Sheetmetal Part in Assembly Mode
There are three methods for creating a new sheetmetal model. One method is to create a new
sheetmetal part in Assembly mode.
Figure 1 – Creating a New Component in an Assembly
Creating a New Sheetmetal Part in Assembly Mode

You can create a new sheetmetal model in Assembly mode. When you are working inside of an
existing assembly, you can click the Create icon to open the Create Component dialog box. Once in
the Create Component dialog box, you must select the Sheetmetal option, type a File name, and click
OK. The Creation Options dialog box appears, and you can select the Copy from existing option and
then browse for the template file you wish to use.
PROCEDURE - Creating a New Sheetmetal Part in Assembly Mode

Sheetmetal\New-Part_Assembly MACHINE.ASM
Task 1: Create and assemble a new sheetmetal part in the MACHINE.ASM.
.
2. Click Create from the Component group.
3. In the Create Component dialog box, select
Part as the Type, if necessary, and select
Sheetmetal as the Sub-type.
4. Type front_enclosure in the File name field and
click OK.
5. In the Creation Options dialog box, verify that Copy from existing is selected.
Note: The default template in the Copy From field is for a solid part, not a sheetmetal part. While in
Assembly mode, there is no discrimination between solid and sheetmetal parts. Therefore, you will select
a sheetmetal template in the next step.

6. Click Browse and double-click the templates
folder.
7. Select PTC_MM_KG_SEC_SHEET.PRT in the
Choose template dialog box and click Open.
8. Verify that the dialog box appears as shown and
click OK to create the new sheetmetal part.

Default Constraint, as shown.
10. Click Complete Component to finish
assembling the component.
11. In the model tree, select FRONT_ENCLOSURE.

PRT and click Activate from the mini toolbar.
Note: Once the new FRONT_ENCLOSURE sheetmetal
part has been activated, the Sheetmetal icons appear
in the ribbon groups, indicating that the part is both
a solid part and a sheetmetal part.

Creating a New Sheetmetal Model in Part Mode
There are three methods for creating a new sheetmetal model. One method is to create a new
sheetmetal model in Part mode.
Figure 1 – Creating a New Sheetmetal Model in Part Mode

Creating a New Sheetmetal Model in Part Mode
You can create a new sheetmetal model in Part mode. You can click the New icon, select
the Sheetmetal radio button, and type a File name. You can then either click OK and use the
default sheetmetal template part or you can clear the Use default template check box, click OK,
and then browse for the sheetmetal template part you want to use. Note that you can use the
template_sheetmetalpart config option to specify the default template.
PROCEDURE - Creating a New Sheetmetal Model in Part Mode

Sheetmetal\New-Part CREATE NEW
Task 1: Create a new sheetmetal model.

2. Select Part as the Type, if necessary, and select
Sheetmetal as the Sub-type.
3. Type bracket in the File name field.
4. Clear the Use default template check box.
5. Verify that the dialog box appears as shown and
click OK.
6. In the New File Options dialog box, click Browse, double-click the templates folder, select
MM_KG_SEC_SHEET.PRT, and click Open.

7. Click OK to create a new sheetmetal part using
this template.
Note: Notice the presence of the sheetmetal
options in the ribbon. This is one way to know you
are in a sheetmetal part mode.
Task 2: Explore some of the entities that are in the part as the result of using the
MM_KG_SEC_SHEET.PRT template part.
1. In the model tree, click Show and select

Layer Tree .
• Notice that several layers have already been
created
2. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu
and select Parameters .
• Notice the parameters in the model.
3. Click Cancel to close the Parameters dialog box.
Note: The layers and parameters exist in the new
sheetmetal part because MM_KG_SEC_SHEET.PRT
was used as a template. All of these entities (and
others) existed in the template file and were copied
into the new file.

Converting Solid Models to Sheetmetal
There are three methods for creating a new sheetmetal model. One method is to convert a solid
model to a sheetmetal model.
Figure 1 – Conversion, Driving Surface, and Shell Dashboards
Converting Solid Models to Sheetmetal

You can convert existing solid models to sheetmetal models in Creo Parametric. Once you open a solid
model, you can click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Convert to Sheetmetal. The
Sheetmetal dashboard displays with the Driving Surface and Shell conversion options. Once you
complete either of these steps, the FIRST WALL feature is added to the model tree and you gain
access to the Sheetmetal menus and feature icons.
Once you have converted a solid model to a sheetmetal model, you can employ additional sheetmetal
features to help create a developable part. A developable part is typically defined as a sheetmetal
model that can display in its flat state and is capable of being manufactured. The most common tool
that you use for this task is the Conversion feature, but you can use any sheetmetal feature to create a
developable part.
Using the Shell Tool
For models that have block like part geometry, you can select the Shell option and specify which
surfaces have to be removed to create a shell model with a constant thickness.
Using the Driving Surface Tool
For models with nonuniform thickness or thin protrusions, you can select the Driving Surface option
and then select the driving surface.
You can define a constant wall thickness and also include or exclude surfaces from the part geometry.
The following options are available for adjacent rounds and chamfers treatment:
• Recreate – Rounds and chamfers are recognized and recreated.
• Remove – Rounds and chamfers are removed and a sharp edge is created.
• Ignore – Rounds and chamfers are recognized and side faces are trimmed back by the size of the
round or chamfer.
Note: You can import the sheetmetal parts from legacy systems and convert them into valid Creo
Parametric sheetmetal parts.
PROCEDURE - Converting Solid Models to Sheetmetal
Sheetmetal\Convert_Solid CONVERT.PRT
Task 1: Convert a solid model to a sheetmetal model using the Shell tool.
2. Examine the features in the model tree.
Note: The model currently consists of a default datum
coordinate system, three default datum planes, and
two extrude features.
3. Select Convert to Sheetmetal from the Operations group drop-down menu.

4. In the dashboard, click Shell from the First Wall group.
5. Press CTRL and select the two hidden surfaces
on the back of the model, as shown in the figure
(highlighted in green).
Note: You need to either query-select these
surfaces or rotate the model so that you can
select the surfaces directly.
6. Edit the thickness to 1.0 and click Complete
Feature from the dashboard.
7. Examine the features in the model tree.

Note: The First Wall feature has been added.
In addition, the Sheetmetal mode icons have
been added and the Solid mode icons have been
removed from the ribbon.
8. Rotate the model to examine the surfaces that

have been removed from the back of the model.
9. Click Close from the Quick access toolbar.

Task 2: Convert a legacy system model to a sheetmetal model using the Driving Surface tool.
1. In the ribbon, click Open .

2. In the File Open dialog box, select Creo Elements Direct from the Type drop-down list.
• Select CONVERT_CED.PKG and click Import.
3. In the Import New Model dialog box, review the
default selections and click OK.
Note: You can import a legacy system sheetmetal
part and convert it into a valid Creo Parametric
sheetmetal part.
4. Select Convert to Sheetmetal from the

Operations drop-down menu.
5. Click Driving Surface from the First Wall
group.
6. Select the driving surface as shown.
7. In the dashboard, select the References tab.

8. Click in the Include surfaces collector to
activate it.
9. Press CTRL and select surfaces as shown.
10. Select the Options tab.

11. Ensure that the Recreate radio button is
selected for Adjacent Rounds & Chamfers
treatment.
• Observe the rounds created in the resulting
geometry.
12. Select the Ignore radio button.
• Observe that the resulting geometry is
created without rounds.
13. Select the Remove radio button.

• Observe that the resulting geometry is similar
to the geometry created before the round
creation.

14. Edit the thickness to 2.0.
16. Click OK in the Troubleshooter dialog box.

Module 33
Creating Primary Sheetmetal Wall Features

Understanding Sheetmetal Wall Features
A wall is any section of sheetmetal.
Figure 2 – Secondary Wall Attached

Figure 1 – Primary Wall No References Along Green Edge
Figure 3 – Two Unattached Primary Walls Figure 4 – Secondary Wall Merged at Both Ends
Understanding Sheetmetal Wall Features
Sheetmetal walls are the main method of adding solid geometry to a sheetmetal model. They are
similar to the Protrusion feature in normal, non-sheetmetal solid models. There are two main types of
walls that you can create in sheetmetal models: primary wall and secondary wall features.
Primary Walls
Primary walls are sheetmetal wall features that do not need to reference existing sheetmetal features.
They are always the first sheetmetal feature in a sheetmetal model; they form sheetmetal geometry
which other sheetmetal features can reference. None of the sheetmetal features except for the primary
wall features are available until a primary wall has been created.
You can continue to create primary walls after an initial primary wall has been created, but these walls
are created as unattached primary walls and can later be attached to existing sheetmetal geometry.
Secondary Walls
Unlike primary wall features, secondary wall features need to reference existing sheetmetal geometry.
Typically the first step in creating a secondary wall is to select an edge of an existing sheetmetal
wall to which you will attach the secondary wall.
Attached versus Unattached Walls
By definition, secondary walls are attached walls – as the name suggests, they are attached to an
existing wall. However, since primary walls can be created without referencing any other existing
sheetmetal geometry, it is possible to create more than one primary wall in a sheetmetal design. One
such example can be seen in figures 3 and 4. The first wall was created as a primary wall (marked 1 in
Figure 3), and then another primary wall was created (marked 2 in Figure 3). A secondary wall with a
wall flange (marked 3 in Figure 4) was then attached to wall 1 (shown by the green arrow) because the
top edge of wall 1 where the green arrow is, was selected as a reference for the wall.
This secondary wall (3) is later attached to wall 2 with a merge feature along the edge where the red
arrow is shown. Once wall 3 is attached at both ends, the geometry becomes one continuous piece
of sheetmetal geometry and other useful sheetmetal features (such as the unbend feature) can be
applied to it.
This type of approach is often useful in top-down designs where the location of some geometry is
known and other geometry is needed to bridge between these known locations.
Creating Planar Walls

A planar wall is a planar, unbent section of sheetmetal.
Figure 1 – Completed Planar Wall Figure 2 – Planar Wall Icon in the Ribbon
Figure 3 – Planar Wall Icon in the Mini Toolbar
Creating Planar Walls

Primary planar walls can take any flat shape because you either select or create a closed sketch that
defines the extents of the feature. You can use the Planar icon for this type of feature, and it is
located in the Shapes group section of the ribbon and in the mini toolbar.
PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Walls

Sheetmetal\Wall_Primary-Planar BLANK.PRT
Task 1: Create a primary planar wall feature.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the graphics window, select datum plane TOP and click Planar from the mini toolbar.

3. Select Corner Rectangle from the Rectangle
types drop-down menu in the Sketching group
and sketch the rectangle.
4. Click One-by-One from the Operations group
and edit the dimensions as shown.
5. Click OK from the dashboard to complete

the sketch.
6. Type 1.50 in the thickness field in the dashboard,
as shown.
Note: The thickness set for this wall modifies
the value of the thickness parameter
(SMT_THICKNESS), which controls the thickness
of the entire sheetmetal part. Editing the first wall
feature displays the thickness dimension, because
it is the first wall feature in the sheetmetal model.

Extruded Sheetmetal Wall Features
You can use the Extrude tool to create a primary wall feature.
Figure 1 – Competed Extruded Primary Wall
Extruded Sheetmetal Wall Features

An extruded wall is created by taking a sketch you create and extending it normal to the sketch plane.
This creates a surface to which you can add sheetmetal thickness to the inside or outside. You can
use the Extrude icon for this type of feature, and it is located in the Shapes group section in the
ribbon and in the mini toolbar.
PROCEDURE - Extruded Sheetmetal Wall Features

Sheetmetal\Wall_Primary-Extrude BEAM.PRT
Task 1: Create a primary extruded wall feature.

2. In the model tree, select datum plane FRONT and click Extrude from the mini toolbar.
Note: The tool has automatically been set to Solid .

3. Select Line Chain from the Line types
drop-down menu in the Sketching group and
sketch the two lines.
4. Select One-by-One from the Select types
drop-down menu in the Operations group and
edit the dimensions, as shown.
5. Click OK from the dashboard to complete
the sketch.
6. From the dashboard, select the Options tab and

select the Add bends on sharp edges check
box, if necessary.
7. Type 5.0 in the Radius field and verify that the
dimension side is set to Inside, as shown.
8. Type 500 in the dashboard depth field and type 3.5 in the thickness field, as shown.


Revolved Sheetmetal Wall Features
You can use the Revolve tool to create a primary wall feature.
Figure 1 – Completed Revolved Wall Figure 2 – Revolved Wall Icon in the ribbon
Figure 3 – Revolved Wall Icon in the mini toolbar
Revolved Sheetmetal Wall Features

A revolved wall is created by taking a sketch you create, and rotating it about an axis. This creates a
surface to which you can add sheetmetal thickness to the inside or outside. You can use the Revolve
icon to create this type of feature, and it is located in the Shapes group drop-down menu in the
ribbon and in the mini toolbar.
PROCEDURE - Revolved Sheetmetal Wall Features

Sheetmetal\Wall_Primary-Revolve COLLAR.PRT
Task 1: Create a primary revolved wall feature.

2. In the graphics window, select datum plane FRONT and click Revolve from the mini toolbar.

4. Click Centerline from the Datum group and
sketch a geometry centerline on the vertical
reference.
5. Click Line Chain from the Sketching group
and sketch the vertical and horizontal lines.
6. Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc
types drop-down menu and sketch the arc.
7. Click Tangent from the Constrain group and
constrain both ends of the arc tangent to the
line entities.
8. Click Dimension from the Dimension group
and dimension the sketch.
9. Click OK to complete the sketch.

Blend Sheetmetal Wall Features
Multiple sections can join together to create a Blend Primary Wall feature.
Figure 1 – Completed Blend Primary Wall Feature Figure 2 – Blend Wall Icon Location
Blend Sheetmetal Wall Features

You can create a blended wall by connecting two or more sketched sections together. You can also
connect two or more pre-existing sketches together, and the sketches do not have to be parallel to
each other. This creates a surface to which you can add sheetmetal thickness to the inside or outside.
You can use the Blend icon for this type of feature, and it is located in the Shapes group of the ribbon.
PROCEDURE - Blend Sheetmetal Wall Features

Sheetmetal\Wall_Primary-Blend FUNNEL.PRT
Task 1: Create a Blended Primary Wall feature.
.
2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and
select Blend .
3. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
• Select Straight as the Blended surfaces
option.
4. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab.

• Click Define.
5. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch.

6. Select Center and Point from the Circle
types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
7. Sketch the circle, middle-click, and edit the
diameter to 10.
8. Click OK from the dashboard.
9. Select the Sections tab.

• Edit the offset to 75.
• Click Sketch.
10. Reorient the model to view the section crosshair.
11. Click Center and Point and sketch the circle,
then middle-click and edit the diameter to 20.
12. Click OK .
13. Select the Sections tab.

• Click Insert.
• Edit the offset to 75.
• Click Sketch.
14. Reorient the model to view the section crosshair.
15. Click Center and Point and sketch the circle,
then middle-click and edit the diameter to 120.
16. When you finish sketching and dimensioning the
geometry, click OK to leave Sketcher mode.

Creating Offset Walls

You can use surfaces to create an offset wall feature.
Figure 1 – Surface Feature Figure 2 – Completed Offset Primary Wall
Creating Offset Walls

An offset wall is created by specifying an existing surface, and the direction and distance you wish
to offset. This creates a new surface to which you can add sheetmetal thickness to the inside or
outside. You can click the Offset icon, located in the Editing group of the ribbon, for this type of
feature. The Sheetmetal Offset Wall utilizes the same offset function from core part mode. Therefore,
offset types such as Normal To Surface, Automatic Fit, and Controlled Fit are available, as well as the
Special Handling option to exclude surfaces from the offset operation. In Sheetmetal mode, the offset
tool offers these additional options:
• Sheetmetal Offset Options:
– Add bend on sharp edges – Apply a bend radius to an otherwise sharp edge in the resulting
offset wall.
– Set driving surface opposite offset surface – Flip the green Sheetmetal surface to the other side
of the wall.
– Merge to model – Merge the offset wall with existing adjacent walls.

PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Walls
Sheetmetal\Wall_Offset CASE.PRT
Task 1: Create a primary offset wall feature.
2. In the ribbon, click Offset from the Editing group.
3. Select the quilt to offset, as shown.
4. Edit the offset distance to 25.0 and the thickness

to 10.0, if necessary.
5. Select the Options tab, select the Add bends

on sharp edges check box, if necessary, and
edit the radius to 35.0.

Sheetmetal Wall Sketching Tools
The Thicken option is available in Sketcher mode for sheetmetal features.
Figure 1 – Before Thicken Figure 2 – After Thicken

Sheetmetal Wall Sketching Tools
Sheetmetal bends are often formed on a break where the sheetmetal is bent over a specifically sized
die to form an inside radius. Since the inside radius of the bend is set by a specifically sized die, it is
important to the design intent of a model. As a designer, you may run into situations where the sketch
you are creating is dimensioning to an outside diameter.
An example of a sketch where this may happen is shown in Figure 1. The design intent for this model
is to create the sheetmetal thickness to the right of the sketch, to dimension all bends as 5.00 mm
inside radius bends, and to dimension the right-most vertical member to the far side of the thickness.
The weak (light blue) dimensions do not match this design intent.
You can use the Thicken sketcher tool to incorporate the correct dimensioning scheme (and therefore
the correct design intent) into your features. It creates a set of construction entities that are offset from
the geometry you have sketched. You can select the side and distance to which the offset occurs, and
this in turn sets the direction and thickness of the solid sheetmetal geometry.
The most useful aspect of this set of offset entities is the ability to dimension to them. You can
dimension the inside radius of a sketch even if the geometry you have sketched is the outside radius.
Furthermore, you can dimension to offset entities, to match the dimensioning scheme of your feature
to the design intent of your model. An example of this is shown in Figure 2. The offset entity is used to
create an inside radius 5.00 mm dimension and the 29.00 mm dimension. Both of these dimensions
belong to the offset entities created by the Thicken tool.
Best Practices
Outside radius dimensions that are left as weak dimensions prior to using the Thicken tool, change
to weak inside radius dimensions after you use the Thicken tool.
PROCEDURE - Sheetmetal Wall Sketching Tools

Sheetmetal\Sketch_Tools BRACE.PRT
Task 1: Create an extruded primary wall feature with an existing sketch, but re-dimension the sketch
to match your design intent.
Note: The design intent for this model is to create a brace that is 25 mm thick and uses bends that
have inside radii dimensions all equal to 5 mm. You will discover that the existing sketch that currently
uses these dimensions does not have the correct design intent (due to the material thickness of the
sheetmetal) and will need to be re-dimensioned.

2. In the model tree, select Sketch 1 and click Extrude from the mini toolbar.
3. Click Solid from the dashboard.
4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.
• Click OK in the Unlink dialog box.
5. Click Edit from the Placement tab to start
Sketcher mode.
Note: Notice the presence of the weak 25.00 and
5.00 dimensions in the sketch.
6. Click the Setup drop-down menu and select
Feature Tools > Thicken.
7. Click Flip > Okay from the menu manager to flip the arrow to the right.
8. Type 2.0 as the thickness and press ENTER.
Note: The addition of the offset construction line represents the thickness of the sheetmetal material.
Also note that the weak 5.00 dimension has automatically moved to the inside radius and is now 3.00.
9. Edit the 3.00 dimension to 5.0 and press ENTER.
and select the thickness line and the vertical
reference line to create the 29.00 dimension,
as shown.
11. Select the 29.00 dimension and click Modify .
• Type a value of 25.00 in the Modify
Dimensions dialog box and click OK.
13. Type 100 for the depth in the dashboard.

Advanced Primary Walls

There are many less common but often useful types of primary walls.
Figure 1 – Variable Section Sweep Figure 2 – Swept Blend
Figure 3 – Helical Sweep Figure 4 – Boundary Blend
Advanced Primary Walls

In addition to the most common types of primary walls, there are quite a few less common but often
useful types of primary walls:
• Variable Section Sweep – A variable section sweep creates a primary wall feature by sweeping a
section along the selected trajectories and simultaneously controlling the section’s orientation,
rotation, and geometry along the trajectory. In Figure 1, the trajectories used to create the wall are
shown in red, and the section is shown in blue.
• Swept Blend – A swept blend creates a primary wall feature by sweeping along a trajectory, while
simultaneously varying the cross-section from one user-defined cross-section to the next. In Figure
2, the trajectory used to create the wall is shown in red, and the sections are shown in blue.
• Helical Sweep – A helical sweep creates a primary wall feature by sweeping a section along a helical
(corkscrew-like) trajectory.
• Boundary Blend – The Boundary Blend option creates a primary wall feature by enabling you to
create a surface by specifying curves that the surface will pass through in one or two directions.
From this surface, the offset surface is created and the sheetmetal material is added. In Figure 4,
the curves used as boundaries in the first direction are shown in red, and the boundaries in the
second direction are shown in blue.
• Blend Tangent to Surfaces – The Blend Tangent to Surfaces option enables you to create a blended
surface tangent to surfaces from an edge or a curve. This surface then becomes the driving surface
for a sheetmetal primary wall.

Module 34
Creating Secondary Sheetmetal Wall Features

Understanding Secondary Walls
Secondary walls are dependent on at least one primary wall.
Figure 1 – Flat Figure 2 – Flange
Figure 4 – Extend
Figure 3 – Extruded
Figure 5 – Twist Figure 6 – Merge

Understanding Secondary Walls
You can create secondary walls by referencing at least one primary wall. A secondary wall is always a
child feature of the primary wall it references.
You can create any primary wall type as a secondary wall. In addition to the primary walls, there are six
other wall features that can ONLY be created as secondary walls:
• Flat – You can create a secondary flat wall using the Flat icon (as opposed to a primary flat wall
that is created using the Planar icon). You create it by referencing the edge of an existing wall and
then using a modifiable predefined shape (rectangle, trapezoid, L, or T) or a user-defined sketch. You
use an open sketch that is attached to the referenced edge to define the shape of the wall. You can
specify the angle of the attachment as well as the radius of an optional bend.
• Flange – A flange wall takes a commonly used predefined shape, a common hem shape, or
user-defined shape and sweeps it along a trajectory of referenced edges. You can create it using the
Flange icon.
• Extruded – The extruded wall is very similar to a flange wall. For this type of secondary wall, a single
straight edge is selected to act as an extrude direction and a sketched section is created that follows
along this edge to create the sheetmetal geometry.
You can use the Extrude icon to create this type of wall.
• Extend – An extend wall lengthens an existing wall. You can extend the wall from a straight edge on
an existing wall to either a planar surface or a specified distance.
You can use the Extend icon to create this type of wall.
• Twist – You can create a twist wall by selecting a straight edge on an existing planar wall. It is formed
by extending the wall and twisting it around an axis that typically runs through the center of the wall
(although a different point on the wall can be specified). The distance of extension and degrees of
twist are specified by the user.
• Merge – The Merge Walls tool combines two or more unattached walls that are tangent and touching
each other into one contiguous wall. You can use the Merge Walls icon to create the feature.
Unattached Primary Walls
As mentioned, you can create all of the primary wall types as secondary walls. Typically, you create
a primary wall as an unattached wall after the initial primary wall has been created in the model.
For example, you can create the side walls of a sheetmetal model before knowing what the middle
section will look like.
This is similar to the use of separate parts in assembly mode, where you have parts of the model that
are completely separate from other parts of the model. However, eventually these unattached primary
walls need to be attached (with the Merge Walls tool) to the primary wall to have a valid sheetmetal
model, for example, a single contiguous piece of sheetmetal in a part model.
Once the unattached wall has been attached via the Merge Walls tool, it becomes a child of the Merge
Walls feature. Since it is dependent on another wall feature, it becomes a secondary wall.
Creating Secondary Flat Walls

Secondary flat walls are planar walls that are attached to a straight edge of an existing wall.
Figure 1 – Rectangle Figure 2 – Trapezoid
Figure 3 – L Figure 4 – T
Creating Secondary Flat Walls
You can create a secondary flat wall by referencing a straight edge on an existing wall. You can then
specify a number of different elements that determine the final configuration of the flat wall.
Predefined Shapes
First you should specify the overall shape of the wall. The wall is always created as an open loop
sketch that is attached to the referenced straight edge. You can select a predefined sketch shape or
define the sketch yourself.
You can select from the following predefined shapes:
• Rectangle
• Trapezoid
• L
• T
Modifying Predefined Shapes
You can modify a predefined shape in a number of different ways:
• Drag handles – Drag handles appear on the model that enable you to click the shape and drag it to a
new location while the preview geometry updates in real-time.
• Modifying dimensions – You can double-click any dimension and specify a new value for it.
• Sketch mode – You can take the predefined geometry into Sketch mode and manipulate it there.
You can delete, modify, or create new entities in Sketch mode to create a shape that matches your
design intent. The only requirement for the sketch is that it is an open loop with the open ends of the
sketch terminating at the edge you referenced for attachment.
Wall Angle
You can also control the angle of the wall from 0 to 180 degrees. A 0 degree wall inserts the wall
parallel to the existing wall. You cannot use a negative angle or an angle greater than 180 degrees to
make the wall angle reverse its direction. Instead you must select the sheetmetal edge on the opposite
side of the edge you selected as the attachment reference.
PROCEDURE - Creating Secondary Flat Walls

Sheetmetal\Wall_Secondary-Planar BLANK.PRT
Task 1: Create a secondary flat wall.
2. Select the edge on the top-left side of the
model, as shown.
3. Click Flat from the mini toolbar.
Note: The Rectangle shape has been selected by
default.
4. Select L from the Shape drop-down list in the

dashboard, as shown.

5. In the dashboard, edit the radius value to 5.0.
6. Click the angle drag handle and drag the wall to
110 degrees, as shown.
7. Drag the drag handle for the longer side of the L

wall to a value of 40, as shown.
8. In the dashboard, select the Shape tab and edit

the height of the shorter side of the L wall to 20,
then press ENTER.
9. Click Sketch from the Shape tab to start the
Sketch mode.
10. Select Circular from the Fillet types

create the fillet, as shown.
11. Click One-by-One from the Operations group
and edit the fillet radius dimension to 10.0, then
click OK to complete the sketch.

12. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard
to complete the feature.
Using Flange Walls

A flange wall is a folded sheetmetal wall that is attached to straight or swept edges.
Figure 1 – I Figure 2 – Arc Figure 3 – S
Figure 4 – Z Figure 5 – Open Figure 6 – Flushed
Figure 7 – Joggle Figure 8 – C Figure 9 – Duck
Using Flange Walls

A flange wall is a folded sheetmetal wall that is attached to straight or swept edges. You select an
edge or a set of adjacent edges (they must form a continuous path) to which you will attach the flange
wall. You can then specify the profile of the wall as well as other dashboard options.
Flange Wall Profiles
There are three basic types of flange wall profiles:
• Frequently Used Shapes – The frequently used shapes that are available as predefined geometry
are the I, Arc, and S shapes.
• Hem Shapes – The hems that are available are: Open, Flushed, Joggle, C, Z, and Duck.
• User-defined shapes – Similar to secondary flat walls, you can start with predefined geometry and
then start Sketch mode and manipulate it there. You can delete, modify, or create new entities in
Sketch mode to create a shape that matches your design intent. The only requirement for the sketch
is that it is an open sketch with one end terminating at the edge you referenced for attachment.
In all cases, care must be taken not to use angles, bends, or geometry that would cause the flange
wall to double over itself. If this happens, the geometry cannot be formed and the preview geometry
stops being generated.
Flange Wall Dashboard Options
In addition to having the dashboard options that are common to both secondary flat and secondary
flange walls, you can also set the following options that are specific to flange walls:
• Length – By default, Creo Parametric creates the flange wall from the start to the end of the edge
chain you select for attachment. If you want either end of the wall to stop short of or extend beyond
the selected chain, you can use the Length option on the Flange Wall dashboard. There are three
settings for either end of the wall:
– Chain End – When this option is selected (it is the default setting), the wall begins (or terminates) at
the end of the chain you selected for attachment.
– Blind – Using the Blind option, you specify a positive or negative linear distance where the wall
terminates relative to the chain end.
– To Selected – The To Selected option enables you to have the wall terminate at a piece of
geometry that you select. Points, curves, planes, and surfaces are references that you can select
to set the extents of the wall on either end.
• Miter Cuts – The Miter Cuts option (selected by default) adds miter cuts in areas between intersecting
tangent wall segments. You can specify the width and offset of the miter cut, as well as whether
or not to keep all deform areas. Below is an example of geometry with these miter cuts (shown by
the black arrows in Figure 10). Figure 11 is the same flange with the Keep all deformation areas
check box selected.
Figure 10 – Miter Cuts
Figure 11 – Miter Cuts with Deform Areas

If you decide to disable the Miter Cuts option, the preview geometry becomes unavailable in
situations where the geometry intersects itself.
• Edge Treatment – The Edge Treatment options (shown in Figures 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16) enable you
to specify how you would like walls placed on adjacent non-tangent edges to behave where they
meet each other.
Figure 12 – Open
Figure 13 – Close corner

Figure 14 – Gap
Figure 15 – Blind
Figure 16 – Overlap

PROCEDURE - Using Flange Walls
Sheetmetal\Wall_Secondary-Flange BLANK2.PRT
Task 1: Create a flange wall.
2. Select the bottom front edge and click Flange
Note: The I profile has been selected by default.
3. Select Open from the Shape drop-down list in

the dashboard.
4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and
click Details.
5. In the Chain dialog box, select Rule-based for
the reference type and select Complete loop
as the Rule.
• Click OK.
6. Select I from the Shape drop-down list in the

dashboard.
7. Select the Shape tab and click Sketch.
8. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
types drop-down menu in the Sketching group
and sketch the arc tangent to the vertical line.
sketch a line tangent to the arc.
11. Constrain the second line to Vertical if
necessary.
and dimension the sketch, editing the values as
shown.
13. Click OK .

14. In the dashboard, select the Edge Treatment
tab.
• Verify that Edge Treatment #1 is selected
and select Gap from the Type drop-down list.
• Type 2.00 for the gap dimension and press
ENTER.
15. Repeat the above step for Edge Treatment #2
and Edge Treatment #3.
16. In the dashboard, select the Miter Cuts tab.
• Type 2.00 for the gap dimension and press
ENTER.
18. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Corner
Relief Notes and Bend Notes from the
Annotation Display types drop-down menu to
disable their display.
Using Extruded Walls

You can use the Extrude tool to create extruded walls to handle special modeling requirements.
Extruded Walls
• For non-circular bends
• Constant thickness
– Thickness set by primary wall
• No automatic bends
• No automatic thickness side
• No automatic attachment Figure 1 – Elliptical Bend Example
– Merge Walls tool necessary for attachment
Figure 2 – Wrong side Thickness
Figure 3 – Invalid Attachment

Using Extruded Walls
Flat and flange secondary walls enable you to automatically add a bend at the attachment edge.
However, if you use flat and flange type walls you can only add constant radius type bends. If you
need to create an elliptical or any other non-circular type bend, you can use the Extrude tool in
sheetmetal to create such a wall. An example of an elliptical bend wall is shown in Figure 1.
You can also use the Extrude tool to create an extruded sheetmetal wall. All extruded solid features
would be the same thickness as the rest of the sheetmetal walls in the model.
Note: In addition to creating sheetmetal walls, you can also use the Extrude tool to create solid cuts
and surfaces in your sheetmetal model.
When you use the Extrude tool to create a sheetmetal wall, Creo Parametric requires you to specify
the attachment details. You must add any necessary bends in the sketch, make sure that the material
is added on the correct side of the extruded section, take care of any tangencies that are necessary
for the feature, and integrate the new extruded wall feature into the existing primary walls using the
Merge Walls tool. In Figure 2, you can view an example of thickness being added to the wrong side.
In Figure 3, the attachment is inappropriate for the existing wall.
Note: If you create partial or overextended walls using an extruded wall, you may also need to create
datum features to use as starting or ending reference points.
Best Practices
In most cases, unless you have a special need that requires the Extruded Wall tool (such as an
elliptically shaped bend), it is far easier to use a flange type wall attached along a single edge to
generate this type of geometry.
PROCEDURE - Using Extruded Walls

Sheetmetal\Wall_Secondary-Flange EXTRUDE_BLANK.PRT
Task 1: Create an extruded wall.
2. In the ribbon, click Extrude from the Shapes
group.
3. Select the front surface as the sketch plane, as
shown.

types drop-down menu and sketch an arc,
starting at the origin, tangent to the horizontal
reference.
drop-down menu and sketch a line tangent to
the right arc endpoint.
and dimension the sketch, editing the values as
shown.
7. Click OK .
8. Click Remove Material from the Extrude
dashboard to toggle it off.
9. Click Change Thickness Side from the

dashboard.
Note: The wall preview has now flipped to the
correct side of the sketch.
10. Drag the depth handle to drag the depth of the

extruded wall to 50.
Note: Although you have overextended the wall beyond the attachment edge, the extruded wall
geometry did not stay attached beyond the point of overextension. Instead, it continued creating the
shape exactly as it was sketched.

11. Click To Selected from the Depth option
drop-down menu.
12. Select the vertex as shown, for the depth
reference.

Wall Dashboard Options
Wall dashboard options enable you to fully capture your design intent in Creo Parametric
sheetmetal walls.
• Placement • Properties
• Shape • Thickness Side
• Offset • Bend/No Bend
• Relief • Bend Radius
• Bend Allowance • I/O Bend Dimension
Figure 2 – Offset: Add to Part Edge

Figure 1 – Offset: None
Figure 3 – Offset: Automatic Figure 4 – Offset: By Value
Wall Dashboard Options

Several dashboard options common to secondary flat walls and secondary flange walls are available to
enable you to fully capture your design intent in a Creo Parametric sheetmetal model. Consider the
options in the list below and how they might relate to capturing your design intent:
• Placement – The sketch (for flat walls) or the edge chain (for flange walls).
• Shape – The shape is used to build the wall. The Shape option also enables you to flip the sketch
profile in the flange walls.
Note: To enable the Flip profile option in Shape tab, set the smt_allow_flip_sketch configuration option
to yes.
• Offset – The Offset option enables you to decide how far to offset the newly added geometry from
the attachment edge. By default, this option is disabled and the wall is added to the geometry as
though the sketch were connected to the attachment edge for flat walls and common profile flange
walls (specifically, the I, Arc, and S profiles). If you are adding a flange wall using a hem profile, the
wall is added as though you were using the Add to Part edge setting detailed below.
If you activate the offset option by selecting the Offset wall with respect to attachment edge check
box, you have three available settings.
– Automatic – This setting offsets the new wall and trims the wall it is attached to so that the new
wall's farthest extent aligns with the old location of the attachment wall's edge.
– Add to part edge – This setting appends the new wall to the attachment edge without trimming
the wall to which it is attached.
– By value – This setting enables you to offset the wall a specific distance by using a drag handle or
adjusting the numeric offset value.
An example of each offset setting can be seen in this example. The existing wall displays in gray and
the new wall that would result from each of the offset options displays in transparent yellow.
• Relief – Creo Parametric offers a number of different types of relief. For partial secondary flat and
partial secondary flange walls (walls that do not extend to the end of the referenced edge or
edge chain), five different types of bend relief are available: No relief, Rip, Stretch, Obround, and
Rectangular. For secondary flange walls that use an edge chain that consists of non-tangent entities,
five different types of corner relief are also available: No relief, V Notch, Circular, Rectangular, and
Obround.
• Bend Allowance – Using this dashboard option enables you to set the bend allowance for the wall to
an allowance specific to the feature, instead of using the default bend allowance for the entire part.
• Properties – The properties field enables you to specify the name of the feature. There is also an
information tool which enables you to gather information about the feature you are building.
• Thickness Side – The Change Thickness Side icon on the dashboard enables you to change the
thickness of the sheetmetal material to the other side of a sketch plane for flat walls, or to the other
side of the sketch for flange walls. The practical application of this can be seen in Figures 5 and 6.
The existing wall that a new flat wall is attached to displays in gray, a yellow circle represents the
edge of the existing wall referenced for attachment, and the sketch plane for the flat wall displays
in black. Note that all of this geometry is exactly the same in both cases. The only difference
occurs when the thickness of the wall is added to one side of the sketch plane versus the other. If
your design intent is to have this model fit inside of something, you would likely use the Thickness
Inside option. If your design intent is to have this model fit over the outside of something, you would
likely use the Thickness Outside option.
Figure 5 – Thickness Inside

Figure 6 – Thickness Outside
• Bend/No bend – The Add Bend tool in the dashboard enables you to add a sheetmetal bend to a
wall, or to add the wall without the bend exactly as the sketch profile would create the geometry.
Note that this option is not available for hem type flange walls profiles. It is only available for the
Open, Flushed, C, Z, and Duck profiles.
• Bend Radius – The Bend Radius field enables you to specify the bend radius from the dashboard.
• Inside/Outside Bend Radius Dimension – You can click the Inside Radius or Outside Radius
icon to toggle between dimensioning a bend using the inside or outside radius. Creo Parametric
defaults to an inside radius.
PROCEDURE - Wall Dashboard Options

Sheetmetal\Dashboard-Options OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Edit the definition of the Flat 1 feature.
2. In the model tree, select Flat 1 and click Edit
Definition from the mini toolbar.
3. Enable the addition of an edge bend by clicking
Add Bend from the Flat dashboard.
4. Select Inside Radius from the Radius
Dimension Type drop-down list to dimension
the inside of the radius.
5. In the radius dimension field, type 5.0, if
necessary, and press ENTER.
6. Click Change Thickness Side from the
dashboard and note how the thickness of the
sheetmetal moves from one side of the sketch
plane to the other.
Task 2: Explore the different offset options.
1. Select the Offset tab from the dashboard.
2. Select the Offset wall with respect to attachment edge check box.
Note: Observe the appearance of the offset drag handle.

3. Right-click the offset drag handle, as shown.
Note: You can select the Offset option from this menu
or from the dashboard panel.
4. Select Add to part edge.

Note: The feature is added to the existing wall without
consuming any of it.
5. Right-click the offset drag handle again and

select By Value.
6. Drag the drag handle for the offset dimension
(currently 7.00) to 3.00 below the attachment
edge, as shown.
Task 3: Change the bend allowance for Flat 1 to a feature-specific Y factor.

1. Select the Bend Allowance tab from the
dashboard.
2. Select Use feature settings from the Developed
length calculation drop-down list.
3. Select By Y factor, type 0.57, and press ENTER,
as shown.
Note: This bend allowance is specific for this feature (using a Y factor of 0.57), regardless of how the
bend allowances are calculated in the rest of the part.

5. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard
Orientation.
Using Partial and Overextended Walls

Partial walls are walls that do not extend to the end of the referenced edge or edge chain.
• Partial/Overextended Wall Definitions
• Creation Methods
• Bend Relief
Figure 1 – Full Wall
Figure 2 – Overextended Wall Figure 3 – Partial Wall
Using Partial and Overextended Walls

By default, Creo Parametric creates full walls when you create a new secondary flat or secondary
flange wall. A full wall is a wall that attaches to the entire edge or edge chain that you reference for
attachment when building the wall.
Partial Walls are walls that do not extend to the end of the referenced edge or edge chain.
Overextended walls are walls that extend beyond the end of the referenced edge or edge chain.
Creo Parametric enables you to build partial and overextended walls, so that you can fully capture
your design intent in sheetmetal wall features.
Methods of Creating Partial and Overextended Walls
It is possible to create partial walls for both secondary flat walls and secondary flange walls.
• Flat Walls – When creating secondary flat walls, there are three ways to create a partial or
overextended wall:
– Change a standard shape's dimensions such that it starts and/or ends along the attachment edge
somewhere other than endpoints.
– Use drag handles to drag the start or end points of a standard shape such that it starts and/or
ends along the attachment edge somewhere other than endpoints.
– Sketch a custom shape with its ends dimensioned or constrained such that it starts and/or ends
along the attachment edge somewhere other than endpoints.
• Flange Walls – As discussed in the Using Flange Walls concept, you can use the following icons to
control where a flange wall begins and ends along an edge chain that it is attached to:
Trim First End Trim Second End
Trim First End To Reference Trim Second End To Reference
Use First End Use Second End
Note: All of these techniques can be used to create partial or overextended walls.
Adding Bend Relief
When you create a partial secondary wall that includes a bend at the attachment point, it is possible that
the bend extends back into the existing attached wall. Additionally, when you create an overextended
secondary wall that includes a bend at the attachment point, it is possible that the bend extends into
the existing attached wall. You may need to specify a bend relief so that Creo Parametric knows how
to transition from the existing wall to the partial secondary wall.
Note: Typically no relief is needed when both ends of a secondary wall terminate at the endpoints of
the attachment edge.
There are five different settings you can use to provide bend relief for a secondary wall when necessary:
No relief, Rip, Stretch, Obround, and Rectangular.
PROCEDURE - Using Partial and Overextended Walls

Sheetmetal\Wall_Partial_Overextend PARTIAL.PRT
Task 1: Create a new partial flat wall feature that is overextended on one end.
2. Select the edge on the bottom-left side of the
model, as shown.
3. Click Flat from the mini toolbar.

4. Drag the drag handle near the top of the screen
down to 5.00, editing it if necessary.
5. Drag the drag handle near the bottom of the
screen down to 7.00, editing it if necessary.
Task 2: Change the order of Flange 1 in the model tree and change the length options such that it
becomes a partial and overextended wall.
1. Select Flange 1 from the model tree and drag
it below the Flat 1 feature you just created, as
shown.
2. Right-click Flange 1 from the model tree and

click Edit Definition .
Note: The length options for the ends of the
flange wall are currently set to Use First End
and Use Second End .
3. Drag the drag handle near the top of the screen
down until the wall is –15.00 inside the edge of
the wall it is attached to, as shown.
Note: The length option for the first end has
automatically changed to Trim First End since
you dragged it to a new location.

4. Select Trim Second End To Reference from
the Second End Length Options drop-down list.
5. Select the side surface of the overextended
edge of the flat wall, as shown.

Understanding Relief
Bend reliefs and corner reliefs are often necessary when creating secondary walls.
Figure 1 – No Bend Relief Figure 2 – Rip Bend Relief Figure 3 – Stretch Bend Relief
Figure 4 – Rectangular
Bend Relief Figure 5 – Obround Bend Relief Figure 6 – No Corner Relief
Figure 7 – V notch Corner Relief Figure 8 – Circular Corner Relief Corner Relief
Figure 10 – Obround Corner

Relief Figure 11 – Normal Corner Relief Figure 12 – Square Corner Relief
Understanding Relief
There are two primary types of relief available for secondary walls:
• Bend Relief – Relief added when a bend meets a wall.
• Corner Relief – Relief added where multiple non-tangent adjacent walls fold next to each other.
Bend Relief
Often the creation of partial secondary walls results in the new wall either extending into the wall it is
attached to (for partial walls), or the wall it is attached to extending into the new wall. In these cases, it is
often necessary to specify a bend relief to enable Creo Parametric to transition from the existing wall to
the partial secondary wall. There are five types of bend relief that you can use.

Figure 13 – No relief
As the name suggests, this option is used when you wish to provide no bend relief. However, in some
cases (particularly with partial walls), if this option is used, Creo Parametric creates a stretch-like
relief that runs to the end of the wall.
Figure 14 – Rip
The rip relief creates a zero volume cut as though the material were ripped as the bend was formed.
Figure 15 – Stretch
The stretch relief stretches the material for bend relief at wall attachment points.

The rectangular relief creates a rectangular cut of specifiable dimensions.
Figure 17 – Obround
The obround relief creates a rectangular cut with a semicircular top of specifiable dimensions.
Corner Relief
Corner relief helps control the sheetmetal material behavior and prevents unwanted deformation. You
can add corner reliefs using an option available in the flange wall dashboard or as a separate feature by
using the Corner Relief icon.
Figure 18 – No relief

Figure 19 – V notch
Figure 20 – Circular

Figure 22 – Obround
Figure 23 – Normal

Figure 24 – Square
PROCEDURE - Understanding Relief

Sheetmetal\Relief_Bend RELIEF.PRT
Task 1: Edit the existing Flange 1 wall and explore the bend relief options.
2. Select Flat 1 and click Edit Definition from
the mini toolbar.
3. Notice the relief on both ends of the wall
defaults to the rip relief type.

4. In the dashboard, select the Relief tab.
5. Select Stretch from the Type drop-down list.
6. Select Thickness in the width field, then type
5.0 and press ENTER.
7. Notice that the relief type on both ends of the
wall is now the stretch relief type.
8. Select Rectangular from the Type drop-down

list.
Note: The depth of the relief defaults to the Up
to bend option.
9. Click Preview Feature from the dashboard
to view the result.
10. After you are done viewing the result, click
Resume Feature .

11. In the dashboard, select the Relief tab.
12. Select the Define each side separately check
box.
• Select Side 2.
13. Select Obround from the Type drop-down list.
14. Select Blind from the depth drop-down list,
type 12.0 as the depth value, and press ENTER.
Creating Twist Wall Features

Twist walls enable you to create spiraling or coiling sections of sheetmetal.
• Wall rotates symmetric about the twist wall.
• Multiple ways to define the twist axis location.
• Modify the shape:
– Wall length
– Twist angle
– End wall width (Optional)
• Define bend allowance Figure 1 – Trimmed Ends
Figure 3 – Datum Point Specified as

Figure 2 – Twist Axis Centered About Wall Width Twist Axis Location
Creating Twist Wall Features
Twist walls enable you to create spiraling or coiling sections of sheetmetal. You can do this by clicking
the Shapes group drop-down menu in the ribbon and selecting Twist . Select a straight edge to
attach the twist wall to. By default the twist wall width value is the same as the length of the edge
selected. You can specify the following additional dimensions:
• Wall length – The overall length of the twist wall.
• Twist angle – The angle about which the wall twists.
• End wall width – By default, the twist wall is the same width along its entire length. However, you can
click Modify End Wall from the dashboard to edit the end width value.
Specifying the Twist Angle Axis Location
The twist axis is the axis about which the twist wall symmetrically bends about. There are three different
ways to specify the twist axis in the dashboard:
• Use Attachment Edge – Since, by default, the twist wall width is the same as the length of the
selected attachment edge, the twist axis is created at the midpoint of the edge selected as the twist
wall attachment edge. That is, the twist wall width is centered about the twist axis.
However, you can also trim each side of the twist wall to make its width wider or narrower than
the originally selected attachment edge. The twist wall width always remains centered about the
twist axis.
• Use Centered Axis – Enables you to specify the start width of the twist wall. The width is
symmetric about the twist axis.
• Twist Axis Location – Enables you to specify a datum point where the twist axis is created.
Twist Wall Calculation
The twist wall is created by beginning with an isosceles trapezoid (where the base angles are
symmetrical) that has a base equal to the start wall width, a top equal to the end wall width, and a
height equal to the wall length. This shape is then placed symmetrically about the twist axis and is
rotated by the degrees of twist to create the twist wall.
Bend Allowance
You can also specify the wall length in an unbent state, or, the bend allowance. The bend allowance
is used anytime the twist wall is in its flat or unbent state. The wall is stretched out to the length you
specified for the developed length.
PROCEDURE - Creating Twist Wall Features

Sheetmetal\Wall_Twist TWIST.PRT
Task 1: Create a uniform width twist wall using offset dimensions.
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down
menu and select Twist .
3. Select the edge on the left side of the model as
the attachment edge, as shown.
4. Edit the wall length to 75.

5. Edit the twist angle to 90.
6. Edit the twist angle to -90.

7. In the dashboard, select Trim First End from
the first direction edge drop-down list.
8. Edit the trim value to 10.
9. In the dashboard, select Trim Second End

from the second direction edge drop-down list.
10. Edit the trim value to -5.
11. In the dashboard, click Use Centered Axis .

12. Edit the width value to 35.
13. Notice that the twist axis is centered about the
width dimension.
Task 2: Create a twist wall by specifying a datum point as the twist axis location.
1. Enable Point Display .

2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and
select Twist .
3. Select the edge on the right side of the model
as the attachment edge.
4. Edit the wall length to 50.0.

5. Edit the twist angle to 225.

6. In the dashboard, click Use Centered Axis .
7. Edit the start width to 20.
8. Click Twist Axis Location .

9. Select the datum point.
10. Notice the twist axis is relocated to the selected
datum point reference.
11. In the dashboard, click Modify End Wall .

12. Edit the end width value to 10.
13. In the dashboard, select the Bend Allowance

tab.
14. Edit the Wall length in an unbent state to 60.
Task 3: Measure the current and developed length of the twist wall.
2. In the Measure group, select Distance from
the Measure types drop-down menu.
3. Press CTRL and select the two surface
references.
Note: The distance is currently measured as 50.0
mm.

5. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
6. Click Unbend from the Bends group.
8. Select the Analysis tab and select Distance

from the Measure types drop-down menu.
9. Press CTRL and select the same two surface
references previously selected.
Note: The distance is now measured as 60.0 mm.
The developed length of the feature in the flat state
is the dimension you specified in the Bend Allowance
tab when you created the Twist feature.
Extending and Trimming Walls

You can use extend and trim walls to lengthen or shorten existing walls.
• Extending an edge.
– Extend an edge by distance or reference
plane.
• Extending an edge with Adjacent Surface and
Along Boundary Edge options.
– Create a sharp edge or blend the boundary
edge.
• Using Extend to trim an edge.
– Remove material by using the Extend tool. Figure 1 – Extending an Edge
Figure 2 – Extend Adjacent Surface and

Along Boundary Edge Figure 3 – Using Extend to Trim an Edge
Extending and Trimming Walls
You can use Extend to lengthen or shorten existing walls. You can extend or trim the wall from a
straight edge on an existing wall to either a planar surface or a specified distance. Typically Extend
is used at corners to close gaps between walls and model various overlap conditions, enabling you to
fully express your design intent in a Creo Parametric sheetmetal model.
The Sheetmetal Extend tool uses the core edge tool. To start the process of creating an extend
or trim wall feature, select the edge you want to extend or trim, and then click Extend from the
ribbon or from the mini toolbar.
There are two elements that you must specify in order to extend or trim a wall:
• Edge – For the edge reference, you must select a straight wall that you want to extend.
• Distance – To complete the distance element, you can select one of three options:
– Extend the wall by value – This option extends the wall a distance that you specify. You can select
a default value from the menu or type the exact distance value.
– Extend the wall up to the reference plane – This option enables you to extend the wall up a plane
using the Through Until method, in which the section must pass through the selected reference.
You can select an existing planar surface or datum plane, or create a new datum plane.
– Extend the wall to intersect the reference plane – This option enables you to extend the wall up to
a plane using the To Selected method, in which the section does not need to pass through the
selected reference. You can select an existing planar surface or datum plane, or create a new
datum plane.
The following is a brief description of the figures in this example. In all cases, the extension that was
added is denoted by an orange surface, and the edge referenced for extension is highlighted in green.
• Extending an edge by distance.
– You can extend an edge by distance by using the Extend tool and then specifying a distance.
• Extending an edge with the Extend surface adjacent to edge and Along Boundary Edge options.
– With the Extend surface adjacent to edge option, you can extend the edge sharply without
blending the boundary edge. If you select the Along Boundary Edge option, it blends the boundary
edge with the extended edge.
• Using Extend to trim an edge.
– You can trim an edge by using the Extend tool and selecting a surface or plane that is behind
the selected edge. As a result, the wall is shortened rather than extended. You can also achieve
this with the Extend tool by specifying a distance, then using the drag handle or Flip Direction
icon to change the direction of the extended feature, therefore trimming it.
PROCEDURE - Extending and Trimming Walls

Sheetmetal\Wall_Extend EXTEND.PRT
Task 1: Use the Extend tool to extend a wall and experiment with options.
2. Select the edge and click Extend from the
mini toolbar.
3. Edit the value to 7.0.

4. Select the Extension tab from the Extend
dashboard.
5. For the Side 1 extension, select Along Boundary
Edge and view the part. Undo the selection by
selecting Normal to Extended Edge.
6. For the Side 2 extension, clear the Extend

surface adjacent to edge check box and view
the part. Undo the selection by checking the
Extend surface adjacent to edge check box.
Task 2: Use the Extend Wall tool to extend a wall up to a plane.
1. Select the edge and click Extend .

2. Click Extend Surface To Plane and select
the inner wall surface, as shown.
Task 3: Use Extend to trim a wall.

1. Reorient the model as shown.
2. Select the edge and click Extend .
3. Drag the handle inward to approximately 5.0 to

trim the wall.

4. Click Extend Surface To Plane and select
the surface, as shown.
Using the Merge Feature

A merge wall combines two or more unattached walls into one contiguous piece of sheetmetal.
Merge Wall Feature Requirements Creation Elements
• Touching and Tangent • Basic Refs
• Driving Sides Match • Merge Geoms
• Merge Edges
• Keep Lines
Figure 1 – Tangent Lines Shown as Phantom Figure 2 – Tangent Lines Shown as Phantom
Lines: Before Merge Lines: After Merge
Using the Merge Feature
A merge wall combines two or more unattached walls into one contiguous piece of sheetmetal.
Once you have combined all unattached walls to a single piece of sheetmetal, you can unbend the
sheetmetal or create flat patterns for it.
To merge walls, the following criteria must be satisfied:
• The walls must be touching one another and be tangent to each other at the edges of contact.
• The driving sides of the wall must match before you use the Merge feature. If they do not match,
you must edit the definition of the unattached feature(s) and use the Set driving surface opposite of
sketch plane check box in the dashboard or the Swap Sides element in a feature creation dialog box.
Which option you need to use depends on the type of unattached wall you are using.
When creating a merge wall feature, you need to specify four different elements in the Merge Wall
feature creation dialog box:
• Basic Refs – To complete this element, you must select all surfaces of the base wall(s) to which
you will merge.
• Merge Geoms – To complete this element, you must select all of the surfaces of the walls you
will be merging to the base wall(s).
• Merge Edges – This element is an optional element. It enables you to add or remove edges deleted
by the merge.
• Keep Lines – This element is also optional. It enables you to control the visibility of merged edges on
surface joints. It defaults to Do not Keep Lines.
Note: The last two optional elements do not change anything structurally about the Merge Wall feature.
They simply enable you to selectively include all, some, or none of edges that would be consumed by
the Merge Wall feature.
Best Practices
Displaying tangent edges as something other than solid can be useful when using the Merge Wall
feature. For example, if you are merging a cylindrical surface to a flat surface and the display of tangent
edges is set to solid, the edge between the two walls would appear the same before and after the
merge, as shown in Figure 1. However, if the display of tangent edges is set to phantom, the edge would
appear as a solid edge before the merge, and as a phantom edge after the merge, as shown in Figure 2.
PROCEDURE - Using the Merge Feature

Sheetmetal\Merge MERGE.PRT
Task 1: Change the display characteristics of the model to assist in the creation of merge wall features.
2. Click File > Options.
3. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box,
select the Entity Display category.
4. Select Phantom from the Tangent edges
display style drop-down list.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and click No if
prompted to save the setting.

6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe
from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
Note: The model currently exists as three unattached sheetmetal features: the vertical rectangular surface
(which is the primary base wall), the horizontal rectangular surface, and an extruded surface consisting of
a cylindrical surface and a small rectangular surface. Also, note that the green driving surface of the flat
horizontal wall does not match up with the driving surfaces of the other walls.
Task 2: Create a merge wall feature between the horizontal flat wall and the adjacent extruded wall
feature.
1. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and
select Merge > Merge Walls.
2. Select the surface reference to which
unattached walls will be merged.
3. Click Done Refs from the menu manager.
4. Select the surface reference to be merged.

5. Click Done Refs.

6. Click Preview in the Merge Walls dialog box.
7. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
Note: The driving surfaces of the wall to
be merged do not match up. The system
automatically switches the driving surface on the
original reference so they do match up. In this
case we want the top surfaces to all be driving.
8. Click Cancel > Yes in the Confirm Cancel dialog box.

• In the model tree, select Planar 2 and click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• In the Planar dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Set driving surface opposite
sketch plane check box.
• Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
9. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Merge > Merge Walls.
10. Select the same surface reference again to which unattached walls will be merged, then click
Done Refs.
11. Select the same surface reference again to be merged, then click Done Refs.
12. Click OK in the Merge Walls dialog box to
complete the feature.
Note: The edge between the two surfaces has
disappeared now that the walls are attached.
13. Right-click the wall feature you just created in the model tree and select Delete .
• Click OK.

Task 3: Create a single merge feature to attach all three unattached walls.
Note: Instead of deleting the merge wall feature you created in the previous task, you could have left it and
created another separate merge wall feature to connect the vertical primary base wall to the extruded
wall. However, the purpose of this task is to teach you that you can merge more than two walls.

select Merge > Merge Walls.
2. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces as
references to which unattached walls will be
merged.
4. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces as

references to be merged.
6. Click OK in the Merge Walls dialog box to

complete the feature.
Note: The solid line that existed between the vertical
and cylindrical surfaces now displays as a phantom
line, due to the sheetmetal being contiguous at this
point because of the merge feature. Also, note the
disappearance of the line between the two planar
horizontal sections due to the same reason.

8. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Entity Display category.
9. Select Solid from the Tangent edges display style drop-down list.
10. Click OK to close the dialog box and click No if prompted to save the setting.

Module 35
Bending and Unbending Sheetmetal Models

Creating Bend Features
A bend feature adds a bend to a flat section of the part.
Types of Bend Features:
• Angle Bend
• Roll Bend
Figure 1 – Angle Bend
Figure 2 – Angle Bend From Edge Figure 3 – Roll Bend

Creating Bend Features
While manufacturing sheetmetal parts, you bend flat sheets using bending tools. Creo Parametric
enables you to create bends and other geometry to reflect the true manufacturing process. You can
bend a sheet using various tools, such as angle bend or roll bend. You use bend lines to determine the
location and shape for the bend geometry in your sheetmetal parts. A bend line is also a reference
point to calculate the developed length.
A bend feature enables you to bend or roll a sheetmetal model along a defined line. Bend features
have the following characteristics:
• The bend line is a reference point for calculating the developed length and creating the bend
geometry.
• You can add bends at any time during the design process.
• You can add bends across form features.
• Depending on where you place the bend in your sheetmetal design, you may need to add bend relief.
• A bend cannot be added where it crosses another bend feature.
• You cannot copy a bend with the mirror option.
• While you can generally unbend zero-radius bends, you cannot unbend bends with slanted cuts
across them.
• You can modify the developed length of a bend area. If you do modify the developed length,
remember that revising the developed length only affects unbent geometry and does not affect the
bend back features.
• Bends are made along the axis of the radius.
To define a bend line, use one of the following:
• A surface.
– You can directly manipulate the dynamic bend line with drag handles and offsets, or you can
create an internal sketch.
• An existing sketch.
• An edge.
Dashboard Options
The bend feature uses the dashboard interface, with the following options:
• Bend Line Side
– Bend material up to the bend line.
– Bend material on the other side of the bend line.
– Bend material on both sides of the bend line.
• Fixed side – Can flip to either side of the bend line.
• Bend Type
– Angle (Use Value ) – The bend is formed on one side of the bend line, as shown in Figure
1, or equally on both sides.
– Roll (Bend To End ) – The bend is defined by both the radius and the amount of flat material to
bend, as shown in Figure 3.
• Bend Angle – The angle value is entered in degrees.
• Bend Direction – The bend can flip up or down.
• Bend Angle Type
– Dimension the bend angle by measuring the resulting internal angle.
– Dimension the bend angle by measuring the deflection from straight.
• Bend Radius – You can enter a value or use an automatic relation based on thickness, such as
Thickness or 2 * Thickness, for example.
• Bend Radius Location
– Inside radius
– Outside radius
– By Parameter – Dimension the bend according to the location set by the SMT_DFLT _RADIUS_SIDE
parameter.
Dashboard Tabs
Several tabs are available in the dashboard, providing options for further defining the bend.
• Placement
– Collector for bend surface or reference edge.
– If the reference edge is selected, you can offset the bend line from the edge, as shown in Figure 2.
• Bend Line
– Sketched – Create an internal sketch.
– Dynamic – The bend line is automatically created, and uses drag handles for determining size
and position.
¨ Select end references.
¨ Select offset references and enter values.
• Transitions – Define transitions.
• Relief – Define bend relief.
• Bend Allowance – Select the developed length calculation method.

PROCEDURE - Creating Bend Features
Sheetmetal\Bend BENDS.PRT
Task 1: Create an angle bend on the provided sheetmetal part.
2. Select the top surface and click Bend from
the mini toolbar.
3. Drag the location handles to the sides, as shown.
4. Drag the reference handles to the bottom edge.

• Edit the left dimension to 50.
• Edit the right dimension to 30.
• Edit the angle to 90, if necessary.
• In the dashboard, select 2.0 * Thickness from
the bend radius drop-down list.
5. Select the Relief tab from the dashboard.
6. Select No relief from the Type drop-down list.
7. In the dashboard, click Bend To Bend Line to bend the material to the bend line.
8. Click Bend On Both Sides to bend the material on both sides of the bend line.

9. Click Bend On Other Side .
10. Edit the bend angle to 45 degrees.
11. Select Internal Bend Angle from the Bend
angle types drop-down menu.
12. Select Bend Angle From Straight from the

Bend angle types drop-down menu.
13. Select Outside Radius from the Radius types
drop-down menu.
14. Edit the radius to 12.
Task 2: Create an angle bend using an internal sketch.
1. Enable Plane Display .

2. Select the surface and click Bend .

3. Select the Bend Line tab from the dashboard.
4. Click Sketch.
5. Click References from the Setup group and
select the left and right surfaces and the datum
plane.
6. Sketch the bend line and click OK .
7. Click Change Bending Direction from the

dashboard to flip the direction of the bend.
9. Disable Plane Display and click Complete
Feature .
Task 3: Create an angle bend from a model edge.
1. Select the top edge and click Bend .

3. Select Inside Radius from the Radius types
drop-down menu.

4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and
edit the offset to 15.
5. Edit the bend angle to 90.

6. Click Change Bending Direction .
7. Edit the bend radius to Thickness.
8. Click Bend To End to toggle the bend to a roll bend.

Task 4: Create a roll bend from an existing sketch.
1. In the model tree, click Bend 4 then press CTRL
and select Bend 5 and Bend 6.
2. Click Suppress from the mini toolbar.
• Click OK.
3. Select ROLL_LINE in the model tree, then click
Show .

4. In the graphics window, select the datum curve
and click Bend .
• Edit the radius to 10.
• Click Inside Radius , if necessary.
5. Click Bend To End to create a roll bend.
6. Click Bend To Bend Line .

7. Click Bend On Both Sides .
Note: In each case, the right model edge is held fixed.

8. Click Bend On Other Side .
9. Click Change Fixed Side .
10. Click Change Fixed Side again.

11. Click Change Bending Direction .

Adding Transition to Bends
A transition deforms the surface between a bend and a section of the model that is to remain flat.
• Sketch bend line.

• Sketch transition area.
Figure 1 – Original Model with Roll Bend
Figure 2 – First Transition Added Figure 3 – Second Transition Added
Adding Transition to Bends

A transition area shapes one section of a sheetmetal surface while leaving another section flat or
with different bent conditions.
You can use the bend tool to add one or more transition areas to an angled or rolled bend. Figure 1
displays a model with a roll bend applied. When creating a transition area, first sketch the bend line
and then sketch the transition area to remain flat or to bend differently. Each transition area sketch
must have two open line entities. The first line must be adjacent to the bend area and the second
line must complete the transition area.
Figure 2 and Figure 3 display the model with transitions added. The transitions enable the bend to
apply to only the areas necessary for your design.
Note: Transition bends do not accept bend relief. If your design requires a cut in a transition area, either
create it before you make the transition bend or unbend the bend, making the cut and using the bend
back feature.

PROCEDURE - Adding Transition to Bends
Sheetmetal\Bend_Transition TRANSITIONS.PRT
Task 1: Add transition to a roll bend.
2. Select the front surface and click Bend from
the mini toolbar.
3. Right-click and select Define/Edit Internal

Bend Line.
4. Click Line Chain from the Line types
sketch the line starting from the reference
intersection.
5. Press ALT and select the lower horizontal edge
to create a reference.
• Select the reference to complete the line.
7. In the dashboard:
• Edit the bend radius to 1.2.
• Click Bend To End .
• Click Bend On Both Sides .
8. Select the Transitions tab from the dashboard.

• Click Add Transition > Sketch.
• Click Line Chain and sketch lines, as shown.
• Click OK .

10. Reorient the model and notice the transition
area.
Task 2: Add a second transition to the bend.
1. In the model tree, right-click Bend 1 and select Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
2. Select the Transitions tab.
• Click Add Transition > Sketch.
• From the In Graphics toolbar, click Sketch View .
Note: The references for each transition are visible, but only active in the corresponding sketch.
3. Sketch the two lines and dimension, as shown.
• Click OK
4. Click Complete Feature and notice the

additional transition has isolated the roll bend to
the center of the model.

Bending in Multiple Planes
You can create bends on multiple surfaces.
• Can create Bends:

– Over multiple surfaces
– Across gaps
• Requirements:
– Surfaces must be co-planar
Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Bend Line Figure 3 – Completed Bend
Bending in Multiple Planes

You can create bends over multiple co-planar surfaces and across gaps.
The surfaces must be co-planar, and the bending only occurs where the bend line touches the
co-planar surfaces.
PROCEDURE - Bending in Multiple Planes

Sheetmetal\Bend BEND_MULTI .PRT
Task 1: Create Bends in multiple planes.
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
With Edges from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.

3. Select the top model surface and click Bend
• Click and drag the endpoints to the vertices
shown.
4. Click Change Bending Direction to flip the

bend direction upward.
5. Click Change Fixed Side to flip the fixed
direction frontward.
• Click Complete Feature .
6. Select the top model surface and click Bend .

• Click and drag the endpoints to the vertices
shown.
7. Click Bend To Bend Line from the dashboard.

8. Click Change Bending Direction to flip the
bend direction downward, if necessary.
9. Click Change Fixed Side to flip the fixed
direction rearward, if necessary.

Creating Planar Bends
A planar bend is formed around an axis perpendicular to the driving surface and sketching plane.
Bend around axis normal to driving surface and

sketch plane.
• Bend Tables not applicable.
• Sketch bend line.
• Angle or Roll type.
Figure 1 – Angle Planar Bend
Figure 2 – Roll Planar Bend Figure 3 – Completed Bends
Creating Planar Bends

A planar bend creates a bend feature around an axis that is perpendicular to the driving surface and the
sketching plane. The neutral point for planar bends is placed according to the current Y-factor and
bend tables are not applicable. You can create a planar bend for both angle and roll type bends, as
shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
A planar bend forces the sheetmetal wall around an axis that is normal (perpendicular) to the surface
and the sketching plane. You sketch a bend line and form the planar bend around the axis using
direction arrows. While this type of bend is not utilized on the factory floor, it can help you reach your
overall design intent for model shape.
The dimensioning scheme for a planar angle bend and a planar roll bend is shown on the completed
model in Figure 3. In particular, note the lack of a bend angle dimension for the roll bend.

PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Bends
Sheetmetal\Bend_Planar PLANAR.PRT
Task 1: Create a planar angle bend.
2. Select Planar Bend from the Bend types
drop-down menu in the Bends group.
3. Click Angle > Done from the menu manager.
4. Click Part Bend Tbl > Done/Return.
5. Select the front surface as the sketch plane
reference.
• Click Okay for the viewing direction.
• Select Default for the sketch orientation.
6. Sketch the line shown, and then click OK .
7. Click Okay from the menu manager to accept

the bend side.

8. Click Flip to flip the fixed side, and then click
Okay.
9. Click 90.000 > Done.

10. Click Enter Value, type 4.5, and press ENTER.
11. Click Flip to flip the bend direction, and then
click Okay.
12. Click OK from the BEND Options dialog box.

Task 2: Create a planar roll bend.
1. Click Planar Bend .

2. Click Roll > Done from the menu manager.
3. Click Part Bend Tbl > Done/Return.
4. Select Use Prev for the sketch plane reference.
• Click Okay for the viewing direction.
5. Sketch the line shown, and then click OK .
6. Click Flip and then Okay to flip the bend side.
7. Click Okay to accept the fixed side.
8. Click Enter Value, type 4.5, and press ENTER.

9. Click Okay for the bend direction.

10. Click OK from the BEND Options dialog box.
Task 3: Compare the angle and the roll planar bends.

drop-down menu, and notice the difference in
bend portions.
2. Press CTRL and select both bends.

3. Right-click and click Edit Dimensions from
the mini toolbar.
4. Notice that the roll bend does not have an angle.
drop-down menu in the In Graphics toolbar.

Creating Unbend Features
You can unbend both a wall and a bend as long as the material is developable and able to unbend.
• Unbend types:
– Unbend
¨ All surfaces and bends or specific areas.
¨ Rip out deformation areas.
¨ Optional relief geometry.
¨ Flatten all forms.
– Cross Section Driven
¨ Select or sketch the Xsec curve.
– Transitional
Figure 2 – Selected Xsec Curve and Figure 3 – Sketched Xsec Curve and
Resulting Unbend Resulting Unbend
Creating Unbend Features
You can unbend both a wall and a bend as long as the material is able to unbend. You cannot unbend
non-ruled surfaces using a regular unbend feature. After you unbend an area, you can continue to add
features, such as cuts and rips. The features following the unbend are children of, or dependent on, the
unbend feature. If you delete the unbend feature, the features also delete. If you add walls that intersect
when they are unbent, Creo Parametric highlights the intersecting edges and warns you with a prompt.
When creating an unbend, you select a surface or edge to remain fixed.
• Try to pick major surfaces that you want to keep in the same position.
• If possible, be consistent and use the same surface when creating several unbend features.
Methods for Unbending Geometry
There are three methods that you can use to unbend geometry:
• Unbend – Enables you to create the deformation area during the unbend.
Consider the following characteristics of the Unbend tool:
– You can set the part default fixed geometry in the tool.
– You have the option of unbending all surfaces and bends or selecting specific areas:
¨ Select References Manually – Lets you manually select specific bend surfaces to unbend.
¨ Select References Automatically – Automatically selects all surfaces and unbends all
bends and curved surfaces.
The system defaults to automatic selection if the Unbend tool is started without any selected
references. Conversely, the system defaults to manual selection if the Unbend tool is started with
valid references selected.
– The system defines the deformation area automatically, but you can add to the set of surfaces.
– You can rip out deformation areas.
– You can use the embedded sketch window for deformation areas.
– You can control whether or not relief geometry is created.
– You can flatten all forms in the unbend.
– You can unbend unattached walls on an individual basis using Distinct Pieces . The system
enables you to select from the same distinct piece when selecting bent geometry or fixed
geometry.
• Cross Section Driven Unbends – Using a Cross Section Driven Unbend, you can unbend
undevelopable sheetmetal geometry, such as walls curved in more than one direction. The feature
consists of a series of cross-sections along a curve that are projected onto a plane. The first step
in creating a Cross Section Driven Unbend is to select a single edge or multiple edges that are
to remain fixed during the unbend operation.
The cross-section term refers to the curve you use to influence the shape of the unbent wall. You can
either select an existing curve or sketch a new curve. Whether you select or sketch the curve, it must
be coplanar with the fixed edges you define. If you sketch the curve, be sure to dimension/align
the curve.
The curve you select or sketch affects the unbent state of the part. Remember, the curve can be a
straight line.
Note: The cross-sections created must not intersect within the unbent geometry. Otherwise, the feature
fails.You cannot bend back a Cross Section Driven Unbend.
• Transitional Unbends – A Transition Unbend feature flattens non-developable geometry that cannot
be unbent with a regular unbend feature. Non-developable geometry bends in more than one
direction. The transition geometry is temporarily removed from the model, so you must define that
geometry to utilize the feature. The developable surfaces can then unbend. The transition geometry
is placed back into the flat pattern.
Best Practices
Consider the following best practices when creating Unbend features:
• Do not add unnecessary pairs of unbend/bend back features. They inflate the part size and might
cause problems during regeneration.
• If you add an unbend (or bend back) feature simply to see how your model looks flattened (unbent),
delete the sample unbend feature before proceeding with your design.
• If you specifically want to create features in a flattened state, you should add an unbend feature.
Create the features you need in the flattened state and then add a bend back feature. Do not
delete the unbend feature in this case since features that reference the unbend feature might fail
regeneration.
• If you want a projected datum curve to follow a sheetmetal bend, project the curve after creating an
unbend feature. The curve follows the sheetmetal surface when you bend back the sheetmetal wall.

PROCEDURE - Creating Unbend Features
Sheetmetal\Unbend UNBEND.PRT
Task 1: Unbend the developable geometry in the toaster body.
2. Select Unbend from the Unbend types
3. Notice the fixed geometry is selected, but the
unbend preview is not shown.
4. In the dashboard, select the Deformations tab.

5. Click and drag to select each of the detected
deformation surfaces. Notice they highlight in
the graphics window in magenta.
6. In the dashboard, select the References tab.

• Notice that Select References Automatically
is selected.
7. Click Select References Manually .
8. In the Bent geometry collector, right-click the
two large WALL SURFACE references and
select Remove.
9. Notice that the unbend preview now displays.

Task 2: Unbend one side of the toaster body using the Xsec Driven method, by selecting the Xsec
Curve.
1. Select Cross Section Driven Unbend from the
Unbend types drop-down menu in the Bends
group.
2. Select the edge to remain fixed.
3. Click Done > Select Curve > Done from the

menu manager.
4. Select the same edge again.
5. In the menu manager, click Done > Okay to
specify the fixed side.
6. Click OK in the Xsec Driven Type dialog box.

7. Notice the distortion in the wall due to the
curved cross-section edge.
Task 3: Unbend the other side of the toaster body using the Xsec Driven method, by sketching the
Xsec Curve.
1. Select Cross Section Driven Unbend from the
Unbend types drop-down menu.
2. Select the edge to remain fixed.
3. Click Done > Sketch Curve > Done from the

menu manager.
4. Select the surface.
5. Click Default from the menu manager.

6. Select Shading With Edges from the Display
Style types drop-down menu in the In Graphics
toolbar.
7. Select the vertices on the ends of the previously
selected edge as references.
8. Click Close in the References dialog box.
drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
10. Sketch the line.
11. Click OK .
12. Click Okay from the menu manager to specify

the fixed side.
13. Click OK in the Xsec Driven Type dialog box.

14. Notice that the distortion was reduced in the
wall due to the straight cross-section sketch.

Creating Bend Back Features
You create the bend back feature to return an unbent feature to its original condition.
• Set the part default fixed geometry in the tool.

• Bend back all bends or select specific areas.
• Use the Bend Control tab to set which contours
are bent back or kept flat.
Figure 2 – Unbend and Extrude Feature Figure 3 – Bend Back: Default and Keep Contour
Creating Bend Back Features

You create the Bend Back feature to return unbent surfaces to their formed position. As a rule, you
should only bend back a fully unbent area. When a sheetmetal wall overlaps and intersects in the
unbent position, the system highlights it and issues a warning.
Consider the following characteristics of the Bend Back tool:
• You can set the part default fixed geometry in the tool.
• You have the option of bending back all bends or selecting specific areas:
– Select References Manually – Lets you manually select specific unbent geometry to bend
back.
– Select References Automatically – Automatically selects all unbent geometry to bend back.
The system defaults to automatic selection if the Bend Back tool is started without any selected
references. Conversely, the system defaults to manual selection if the Bend Back tool is started
with valid references selected.
• You can use the Bend Control tab in the dashboard to set specific contours to bend back or keep flat.
If you partially bend back a regular unbent surface containing a deform area, the original bent condition
might not be obtainable. Creo Parametric examines the contours of each bend back section. Contours
partially intersecting a bend area are highlighted. You are prompted to confirm whether the section
should bend back or remain flat.
Note: You cannot bend back a Cross Section Driven Unbend feature.

PROCEDURE - Creating Bend Back Features
Sheetmetal\Bend-Back BEND-BACK.PRT
Task 1: Unbend the part.
toolbar.

4. Notice the default fixed geometry.
5. Select the new fixed geometry as shown.
Task 2: Create a cut feature.

geometry.
2. Select the surface and click Extrude from the
mini toolbar.
3. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics

toolbar.
4. Create the sketch shown.
5. Click OK .
7. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

Task 3: Bend the part back, leaving the center tab straight.
1. Click Bend Back from the Bends group.

2. Notice that the previously selected fixed
geometry is retained.
3. Click Preview Feature .

4. Click Preview Feature again to disable it.
5. In the dashboard, select the Bend Control tab.

• Select Contour 1 and select Keep flat.
• Select Contour 2 and select Keep flat.

7. Select Shading .

Previewing and Creating Flat Patterns
A flat pattern is similar to unbending all walls, except that it always remains as the last feature in
the model tree.
• Flat Pattern Preview:
– Show or hide.
– Flat pattern feature does not need to be
created.
– Bounding box dimensions.
• Flat Pattern:
– System unbends all geometry.
– Flat pattern feature added to end of model
tree.
– Always at the end of the model tree.
Figure 1 – Default Model and Flat Pattern
Figure 2 – Creating a Flange Figure 3 – Flat Pattern Updates to Flatten Flange

Previewing and Creating Flat Patterns
A flat pattern is similar to unbending all walls. It flattens any curved surface, whether it is a bend
feature or a curved wall. You can preview the appearance of the flat pattern by toggling Flat Pattern
Preview on or off in the In Graphics toolbar. The flat pattern previews in a separate window that
contains its own In Graphics toolbar.
Consider the following characteristics of the Flat Pattern Preview window:
• The system does not require a flat pattern feature to be created to view the preview.
• All forms are flattened in the preview.
• In the preview window’s In Graphics toolbar, you can click Bounding Box Dimensions to toggle
the part’s bounding box dimensions on and off. These are beneficial in monitoring manufacturing
requirements as you design your sheetmetal part.
Flat Pattern
Unlike the unbend all feature, the Flat Pattern feature automatically moves to the end of the model
tree to maintain the flat model view.
The Flat Pattern feature is automatically created at the end of the model tree to maintain the flat
model view. The Flat Pattern feature is suppressed at the time of new feature creation and positions
itself as the last feature after the new feature is added, in case you add any feature to the part after
creating the flat pattern.
Flat Pattern internally uses the Unbend All tool to create the feature. Consequently, this provides you:
• Evaluation of design rules.
• Ability to define deformation areas and deformation control.
• Additional options:
– Merge co-located side surfaces.
– Unfold bends added to forms.
– Flatten forms.
– Project cuts added to forms
– Create relief geometry
The flat pattern is helpful if you are constantly toggling between the solid and flat versions of the
design. If you add new features to your design, the flat pattern is temporarily suppressed.
You can create a flat pattern early in your design process so that you can simultaneously create and
detail your sheetmetal design. You can only create one flat pattern per part. After you create it, the flat
pattern option becomes unavailable.
PROCEDURE - Previewing and Creating Flat Patterns

Sheetmetal\Flat_Pattern FLAT.PRT
Task 1: View the Flat Pattern Preview.
2. Notice the model geometry.
3. Click Flat Pattern Preview from the In

Graphics toolbar.
4. Notice that the preview window contains its

own In Graphics toolbar.
5. Click Bounding Box Dimensions from the In
Graphics toolbar.
6. Click Flat Pattern Preview to disable it.

Task 2: Create a Flat Pattern Feature.
1. Click Flat Pattern from the Bends group.

2. Notice the default fixed geometry.
3. Select an alternate fixed geometry.
4. Notice the new orientation.

Task 3: Create a wall after the flat pattern and observe the flat pattern behavior.
1. Notice the model tree.
2. Click Flange from the Shapes group.

3. Notice that the feature is being automatically
inserted before the Flat Pattern feature.
4. Notice that the model now displays in its formed

state.
5. Query-select the lower edge.

7. Notice the model reverts back to flat.

8. Notice the model tree.

A flat state refers to the creation of a flat and formed version of the part model.
• Create flat states using the following methods:

– Family tables
– Part simplified representations
– Fat state functionality
Figure 1 – Family Table Method
Figure 2 – Formed and Flat State Figure 3 – Simplified Representation Method

A flat state refers to the creation of a flat and formed version of the part model. A flat state enables you
to view the same model in two different versions: the flat version and formed version. You can then use
either or both of these versions in the following ways:
• Sheetmetal mode
• Drawing views
• Manufacturing purposes – A flat state streamlines the creation of flat patterns needed in
manufacturing because you can create any number of flat states, at any time in your design process,
whether your part is fully formed or fully flat.

Creating Flat States Using Family Tables
You can use family tables to create flat states. You begin with the formed model. Next, you create a
flat pattern. Then you suppress the flat pattern feature. Finally, you create a family table to enable
the flat pattern in an instance.
Creating Flat States Using Part Simplified Representations
You can also use Simplified Representations to create flat states. You begin with the formed model.
Next, you create a flat pattern. Then you create a part simplified representation to exclude the flat
pattern feature. This results in a simplified representation of the formed model.
Creating Flat States Using Flat State Functionality
You can also create flat states using flat state functionality. You must set the config.pro option
enable_flat_state to yes. This creates an Unbend feature and family table automatically. However:
• There are limitations to the legacy Unbend feature.
• It does not use the more powerful Creo Parametric Flat Pattern feature.
It is recommended to create a family table manually to take advantage of the Creo Parametric Flat
Pattern feature.
Legacy models with defined flat states remain as created, and can be redefined.
PROCEDURE - Creating Flat States

Sheetmetal\Flat-States STATE .PRT
Task 1: Create a flat state with a family table.
2. In the model tree, click Settings and select
Tree Filters .
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the
Suppressed objects check box and click OK.
4. Notice the model geometry and features.
5. Click Flat Pattern from the Bends group.

7. Notice that the fixed geometry was already
defined.

Suppress from the mini toolbar.
• Click OK.

9. Click Family Table from the Model Intent
group.
• Click Add Columns in the Family Table
dialog box.
• Select Feature from the Add item section.
• Select the suppressed Flat Pattern 1 feature
in the model tree.
• Click OK.
• Click Insert Instance .
• Edit the new Instance Name to STATE _FLAT.
• Type Y in the feature’s column for the
instance.
10. Click Preview Instance .
Note: The flat pattern instance can now be
opened as a separate model, or shown on a
drawing.
11. Click Close > OK.
Task 2: Create a flat state with a Part Simplified Representation.

Resume .
2. Notice the model is now in its flat state.

toolbar, and select the Simp Rep tab, if
necessary.
• Click New.
• Type FORMED_REP and press ENTER.
4. In the menu manager, click Features and select
Flat Pattern 1 from the model tree to exclude it
from the representation.
• Click Done > Done/Return.
5. Notice that the formed_rep simplified
representation is now active.
6. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and click Close.

Creating Flattened Representation
The process of defining a simplified representation of a sheetmetal part in the flattened state, while
having the master representation in the formed (bent) state, is simplified.
• Process to create a Flat Pattern Representation:

– Create a flat pattern preview
– Create a representation
– Name the representation
– Select the newly created representation
– Activate the new simplified representation
Figure 1 – Flattened Pattern Preview Figure 2 – Manage Flat Pattern View
Creating Flattened Representation

The process of defining a simplified representation of a sheetmetal part in the flattened state, while
having the master representation in the formed (bent) state, is simplified.
You can easily switch from a bent to a flattened state when modeling a sheetmetal part. No additional
Windchill business object is created or required.
Process to create a Flat Pattern Representation:
• Create a flat pattern preview.
• Create a representation.
• Name the representation.
• Select the newly created representation.
• Activate the new simplified representation.
Note: You can create only one flat pattern representation.

PROCEDURE - Creating Flattened Representation
Sheetmetal\Flatten_Representation RIGHT_PANEL.PRT
Task 1: Create a flattened representation.
2. In the In Graphics toolbar, click Flat Pattern
Preview .
3. Notice that the Flat Pattern Preview window
opens with a flattened representation.
4. Click Create Representation from the Flat
Pattern drop-down menu in the Bends group.
Note: Alternatively, you can select Create
Representation from the Flat Pattern Preview
window.
5. Click Create in the Make Flat Representation
window.
Task 2: View the flattened representation.

toolbar.
2. In the View Manager window, confirm that the
Simp Rep tab is selected.
3. Notice that the recently created representation
is automatically added in the list.
4. Double-click Right_Panel_Flat_Rep.
5. Notice that the flattened representation is
activated.

Task 3: Manage the flattened representation view.
1. Select the All tab in the View Manager window.
2. Click New.
3. Type Flatten_View in the Name field and press
ENTER.
4. Click Reference Originals in the New
Presentation State window.
5. In the View Manager window, select Redefine
from the Edit drop-down menu.
6. In the FLATTEN_VIEW window, click the
Orientation drop-down menu and select Left.
7. If necessary, select Right_Panel_Flat_Rep for
the simplified representation type.
8. Click OK.
9. Notice that the required flattened view is
activated.
Creating Split Area Features

Deformation areas stretch to help you unbend a sheetmetal part.
• You can create deform areas using the Split

Area tool.
– Sketch the deformation area.
– Control the normal direction to Driven or
Offset surface.
– Control the Projection Direction.
– Define which side of the sketch receives the
new id.
Figure 1 – Original Model: System Detects
Deformation During Unbend (But Cannot
Extend to Model’s Edge)
Figure 2 – Select Existing Surface Patch Figure 3 – Select Deformation Area

(Deformation Undesirable) (Deformation Isolated)
Creating Split Area Features

A deformation area is a section of sheetmetal that helps to accurately stretch the material when you
unbend the sheetmetal part. You may need to create these areas when unbending sections that:
• Do not extend to the edge of the model.
• Bend in more than one direction.
You can create the deformation area before unbending the section by clicking Split Area . This tool
enables you to sketch the desired deformation area. The following options are available:
• Control the normal direction to either the Driven or Offset surface.
• Control the Projection Direction.
• Define which side of the sketch receives the new id.
The deformation area serves as a bridge between the multiple direction bend section and the outside
edges of the part. The deformation area must be tangent to both the undevelopable surface and
an outside edge.
The developed length of unbent sheetmetal geometry reflects the proper values. Creo Parametric
approximates the deformation area geometry by attaching vertices with a line segment. The geometry
does not become thinner or thicker and, because the developed length is typically determined
empirically, you sketch the deformation area geometry.
If an appropriate surface does not exist on the model, you can break up a surface into multiple patches
by creating a deformation area, and then specifying this area as the area to deform during the unbend
operation. This provides you with the advantage of creating geometry that closely reflects the
developed part.
In addition to using the Split Area feature during unbending, you can also use it to define edges for
edge rips or to split surfaces for bend line development.
Sketching Technique
Select a common edge between the undevelopable region and the deformation area. Use the Project
. Then select the outside edge of the deform area and two points on that outside edge as vertices.
Connect the two outside edge vertices to the vertices of the undevelopable surface on the common
edge.
PROCEDURE - Creating Split Area Features

Sheetmetal\Split_Area DEFORM.PRT
Task 1: Unbend the part.
Note: Notice that the fix surface is automatically
selected. The system can only unbend the
bends highlighted in orange. Notice also that the
Deformations tab is highlighted in the dashboard.

• Select each Automatic detected deformation
surface until the one shown highlights.

4. Click the Deformation surfaces collector to
activate it.
• Select the surface shown.
5. Press CTRL and select the other three

equivalent surfaces.
6. Notice that the system can now unbend the
whole model.
8. Notice that the surfaces selected as deformation

areas are greatly distorted.
9. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar to
remove the unbend feature.
Task 2: Create deformation areas in the part for unbend.
1. Click Saved Orientations from the In

Graphics toolbar, and select DEFORM.
2. Click Split Area from the Editing group.
3. Select the surface shown as the sketching plane.

toolbar.
5. Click Project from Sketching group and
select the two edges.

Line Chain .
7. Sketch the two lines shown.
8. Click OK .

Note: The three other equivalent deformation areas
have already been created.
Task 3: Unbend the part with deform areas.
1. Click Saved Orientations and select

3D-REAR.
2. Click Unbend .
• Click the Deformation surfaces collector to
activate it.
• Press CTRL and select the newly created
surface, as well as the other three.
5. Notice the deformation is now limited to the
split area region.

Module 36
Sheetmetal Form Features

Punch Form Features
Your sheetmetal models can be formed using punches.
Assemble with Dashboard
• On Surface Csys
• Interfaces
• Constraints
Options Figure 1 – Punch Reference Model
• Round sharp edges
• Exclude Surfaces
• Merge or Inheritance
Figure 2 – Wall Formed with Punch
Punch Form Features

A form is a sheetmetal wall molded by a template (reference part). Merging the geometry of a
reference part to the sheetmetal part creates the form feature. You use assembly-type constraints to
determine the location of the form in your model.
You can create a sheetmetal form using a punch:
• Punch – A punch shapes the sheetmetal wall using only the reference part geometry. Punch forms
use the entire form reference part to create the correct geometry.
Placing Form Features
The Punch form sheetmetal tool uses a dashboard interface. You can select any model to assemble
in one of three ways:
• On surface Coordinate System – Select a coordinate system in the punch model as the only
reference for an assembly interface. Upon placement, you can select references to locate an
on-surface coordinate system in the sheetmetal model. This method leverages the capability of the
on-surface coordinate system to enable the option for specifying an additional rotation.
• Component Interfaces – Create component interfaces using any desired references.
• Assembly constraints – Use standard assembly constraints to locate the punch.
The Punch form tool also has several options:
• Round sharp edges – You can select to round the edges of the resulting sheetmetal form, even if the
punch form model did not contain rounds. Placement or non-placement edges can be selected.
• Exclude Surfaces – You can select surfaces for the punch model to exclude them from the operation,
resulting in these surfaces being deleted from the resulting form feature. The surfaces to exclude
can also be pre-specified by using a Punch Model Annotation feature.
• Merge or Inheritance – These dashboard icons enable you to reference the punch model by
performing a merge operation, or you can copy the punch model geometry by creating an
inheritance feature.
• Tool Name and Coordinate System – Specify these options for sheetmetal manufacturing.
• Placing by Reference – You can place a form feature so that it references the original forming model
at all times. If the original form model changes, the geometry on the sheetmetal part also changes.
• Copying the Geometry – When you do not want to associate the geometry of the form to the
reference model, you can place the form model by copying all of the form geometry into the
sheetmetal model. This copy operation creates a completely independent version of the form
geometry.
Creating and Using Reference Parts
You can create the form or reference part as a standard solid part or as a sheetmetal part. If you use a
sheetmetal model, the form should conform to the green side of the sheetmetal component.
The reference parts can have shapes that are convex, concave, or are a combination of both. When
creating reference parts, you should keep the following points in mind:
• Any convex surface must have a radius that is larger than the thickness of the sheetmetal, or equal to
zero if the form is mated to the sheetmetal geometry.
• Any concave surface must have a radius that is larger than the thickness of the sheetmetal, or equal
to zero if the form is aligned to the sheetmetal geometry.
• The form can contain a combination of convex and concave geometry, creating hollows. The hollows
in the form must not drop below the base plane or mating surface, meaning all the form geometry
must be on the same side of the base plane.
Creating Rips in the Geometry
Some forming operations consist of two tasks: plastically deforming the sheetmetal and actually
cutting the sheetmetal. Figure 3 displays an example of a cooling fin that is cut through the side of the
sheetmetal housing. You can represent the shearing of the material by excluding surfaces from the
form when you place it on the sheetmetal model.
Figure 3 – Creating Rips in the Geometry
Using Multiple Forms on a Single Punch Model

To reduce the number of models stored for punch forms, you create a punch model with two sides.
You select one side or the other, with respect to the mating surface that you use in the punch model.
PROCEDURE - Punch Form Features

Sheetmetal\Form_Punch PUNCH.PRT
Task 1: Create a louver using a punch form.
2. In the ribbon, select Punch Form from the
Form types drop-down menu in the Engineering
group.
• Double-click LOUVER_FORM.PRT.
4. Place the cursor over the upper model surface.
• Query and select the underlying surface.

5. Drag the handles to the front and right surfaces
of the model.
• Edit the offset values as shown.
6. Select the Placement tab from the dashboard

and select the Add rotation about the first axis
check box.
• Drag the rotation handle to 90.
Note: The additional rotation is possible due to
a coordinate system selected for the component
interface.

• Click in the Excluded punch model surfaces
collector.
• Select the surface shown.

Task 2: Create a gusset using a punch form.
1. Click Punch Form .

• Double-click GUSSET_FORM.PRT.
3. Select the right model surface.
4. Select the upper model surface.

• Select the front model surface.
• Drag the offset handle to 20.
5. Select the Options tab from the dashboard and

select the Placement edges check box.
• Select Thickness from the Radius drop-down
list.

Utilizing Punch Model Annotations
Define Punch Model annotations to speed up placement.
• Punch Model annotation type
– Predefine surfaces to remove
Figure 1 – Creating Annotation Figure 2 – Punch Model Created

Utilizing Punch Model Annotations
Define Punch Model annotations to speed up placement. In this type of annotation, you can select
surfaces to predefine those that will be removed when using the model for a punch in a sheetmetal part.
When a punch is created using a model with a punch model annotation defined, the surfaces to be
removed are defined automatically without having to select them. However, you can add to or remove
from this selection if desired.
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Punch Model Annotations

Sheetmetal\Punch_Annotations ROUND_FORM.PRT
Task 1: Create a Punch Model annotation feature.
2. In the model tree, expand the Footer and
INTERFACES nodes and select INTFC001.
• Notice the highlighted coordinate system.
3. Select the Annotate tab and click Annotation
Feature from the Annotation Features group.
• Click Specify Punch Model Properties in
the Annotation Feature dialog box.
4. In the Form Model dialog box, click in the

Excluded Surfaces collector, then press CTRL
and select the three surfaces shown.
5. Click OK in the Form Model dialog box and click
OK in the Annotation Feature dialog box.

Task 2: Create a punch form utilizing the defined punch model annotation.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar

and double-click ANNOTATIONS .PRT.
2. Select Punch Form from the Form types
drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
3. Click Open Punch Model from the Punch
Form dashboard.
• Double-click ROUND_FORM.PRT.
4. Place the cursor over the upper model surface.
• Query-select the underlying surface.
5. Drag the reference handles to the front and
right surfaces of the model.
• Edit the offset values as shown.
6. Select the Options tab from the dashboard.

• Notice there are excluded surfaces defined.
• Notice the placement edges are not rounded.
• Click Resume Feature .

• Select the Placement edges check box.
• Select Thickness from the Radius drop-down
list.

Creating Die Forms
You can create impressions in sheetmetal using Die Forms.
• Prepare Die Form model:
– Geometry pocket
– Coordinate System (optional)
• Prepare Sheetmetal model:
– Sheetmetal Geometry
– Coordinate System (optional)
• Place Die Form:
– Assembly Constraints
– On-Surface Coordinate System
Figure 1 – Sheetmetal and Die Form Models
– Component Interface Coordinate System
• Form Options:
– Surfaces to Exclude
– Round Edges
– Dependent / Independent
Figure 2 – Sheetmetal Forms Created

Creating Die Forms
You can create impressions in a sheetmetal wall using solid parts as Die Forms.
A die form is a collection of geometry forming a pocket within a planar surface on a solid model. The
sheetmetal is then drawn into the pocket geometry, leaving an impression.
Use caution with round radii on the pocket geometry, as you must account for the thickness of the
sheetmetal model. You have the option of leaving sharp edges and specifying round during placement
of the form.
You can utilize your own die forms, or select one from the built-in library of example models.
Preparing Die Form Models
First, you create the geometry to use for the impression as a pocket on a planar solid surface.
You can create multiple pockets in the die form model.
You can optionally create a coordinate system and specify it as a Component Interface for rapid
placement. Generally, the Z-axis of the coordinate system is oriented to face into the pocket geometry.
Preparing Sheetmetal Models
First, you create the sheetmetal geometry for placement of the die.
Optionally, you can place a coordinate system to locate the die on the model. Generally, the Z-axis of
the coordinate system is oriented to face into the pocket geometry.
Placing Die Forms
You have the following options when placing a die form:
• Assembly Constraints – Assemble the form using typical placement constraints.
• On-Surface Coord Sys – Assemble the form by specifying a placement surface and offset references.
An optional rotation angle about the Z-axis can also be specified.
• Component Interface Coord Sys – Assemble the form by selecting a coordinate system on the
sheetmetal model.
Upon placement of the form, the system automatically selects pocket geometry on the upper surface
of the model. If multiple pockets exist, or pockets are created on surfaces other than the top surface,
you can define or edit the surface selection set using the Die Shape collector in the Shape tab.
Form Options
The following are options when placing die forms:
• Surfaces to Exclude – You can specify surfaces to remove during the die operation, resulting in
open cuts in the sheetmetal.
• Round Edges – You can specify that rounds are to be created over sharp edges of the form geometry.
You can select placement and/or non-placement edges, and specify a radius value.
• Dependent / Independent – You can place the die form as a dependent merge, or as an independent
inheritance. Forms placed as dependent will update to changes in the form model. Forms placed
as independent can be expanded to edit the inherited features.
PROCEDURE - Creating Die Forms

Sheetmetal\Die_Forms DIE_FORM.PRT
Task 1: Prepare a Die Form model.

drop-down menu.
3. In the model tree, select the coordinate system CS0.

4. Click Component Interface from the Model Intent group.
• Click Apply-Save Changes from the Component Interface dialog box.
5. In the model tree, expand the Footer node.
• Expand the Interfaces node and notice INTFC001.
Task 2: Utilize a Die Form model using an on-surface coordinate system.

• Double-click DIE_SHEETMETAL.PRT.

2. Select Die Form from the Form types
3. Click Open Punch Model .
• Double-click DIE_FORM.PRT.
4. Notice Place Using Coordinate System is
active and you can now specify the assembly
references.
• Query-select the underlying surface.
• Drag the die to the top-right of the sheetmetal
form.
• Drag the handles to each edge shown and
edit both dimensions to 40.
5. Select the Shape tab.
• Click in the Die shape collector and notice the surfaces are selected automatically.
Note: You can customize the selection of surfaces using the Die Shape collector.
Task 3: Utilize a Die Form model using a component interface.

drop-down menu.
2. Click Place Using Interface from the
dashboard.
• Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.
3. In the model tree, select CS1 and notice the
form orientation.
4. In the model tree, right-click FORM 2 and select Delete .
• Click OK.
drop-down menu.
6. Click Place Using Interface .
• Click Yes.
7. Click Inheritance Copy from the dashboard.
8. In the model tree, select CS2 and notice the
form orientation.
Task 4: Place a Die from the library.
1. Select Die Form from the Form types drop-down menu.

2. Select CLOSE_OFFSET_DIE_FORM_MM from the Punch Model drop-down menu.
3. Click Place Using Interface .
• Click Yes.

4. In the model tree, select CS1.
5. Click Show In Separate Window .
• Click in the Excluded die model surfaces
collector.
7. In the new window, press CTRL and select the
bottom surface and the two bottom rounds.
• Click in the Excluded die model surfaces
collector to view the surfaces.

9. Disable the Csys Display display.
Task 5: Edit the placed forms.

1. In the model tree, select FORM 1 and click Edit
Definition from the mini toolbar.
2. Select the Placement tab.
• Select the Add rotation about the first axis
check box.
• Edit the Rotation Angle to 45.
4. In the model tree, right-click FORM 1 and select

Open Base Model .
5. Select EXTRUDE 2 and click Edit Dimensions .
• Edit the depth value to 12.
• Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model.
6. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to
return to the sheetmetal model.
7. Press CTRL+G and notice only the Form 1 depth
has been updated.
8. Expand FORM 2.
• Notice that only this form contains inherited features, which are available for editing.

Creating Die Forms Using Annotations
You can predefine Die Form surfaces with Annotation features.
• Annotation feature
– Die shape
– Excluded surfaces
• Place Die Form
– Surfaces utilized automatically
Figure 1 – Original Sheetmetal Model
Figure 2 – Die Form with Annotation Surfaces Figure 3 – Completed Sheetmetal Model
Creating Die Forms Using Annotations
Within the die form model, you can use an annotation feature to predefine the die shape surfaces and
the surfaces to be excluded.
You can select individual surfaces, or select a surface set using any method, such as seed and
boundary surfaces.
Upon placement of the die on the sheetmetal part, the surface sets are utilized automatically.
Predefinition of die shape surfaces is useful for complex or custom die shapes, or those with multiple
pockets.
PROCEDURE - Creating Die Forms Using Annotations

Sheetmetal\Die_Annotation DIE-FORM_CUTOUT.PRT
Task 1: Create an annotation feature on a Die Form model.
drop-down menu.

3. In the ribbon, select the Annotate tab.
4. Click Annotation Feature from the
Annotation Features group.
5. Click Specify Punch Model Properties from
the Annotation Feature dialog box.
6. Click in the Die Shape collector.
• Select the seed surface.
7. Press and hold SHIFT.

• Select the side boundary surface.
8. While still holding SHIFT, select the top

boundary surface.
9. Release SHIFT and observe the die shape.

10. Click in the Excluded Surfaces collector.
• Select the bottom of the die form.
11. Press and hold SHIFT.

• Select the side boundary surface.
12. While still holding SHIFT, select the top

boundary surface.
13. Release SHIFT and observe the Excluded

Surfaces.
14. Click OK > OK.

• Notice the Annotation feature in the model tree.
15. Click Close .

Task 2: Place the Die Form using the Annotation feature.

• Double-click DIE_ANNOTATION .PRT.
2. Select Die Form from the Form types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
3. Click Open Punch Model .
• Double-click DIE-FORM_CUTOUT.PRT.
4. Notice Place Using Interface is active in the
dashboard and you can specify the assembly
references.
5. Query-select the bottom surface as the first
coincident surface.
6. Select the front face as the second coincident

surface.
• In the dashboard, select the Placement tab.
• Select the second Coincident constraint.
• Click Flip from the Placement tab.
7. Select the third Coincident constraint.

8. Select the right face as the third coincident
surface.
• Click Flip.
9. The form feature is now displayed.

10. Select the Shape tab and notice the die shape
is pre-defined.
11. Select the Options tab and notice the excluded
surfaces are pre-defined.

Creating Sketched Forms

Sketched forms allow you to quickly create forms that are sketch based rather than having to
use a separate model.
Two types of sketch based forms.
• Punch
• Piercing
Figure 1 – Formed Sheetmetal Model
Figure 2 – Sketch for Punch Form Figure 3 – Sketch for Piercing Form
Creating Sketched Forms
Sketched forms allow you to quickly create forms that are sketch based rather than having to use a
separate model. Creating a sketched form is similar to creating an extruded feature. The sketched form
allows for the use if sketch libraries for common shapes. There are two types of sketched forms:
• Punch — Extrudes the sketch shape, and creates additional walls normal to the sheetmetal surface
by default. The following options can be applied:
– Exclude Surfaces
– Capped ends
– Add taper
– Round sharp edges options of Nonplacement edges and Placement edges
• Piercing — Cuts the sketch shape without removing material, and offsets resulting wall portion
normal to sheetmetal surface, offset from zero up to the material thickness. The Round sharp edges
options of Nonplacement edges and Placement edges can be applied.
PROCEDURE - Creating Sketched Forms

Sheetmetal\Form_Sketched SKETCH_FORM.PRT
Task 1: Create a sketched form as a Punch.
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading With Edges from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
3. Select Sketched Form from the Form types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
4. Click Create Punch from the dashboard, if necessary.
5. Select the main surface.
6. Sketch the rectangle shown.
7. Click OK .

8. Drag the depth up to 5.0.
9. Click Change Form Direction .
10. Click Change Material Direction .
11. Click Change Material Direction to change

the direction back to the outside.
12. Click Change Form Direction to set the
direction back up.

14. Disable Capped ends, then enable it again.

15. Enable Add taper.
16. Modify the angle to 10 degrees.
17. Enable Nonplacement edges from the Round

sharp edges area of the Options tab.
18. Enable Placement edges.
19. Click the Exclude Surfaces collector and select

the front surface.

Task 2: Create a sketched form as a Piercing.
1. Click the Operations group drop-down menu
and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
2. Select Sketched Form from the Form types

drop-down menu.
3. Click Create Piercing from the dashboard.
4. Select the front surface.
5. Sketch the circle as shown.
6. Right-click and select OK .
7. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Saved

Orientations and select 3D.
• Notice the default offset is 0.5 * Thickness.

8. Enter a value of 0.35 in the dashboard and press
ENTER.
9. Edit the thickness value in the dashboard to

Thickness.
10. Right-click and select Show Section

Dimensions.
11. Edit the offset dimension to 5.00.

13. Click Resume Feature .

15. Enable Nonplacement edges.
16. Select 0.5 * Thickness from the Radius
drop-down list.
17. Enable Placement edges.

18. Select 0.5 * Thickness from the Radius
drop-down list.

Flattening Forms and Unstamping Edges

Form features can be flattened using the Flatten Form tool.
• You can flatten all valid forms containing child

walls in the model at once.
• Rounds and chamfers are unbent using the
Unstamp Edge tool.
Figure 1 – Original Model (Unbent)
Figure 2 – Flatten Form Figure 3 – Unstamping an Edge
Returning the Model to the Flat

In some cases, you may have to return a sheetmetal model to its original flat state after you have placed
form features on it. The form features do not get flattened along with the bend features in the model.
Flatten Form Theory
You can use the Flatten Form tool to unbend punch or die forms.
• You can flatten multiple form features at the same time.
• You can flatten forms that cross multiple surfaces. For example, you can flatten the form of a wall
gusset over a 90 degree wall.
• You typically create flatten form features at the end of the design process, when you are preparing
your model for manufacture.
• The formed area is retained upon unbend and bend back, to visualize location.
• Flatten Form now supports unbent geometry, and flattens geometry attached to forms.
Flattening Edges
You create edge treatments (stamped edges with chamfers or rounds) using solid class features. As
you prepare your sheetmetal design for manufacture, you need to flatten your design. In order to
accurately flatten the stamped edges, you should create a flatten form feature using Unstamp Edge
. The flatten form calculates the flat pattern for the stamped edges. This is based on the assumption
that the volume of the material in the part is the same, both before and after it is flattened.
Figure 3 displays the adjustments made to the developed length of the part after flattening, ensuring
that the material volume before and after flattening is the same.
PROCEDURE - Flattening Forms and Unstamping Edges

Sheetmetal\Form_Flatten FORM_EDGE_FLATTEN.PRT
Task 1: Flatten forms in a sheetmetal part.
2. Notice the forms and bends.


geometry.
6. Click Flatten Form from the Form types

Task 2: Stamp and unstamp an edge.

1. Zoom in on the front right corner, as shown.
2. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu

and select Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.
3. Select the edge.
4. Edit the value to 0.2.

7. Select Summary from the Measure types
drop-down menu in the Measure group.
8. Select the lower edge, as shown.
9. Notice the length is 1.5.
11. Select the Model tab.

select Unstamp Edge .
13. In the menu manager, click Flatten Sel and
select the lower chamfered edge.
• Click Done Refs > Done > OK.

15. Click Summary .
16. Select the same lower edge.
17. Notice the length is now 1.48.
Note: The edge is shortened by the volume of material the chamfer removes. Assuming the model
volume remains constant, when the chamfer is formed/pressed on the model during manufacturing, the
length of the edge increases by approximately 0.02 and returns to the desired 1.5 length, yielding a more
accurate flat pattern.

Utilizing Dependency Control with Punch and Die Forms
You can use dependency control to control updates of inherited punch and die forms.
• Increased flexibility.
• Assembly options:
– Merge
¨ Automatic Update only
– Inheritance
¨ Automatic Update
¨ Manual Update
¨ No Dependency
¨ Permanent Figure 1 – Update Control Options
Figure 3 – Update Control Switched to

Figure 2 – Update Control Set to Manual Update Automatic Update
Utilizing Dependency Control with Punch and Die Forms

You can use dependency control to control updates of inherited punch and die forms. Update control
provides increased flexibility for these features.
• Punches and dies that are assembled as merge features can only use the Automatic Update
control option. That is, if a change is made to the base model, any assembled punches and dies
automatically update.
• Punches and dies that are assembled as inheritance features can use the following update control
options:
– Automatic Update
– Manual Update – If a change is made to the base model, any assembled punches and dies do
not automatically update. You have to manually switch the update control option to Automatic
Update to update the assembled geometry.
– No Dependency – The dependency is broken between the base model and the assembled
punch or die. If changes are made to the base model, the assembled punch and die geometry
does not update.
Note: Selecting the No Dependency option is permanent. You cannot switch back to the other update
control options.

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Dependency Control with Punch and Die Forms
Sheetmetal\Update-Control_Forms UPDATE-CONTROL.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with dependency control on Die Form features.
drop-down menu.
3. Notice the six Form features in the model tree.

Note: Forms 1 through 3 are Die Form features, while
forms 4 through 6 are Punch Form features.
4. Right-click Form 1 and select Open Base Model

.
5. Select Extrude 2 and click Edit Dimensions
6. Edit the construction circle radius from 35 to 28
and click twice in the background to complete
the edit.

8. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model.
9. Notice that only die form Form 1 updated to the
new base model geometry.
10. Select Form 1 and click Edit Definition from

the mini toolbar.
11. In the dashboard, select the Shape tab, and
notice that update control is set to Automatic
Update.

13. Select Form 2 (DIE_FORM.PRT) and click Edit
Definition .
14. In the dashboard, notice that Inheritance Copy
is specified for the type.
15. Select the Shape tab, and notice that update
control is set to Manual Update.
16. Edit the update control to Automatic Update
and click Complete Feature .
17. Select Form 3 (DIE_FORM.PRT) and click Edit
Definition .
18. Again, notice that Inheritance Copy is
specified for the type.
19. Select the Shape tab and notice that update
control is set to No Dependency and cannot
be changed.
Task 2: Experiment with dependency control on Punch Form features.

1. Right-click Form 4 and select Open Base Model
.
2. Select Revolve 1 and click Edit Dimensions .
3. Edit the width from 38 to 28 and click twice in
the background to complete the edit.

5. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model.
6. Notice that only punch form Form 4 updated to the new base model geometry.
Note: Only punch form Form 4 has an update control set to Automatic Update and therefore is the only
punch form of the three to update automatically.

7. Select Form 5 (CLOSE_FLAT_LOUVER_FORM_MM.PRT) and click Edit Definition .
8. In the dashboard, notice that Inheritance Copy is specified for the type.
9. Select the Shape tab and notice that update control is set to Manual Update.
10. Edit the update control to Automatic Update and click Complete Feature .
Note: Punch form feature Form 6 has an update control set to Manual Update and therefore cannot
be updated to the new base model geometry.
11. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

Module 37
Introduction to Drawings

Understanding Drawing Concepts
You use drawings for documenting the design of parts and assembly models. They typically
contain two and three-dimensional design model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and bill
of material (BOM) information.
Drawing Concepts:
You can place many different items in
• Document model designs. drawings, including:
• Place model views. • Drawing Formats
• Add detail items. • Drawing Views
– For example: Dimensions/Notes/Tables. • Dimensions
• Associativity between drawing views and • Tolerance Information
models.
• Notes and Tables
– Changes automatically reflected.
• Draft Entities and
Symbols
Figure 1 – Example Drawing
Understanding Drawing Concepts

• Drawings enable you to document the design of Creo Parametric models such as parts and
assemblies.
• You can do this by placing views of models onto drawing sheets, and then adding detail items
to drawings such as dimensions, notes, and tables.
• Model drawing views are associated to the model they reference. They reflect modifications
that you make to the model, such as editing dimensions or adding and removing features.
Similarly, you can edit model dimensions on drawings and these edits are reflected in the
referenced model.
Drawing Items
You can place many different items in drawings, including:
• Drawing formats – Formats are typically a collection of lines and referencing items such as letters
and numbers that form the boundary of a drawing. They can also have tables populated with the
drawing number or name, the date, the drawing scale, and company details.
• Drawing views – You can specify many items when configuring drawing views. For example, you
can specify the model orientation and whether the view is sectioned. You can also control the
display of hidden lines and tangent edges and whether the view is scaled.
• Dimensions – You can show model dimensions on drawings. You can also create driven dimensions
that reflect model sizes. Dimensions can be displayed in various formats, such as ISO and ANSI.

• Tolerance information – You can display different types of tolerance information, including
dimensional tolerances, geometric tolerances, and surface finish tolerances.
• Notes and tables – You can create text notes on drawings. You can attach notes with leaders to
model edges or placed “free” on drawings. You can also include parametric information such as
model dimensions within notes. You can also create tables made up of rows and columns in which
you can type text. The text can include parametric information enabling you to create, for example,
bill of materials (BOM) tables.
• Draft entities and symbols – You can add drafted entities to drawings by sketching items such as
lines, circles, and arcs. You can also create drafted entities by importing 2-D geometry such as IGES or
DXF files. Symbols are collections of draft geometry and text. You can create simple symbols to label
items or you can create more complex symbols to represent items such as assemblies or electrical
components.
Drawing Development Process

The drawing development process can be divided into three broad phases.
• Drawing Standards Configuration

• Drawing Initiation
• Drawing Creation
Figure 1 – Drawing Development Process
Drawing Standards Configuration

To ensure that drawing standards are maintained when creating drawings, a number of drawing
standards are typically configured. You can then utilize these items when you create new drawings.
You can include the following items:
• Drawing formats – You can place useful drawing sheet information in tables and notes included in
drawing formats. You can then use this information when you place a format on a drawing. You can
transfer information automatically from the drawing model or manually, after a prompt. For example,
you can include the model name, creation date, component number, and illustrator.
• Drawing templates enable you to automatically create pre-configured views on a drawing and
specify view display. You can also pre-configure various other items such as notes, symbols, snap
lines, shown dimensions, and tables.
• Drawing setup file (filename.dtl) – This file contains options that control the drawing environment.
For example, the height of dimension text, text orientation, dimension style, arrow size, and many
other drawing options. Default values are provided for all options, but you can customize drawing
setup files to meet your company requirements.
• Configuration file (config.pro) – This file can contain drawing-specific options such as the default
folder for drawing formats and drawing template files, and the default setting for regenerating views.
Drawing Initiation
There are two basic methods for initiating drawings, one method involves manually placing views and
adding detail items. The other method involves using a drawing template to automatically place
views and detail items in predetermined locations.
• Create a drawing – Manual Layout. This method involves selecting a drawing format or sheet size,
and then specifying the drawing model. You manually add drawing views and detail items to the
drawing as required.
• Create a drawing – Predetermined Layout. This method involves using a drawing template and
specifying a drawing model. Drawing views and detail items are automatically positioned on the
drawing by referencing the drawing template.
Drawing Creation
The following is a list of typical tasks undertaken during the creation of drawings.
• Add drawing models – Before you can place views of a model, you must associate a model with
the drawing. This is known as adding the model to the drawing. Normally, you add a model to a
drawing during the initiation phase, however you can add models to a drawing at any time, enabling
you to create multi-model drawings if required.
• Add views – After a model has been added to a drawing you can start to place drawing views. There
are many different types of views that you can configure, such as general, projected, sectioned, and
exploded.
• Add dimensions and tolerances – There are two methods that enable you to add dimensions to
model views. You can show model dimensions on views. These dimensions reference the features in
your models, and update if the models change. Alternatively, you can create your own dimension
scheme with driven dimensions. These dimensions also reflect model sizes, but you cannot use them
to edit model features. You can also display tolerances for any dimensions.
• Add non-dimensional detail items – You can add items such as text notes, geometric tolerances,
datum planes, datum axes, and symbols to a drawing. These items may already exist within your
drawing model, in which case you can show the items on the drawing. Alternatively, you can create
these items directly within a drawing.
• Create tables – You can configure tables within drawings. Each table cell can contain parametric
text. For example, you can extract dimension values and parameters from models and display them
in tables. If you have an assembly drawing you can use special report parameters to display bill
of material information within tables.
• Create draft entities – You can create draft entities in drawings by sketching items such as lines,
circles, and arcs. You can also create draft entities by importing 2-D geometry such as IGES or DXF
files. You typically use draft entities when creating drawing symbols.

PROCEDURE - Drawing Development Process
Objectives
• Create drawings using a manual method to layout views and detail items.
• Create drawings using drawing templates to automate the process.
• Add formats and sheets to drawings.
• Add models to drawings.
• Add views to drawings.
• Configure view properties.
• Show and cleanup dimensions on drawings.
Cordless Power Tools, Inc. (CPT) designs and manufactures hand-held power tools, including
cordless drills, circular saws, and hammer drills. CPT is currently developing a new cordless drill
that uses a gasoline-powered two-cycle engine instead of a battery-powered electric motor. The
gasoline-powered engine produces more power than a battery-operated motor. It is able to drill
through steel and concrete, due to the high torque capacity. The gas-powered drill lasts four to five
times longer than the battery-powered drill and can be used in locations without a reliable power
supply.
You are part of an engineering design team that has completed the first gas-powered drill prototype
design. You have been assigned the task of creating some of the design drawings for the components,
which need to be reviewed for manufacturing. You have to document the various engineering data
related to the gas-powered drill assembly along with company information.
Step 1: Review the drill assembly and its components.
1. If necessary, start Creo Parametric.
2. Set your working directory.
• In the Folder Browser , click Working Directory .
• In the folder tree, expand the PTCU > CreoParametric5 > Process folder.
• Right-click Drawing and select Set Working Directory.
• Double-click the Drawing folder to view its contents in the browser.
3. Review the drill assembly.
• In the browser, select DRILL.ASM.
• If necessary, click Preview to expand the
preview window.
• Observe the drill assembly.

4. Review drill assembly components.
• In the browser, select CLUTCH.ASM.
• Observe the clutch assembly in the preview
window. You will create a drawing of one of
the clutch shoe parts.
• In the browser, select MANIFOLD.PRT.
• Observe the manifold part in the preview
window. You will create a drawing of this part.
• Close the browser.
Step 2: Create a drawing for the left clutch part model.

1. Create a new drawing.
• Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.
• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the type.
• Type CLUTCH_SHOE_LEFT as the name of the drawing.
• Clear the Use default template check box.
• Click OK.
2. Configure the drawing options.
• In the Default Model section, click Browse.
• Select CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT as the default
model.
• Click Open.
• Select the Empty with format option.
• In the Format section, click Browse.
• In the Open dialog box, click Working
Directory .
• Select C_PART.FRM as the format.
• Click Open.
• Click OK.

3. Finalize the drawing.
• When prompted, type Steel for the material parameter, and press ENTER.
• Type CPT for the vendor parameter, and press ENTER.
• Type N/A for the volume parameter, and press ENTER.
• Notice that a format has been placed on the drawing.
• Zoom in to the format table in the lower-right corner, as shown.
• Note some of the cells have been populated with information from the part model. Some cells
have also been populated with the information you typed in previously.
Step 3: Create drawing views.

2. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to refit the drawing in the graphics window.
• From the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
3. Place a general view on the drawing.
• If necessary, select the Layout tab in the
ribbon.
• Click General View from the Model Views
group.
• Click OK to specify No Combined State and
select a location, as shown.
4. Configure the view.

• Select the saved view name TOP from the
Model view names list.
• Click OK.
• Notice the view orientation update, as shown.
• Click in the background to de-select any
highlighted items.

Note: The first view you place on a drawing must be a general view. You can then add additional views.
5. Create a projected view.
• Select the first general view on the drawing.
Ensure that the view is highlighted.
• Click Projection View from the mini toolbar.
• Select a location to the right of the general
view, as shown.
6. Create a second projected view.

Ensure that the view is highlighted.
• Select a location above the general view, as
shown.
7. Create another general view on the drawing.

views.
• Right-click and select General View .
• Click OK to specify No Combined State and
select a location in the upper-right corner of
the drawing, as shown.

8. Configure the general view.
• Select the View Display category from the
Drawing View dialog box.
• Edit the Display style to No Hidden.
• Click Apply.
• Select the Scale category from the Drawing
View dialog box.
• Select the Custom scale option.
• Type 3 for the Custom scale.
• Click OK.
• Notice the view display and scale update, as
shown.
9. Edit the view properties of three views.
• Select the first view placed on the drawing.
• Press CTRL and select the two projected
views.
• Ensure that all three views are selected.
• Click Properties from the mini toolbar.
• Click OK.
• Notice the three views update, as shown.
10. Edit the drawing scale.

• Press and hold ALT, then in the lower-left
corner of the graphics window, double-click
the SCALE value.
• The message input window prompts you to
type a new value. Type 4 as the new scale
value and press ENTER.
• Notice the three views update as shown;
however, the scaled view does not update
because it is controlled by its own specific
view scale value.
11. Move a drawing view.
• Select the top projected view, right-click, and
select Lock View Movement to enable
view movement.
• With the view still selected, drag it to a new
location, as shown.
highlighted items.

Step 4: Add dimensions to the views.
1. Show model dimensions.
• In the ribbon, select the Annotate tab.
• Click Show Model Annotations from the
Annotations group.
• Select All driving dimensions from the Type
drop-down list.
• Select the general view, as shown.
• Click Select All .
• Click OK in the Show Model Annotations
dialog box.
• Click in the background to de-select all
highlighted dimensions.
Note: You can clean up dimensions to enable easier viewing of the drawing. You can do this by manually
moving the location of selected dimensions, or by automatically specifying dimension offsets relative
to view outlines.
2. Clean up model dimensions.
• Click Cleanup Dimensions from the Edit
group.
• Click and drag a window around all the
dimensions and middle-click.
• Edit the offset to 0.5.
• Edit the increment to 0.5.
• Clear the Create snap lines check box.
• Click Apply.
• Click Close.
• If necessary, click in the background to
de-select all dimensions.
• Notice all the linear dimensions update, as
shown.
3. Manually edit a dimension.
• Select the 46.5 diameter dimension.
• Drag the dimension to a new location, as
shown.
4. Flip the arrows for the diameter dimension.
• With the 46.5 diameter dimension still
selected, right-click and select Flip Arrows
• Notice the dimension arrows update, as
shown.

Note: You can edit other dimensions using similar methods if required. You can also create dimensions
on the drawing to reflect your own dimension scheme.
5. Create a linear dimension on the drawing.
• Pan and zoom into the right, projected view,
as shown.
• Click Dimension from the Annotations
group.
• Press CTRL and select the two vertical edges
on the model, and middle-click to place the
dimension, as shown.
6. Create a second linear dimension on the

drawing.
• Press CTRL and select the two vertical edges
on the model, and middle-click to place the
second dimension, as shown.
• Click Cancel from the Select Reference
dialog box.
de-select all highlighted dimensions.
• Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to
refit the drawing in the graphics window.
Note: You can continue to add dimensions to the drawing to complete the detailing.
7. Save the drawing and erase all objects from memory.
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
• Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
• In the ribbon, click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group.
• Click OK to erase all objects from memory.
Step 5: Create a drawing for the manifold part model, use a template drawing to simplify the process.
• Type MANIFOLD as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.

• Select MANIFOLD.PRT as the default model,
and click Open.
• Select the Use template option.
• In the Template section, click Browse.
• Select C_PART_TEMPLATE.DRW as the
template, and click Open.
• Click OK.

• Type CPT for the vendor parameter, and press ENTER.
Note: Notice how quickly a drawing has been created, with six views of the model, dimensions added
to views, and a drawing format placed on the drawing. Template drawings are useful when you need
to create standardized drawings. They are also useful to quickly create a drawing, which you can
then manually finalize.

Step 6: Change the drawing setup file options.
1. Open and apply a drawing setup file.
• Zoom in to the front view and observe the
appearance of the dimensions in this view.
• Click File > Prepare > Drawing Properties.
– In the Detail Options section, click change
in the Detail Options row.
• Click Open Config , select ISO.DTL from the
working directory, and click Open.
• Notice that many of the drawing setup file
options are different.
• Click Apply > OK > Close > Close.
• Notice the dimensions now display tolerance
values, as shown.
Note: You can configure and store your own company-specific drawing setup options.
• Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group.
Step 7: Create a drawing for the engine assembly model and use a template drawing to simplify
the process.
• Select Drawing as the type.
• Type ENGINE as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.

• Select ENGINE.ASM as the default model,
and click Open.
• In the Template section, click Browse. In the
Open dialog box, click Working Directory .
• Select C_ASSBLY _TEMPLATE.DRW as the
template, and click Open.
• Click OK.

• Type CPT for the vendor parameter, and
press ENTER.
• Zoom in and review the drawing view. Review
the contents of the drawing table.
• Notice an exploded assembly view is
automatically created. Notice also the
components in the exploded view have been
labeled. The labels relate to the indexed bill
of material (BOM) table which has also been
configured on the drawing.
Note: You can add more than one model to a drawing at any time. This enables you to create
multi-model drawings if required.

Step 8: Add a model to the drawing and create a multi-model drawing.
1. Add the carburetor assembly model to the drawing.
•Click Drawing Models from the Model Views group.
•Click Add Model from the Menu Manager.
•Select CARBURETOR.ASM as the new model and click Open.
•Click Done/Return.
•The active model is now CARBURETOR.ASM. Notice the information at the bottom of the
graphics window.
2. Add a drawing sheet.
• Click New Sheet from the Document group.
• When prompted, type N/A for the material parameter, and press ENTER.
• Type CARB INC for the vendor parameter, and press ENTER.
• Type N/A for the volume parameter, and press ENTER.
• Notice a format has been placed on the new drawing sheet.
3. Place a general view on the drawing.
• If prompted, click OK to specify No Combined
State.
• Select a location in the center of the drawing,
as shown.
4. Configure an exploded view.

• Select the View Display category from the Drawing View dialog box.
• Edit the Display style to No Hidden and click Apply.
• Select the View States category.
• Select the Explode components in view check box.
• Click OK.
• Notice the view updates, as shown.

5. Add a Bill of Material (BOM) table.
• In the ribbon, select the Table tab.
• Click Table from File from the Table group.
Directory .
• Select BOM_TABLE.TBL and click Open.
• Place the table in the top-left corner of the
drawing, as shown.
• Click Update Tables from the Data group.
• Notice the table is automatically populated
with the carburetor assembly components.
6. Show BOM balloons on the exploded view.
• Click Create Balloons from the Balloons group and select Create Balloons – All from
the drop-down list.
• Select anywhere within the BOM table.
• Notice the BOM balloons are displayed on the exploded view, as shown.
Note: You can modify the location of BOM balloons and their balloon leader attachment points.

Step 9: Review the drawing format and drawing template.
1. Open a drawing format file.
• Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
• Select C_PART.FRM and click Open.
2. Review the contents of the drawing format.
• Notice the layout of the drawing sheet, the drawing sheet size, and the drawing tables
contained within the format.
• Zoom in to the drawing table at the bottom of the format sheet.
• Notice the parameters within the drawing table. These parameters are updated with model
information or typed information when a drawing is created.
3. Open a part drawing template file.

• Select C_PART_TEMPLATE.DRW and click
Open.
4. Review the contents of the drawing template.
• Notice the layout of the drawing view
symbols, and the drawing format contained
within the drawing.
• Select the FRONT view, and then click
Properties from the mini toolbar.
• Notice the different options that you can
configure in the Template View Instructions
dialog box. These options enable you to
configure many different types of views in a
drawing template.
• Click OK.
5. Erase all objects from memory.

Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface
The Drawing mode was reorganized with a ribbon-style user interface.
• The ribbon organizes and configures the user-interface.

– Tabs based on the current task
– Sets up selection scope
– Appropriate right-click options
• Ribbon structure.
– Tabs contain groups of commands.
– Can be customized.
Figure 1 – Drawing Ribbon
Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface

The Drawing mode has been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface. A cross between a tabbed
dialog box and a toolbar, the ribbon appears above the graphics window. The ribbon organizes and
configures the user interface by:
• Organizing the current task into a series of tabs.
– The tabs represent a task in the typical drawing creation workflow.
– Each tab contains groups of icon commands.
• Setting up the selection scope.
– By default, you can only select items that pertain to the selected tab. For example, you cannot
select a table (table item) when the Layout tab (for drawing views) is active.
¨ You can select out-of-context items by pressing the ALT key. However, the available actions
are limited compared to what is available within the appropriate tab.
– The available selection filters correspond to the active tab.
– The Drawing Tree updates to display only items that pertain to the active tab.
Ribbon User Interface Structure
Within each tab in the ribbon, icon commands are organized into groups. Depending on the available
screen space, less common options may be accessed by clicking a down arrow to reveal additional
commands.
Customizing the Ribbon User Interface
The ribbon user interface can be customized to control icon display and placement. When in the
Customize Screen function, right-click the ribbon icons for the following options:
• Icon display size – Icons can be set to display as large or small.
• Icon and text – Commands can be displayed as a large or small icon with text, icon only, or text only.
• Command priority – Commands can be reordered within their group to place frequently used options
in easy reach. However, you cannot move commands between groups.

Exploring Drawing Ribbon Commands
Ribbon tabs contain groups of commands.
• Ribbon Tab Summary
– Layout – Drawing Models, Sheets, Views
– Table – Create and Modify Tables, Repeat Regions, BOM Balloons
– Annotate – Show, Erase, Cleanup, and Delete Detail Items
– Sketch – 2-D Sketching Tools
– Legacy Migration – Validate Associations and Annotation Converter
– Analysis – Measure, Analyze, and Simulate
– Review – ModelCHECK, Updating, Comparison, Information Tools
– Tools – Switch from Drawing and Template Modes, Investigate
– View – Set Datum Displays, Views, and Layers
– Framework – Component Views, Drawing Tools, Info
Figure 1 – Layout Tab and Groups in Drawing Ribbon

Exploring Drawing Ribbon Commands
Within each tab in the ribbon, icon commands are organized into groups. Depending on the available
screen space, less common options may be accessed by clicking a down arrow to reveal additional
commands.
The ribbon tabs and groups are organized in the following structure. Below is a summary of the
commands in each group:
• Layout
– Document – Sheet management
– Insert – Insert Objects, Image, or Data to drawing
– Model Views – Create views by type
– Edit – Component Display, Edge Display, and Convert Draft Groups
– Display – Snap Lines, Grids, and Views
– Format – Te xt, Line, and Arrow Styles
• Table
– Table – Create different types of tables
– Rows and Columns – Configure table rows and columns
– Data – Repeat regions, update tables, switch report symbols
– Balloons – Create and clean up BOM balloons
– Format – Table Te xt and Line Styles
• Annotate
– Delete – Delete detail items, jogs, or breaks
– Group – Draft Groups and Relations
– Annotations – Show annotations (detail items), create notes or symbols
– Edit – Existing Annotation editing tools, clean up dimensions
– Format – Annotation Line Te xt and Arrow Styles
• Sketch
– Settings – Draft grid, Sketcher preferences, parametric sketch option
– Controls – References, Coordinate options
– Sketching – Sketching tools
– Trim – Trim, Divide, Stretch tools
– Edit – Rotate, Mirror, Scale and Translate tools
– Format – Te xt, Line and Arrow Styles
– Group – Draft Group and Relations
• Legacy Migration
– Map – Add Model, Create Model Views, and Copy Annotations
– Views – Create 2-D Views, Match View, and Orient View
– Model Views – Add Model Views and display Model Information
– Annotations – Add Symbols, Notes, and Dimensions
– Utilities / Settings – Clean Up and Validate Associations
– Annotation Convertor – Convert Annotations
• Analysis
– Custom – External program Analysis tools
– Model Report – Mass Properties
– Measure – Distance, Volume, Area, and Angle measurements
– Inspect Geometry – Analyze Drawing Geometries
– Design Study – Tolerance Analysis, Simulate Analysis, and Electrical Clearance
• Review
– Update – Update sheets, tables, regenerate model
– Compare – Compare sheet to picture, difference report, file history
– Query – Highlight by attribute, drawing view information
• Tools
– Investigate – Find items and information from drawing
– Model Intent – Define Parameters and Relations
– Utilities – Drawing Programs, IGES Group, and Aux Applications
– Applications – Switch to Drawing, Template, Legacy, or Piping Modes
• View
– Visibility – Layer Control
– Orientation – Pan, Zoom, and Saved Views
– Model Display – Change Display Modes and Fast HLR Toggle
– Show – Toggle Datum and Coordinate Displays
– Window – Drawing Window management
• Framework
– Component Views – Create component views
– Drawing Tools – Dimension the part automatically, Create a stock length table, Create a cut
list, and Create item number note
– Info – Component Info, Edit installation configuration, Edit configuration session, and About AFX

PROCEDURE - Exploring Drawing Ribbon Commands
Drawing\Ribbon DRW_RIBBON.DRW
Step 1: Navigate through the drawing ribbon to explore drawing commands.
2. In the ribbon, select the Layout tab.
3. Right-click and view available layout commands.
• Click in the drawing background.
4. Click Drawing Models from the Model Views group. The menu manager appears.
• Click Done/Return.
5. Click General View from the Model Views
group.
• Click OK to specify no combined state.
• Select a location for the view.
• Select 3D as the view name and click OK.
6. Click in the drawing background.
7. Notice the Component Display option in the Edit group.

8. Notice the Object option in the Insert group.
9. In the ribbon, select the Table tab.
• Right-click and view available table
commands.
10. Cursor over the upper-right table.
• Right-click three times and notice that rows,
columns, and the entire table are available for
selection.
11. Click Table from the Table group and select Insert Table from the drop-down menu.
The Insert Table dialog box appears.
• Click Cancel in the Insert Table dialog box.
12. Select the upper-left cell in the existing table.
• Click Height and Width from the Rows & Columns group.
• Click Cancel.
• Click in the drawing background to de-select the table cell.
13. Notice the Repeat Region option in the Data group.
14. Notice the Create Balloons option in the Balloons group.
15. Notice the Te xt Style option in the Format group.

• Right-click and view available annotation
commands.
17. Select a dimension.
• Notice two more tabs appear in the ribbon:
Format and Dimension.
• Review the options in the Dimension tab.
• Select the Format tab.
• Review the options in the Format tab.
• Click in the drawing background to de-select
all.
• Notice the tabs, Format and Dimension
disappear.
• Notice the Show Model Annotations
option in the Annotations group.
• Notice the Move to View option in the Edit
group.
18. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab.
• Notice the Draft Grid option in the Settings group.
• Notice the Relative Coordinates option in the Controls group is currently grayed out and
unavailable.
• Notice the Line option in the Sketching group.
• Notice the Corner option in the Trim group.
• Notice the Rotate option in the Edit group.
• Notice the Line Style option in the Format group.
• Notice the Draft Group option in the Group group.
19. In the ribbon, select the Legacy Migration tab.
• Notice the various groups and options.
• Notice the Mass Properties option in the Model Report group.
• Notice the Curvature option in the Inspect Geometry group.
21. In the ribbon, select the Review tab.
• Notice the Update Sheets option in the Update group.
• Notice the Difference Report option in the Compare group.
• Notice the Drawing View option in the Query group.
22. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
• Notice the Feature Information option in the Investigate group.
• Notice the Parameters option in the Model Intent group.
• Notice the Template option in the Applications group.

23. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
• Notice the Layers option in the Visibility group.
• Notice the Zoom In option in the Orientation group.
• Notice the various Datum Display toggles in the Show group.
• Notice the Activate option in the Window group.
24. In the ribbon, select the Framework tab.
• Notice the various groups and options.
25. Click the Info group drop-down menu.
• Notice the installation and configuration options.
Using Undo and Redo Options

Reverting to previous work states during annotation creation and modification workflows is more
reliable and easier.
Undo and Redo is improved for annotation types:

• Dimensions
• Geometric Tolerances (GTOLs)
• Datum Feature Symbols
• Datum Targets
Figure 1 – Undo Option
Using Undo and Redo Options

Undo and Redo for commands relating to the above-listed annotation types is more robust. This
includes annotations that are created in 2-D and 3-D, and those appearing in 3-D. For example,
we can use the Undo and Redo option when creating and deleting standalone annotations and
performing graphical modifications such as movements. We can also use that when making semantic
modifications, such as changing value and text fields, references, designation attributes, and so on.
Reverting to previous work states is more efficient and reliable because of the Redo and Undo option.
This can be efficiently used for Annotation and its modifications.

Module 38
Creating New Drawings

Creating Drawings Using Formats and Sheets
Creating drawings involves selecting a drawing format or sheet size and selecting a default
drawing model.
Creating drawings:
• Specify drawing format
– Retrieve format
• Specify sheet size
– Standard size
¨ Portrait or landscape
– Variable size
¨ Metric or imperial units
• Select default model
Figure 1 – Specifying the Sheet Size
Figure 2 – Example Drawing Format
Creating Drawings Using Formats and Sheets

• When you create a drawing you must specify a format or select a sheet size.
– If you use a format, you can select an existing format with a predetermined sheet size.
• If you specify a sheet size, you can select a standard size sheet, with landscape or portrait orientation.
• Alternatively, you can select the Variable option, enabling you to specify the width and height in
inches or millimeters.
• You also need to specify the default model for the drawing. This can be a part or assembly.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drawings Using Formats and Sheets
Drawing\Formats_Sheets NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a drawing for GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT by selecting a format.
• Type GEARBOX in the Name field.
• Click OK.
• In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse
from the Default Model section.
• Select GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT as the default
model.
• Click Open.
• Click Browse from the Format section.
• Click Working Directory .
• Select C_FORMAT_GENERIC.FRM as the
format.
• Click Open > OK.
• When prompted, type J.Smith for the drawn_by parameter, and press ENTER.
• Notice a format has been placed on the drawing.
• Zoom into the format table in the lower-right corner as shown.
• Note some of the cells have been populated with information from the part model, and the
drawn_by parameter has populated the DRAWN cell.
Note: Note you can also select drawing formats from the system-defined formats folder.
Task 2: Create a drawing for SWITCH.PRT by selecting a sheet size.
• Type SWITCH as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.

• In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse
from the Default Model section.
• Select SWITCH.PRT as the default model.
• Click Open.
• Select the Empty option in the Specify
Template section.
• Ensure the Landscape button is selected.
• Note you can also configure the sheet
orientation using the Portrait and Variable
buttons.
• Select A3 from the Standard Size drop-down
list.
• Click OK.
Note: An A3 sheet size is configured, and the default drawing model is SWITCH.PRT.
Creating Drawing Templates

Drawing templates have predefined views and detail items. You can use them to automate the
creation of drawings.
Drawing template options:

• Specify the position of views
• Configure views
• Show dimensions
• Create snap lines
• Place notes
• Place symbols
• Configure tables
• Add drawing formats
Figure 1 – Configuring a Template View
Figure 2 – Layout Views in Template Drawing

Creating Drawing Templates
Drawing templates consist of a number of different pre-configured items, you can use them to do the
following:
• Specify the position of views on a drawing — You can layout any number of drawing views and
specify their location on the drawing template.
• Configure views — You can configure all elements of views that have been located in the drawing,
including the type of view, view state, view display, and view scale.
• Show dimensions — You can specify whether model dimensions are shown in a drawing view.
• Create snap lines — If dimensions are shown in a view you can specify whether snap lines are created.
You can also configure the number of snap lines created and the spacing between the snap lines.
• Place notes and symbols — You can place notes and symbols on drawing templates. The notes can
include parametric information, which you can extract from the drawing model when you create a
drawing. For example, you can include parameters such as the name of the drawing model.
• Configure tables — You can add tables to drawing templates. For example, you can place a bill
of materials table on a drawing template. You can configure the table to extract bill of materials
information if you add an assembly as a drawing model.
• Add drawing formats — You can add drawing formats to drawing templates. Any parametric
information within drawing formats, such as parameters in tables and notes, are automatically
extracted from the drawing model when you create a drawing.
PROCEDURE - Creating Drawing Templates

Drawing\Templates _Creating NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a drawing template, and add template views to the drawing.
1. Initiate a drawing template.
• Type TEMPLATE_PART_C_SIZE as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.
• Ensure the Default Model is edited to none.
• In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory .
• Select C_SIZE_FORMAT.FRM as the format.
• When prompted, type &drawn_by for the drawn_by parameter, and press ENTER. This
maintains the drawn_by parameter, within the format, for future use.
3. Switch to drawing template mode.
• In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
• Click Template from the Applications group.

4. Configure the first template view.
• Click Template View from the Model
Views group.
• Type FRONT_VIEW in the Name field.
• Notice that by default the Type is set to
General, and the Orientation is set to FRONT.
• Click Model Display, and ensure that the
check box is still selected.
• Select the No hidden line option.
• Select the Dimensions check box, then select
the Create snap lines check box.
• Type 0.5 for the Incremental spacing, and
type 0.4 for the Initial offset.
5. Position the template view on the drawing.
• Click Place View, and select a location in the
lower-left of the drawing, as shown.
• Click OK from the Template View Instructions
dialog box.
6. Place a projected view with a section.

• Right-click and select Template View .
• Type RIGHT_PROJ in the Name field.
• Select Projection as the Type. Notice the FRONT_VIEW is automatically configured as the
parent view.
• Type A in the Cross section field.
• Select FRONT_VIEW as the Arrow placement view.
• Click Model Display and ensure that the check box is still selected.
• Click Place View and select a location to the right of the FRONT_VIEW, as shown.
• Press ALT+Tab to activate the Template View Instructions dialog box.
• Click OK from the dialog box.

7. Place a scaled general view.
• Right-click and select Template View .
• Type 3D_VIEW in the Name field.
• Type 3D_VIEW in the Orientation field.
• Select the Scale check box, and type 0.75 in
the View scale field.
• Click Model Display and ensure that the
check box is still selected.
• Click Place View and select a location above
the projected view, as shown.
• Press ALT+Tab to activate the Template View
Instructions dialog box.
Exercise 1: Creating Different Drawing Templates

Objectives
• Create drawing templates.
• Place different types of views on drawing templates.
• Place tables on drawing templates.
Scenario
You need to reduce the time it takes to create drawings. You also need to maintain company standards
with regard to the information contained within drawings. You create both part and assembly drawing
templates to achieve these objectives.
Drawing\Templates _Creating_Different NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create an A2 assembly drawing template.
• Type TEMPLATE_ASSEMBLY _A2_SIZE as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.

• Ensure that the default model is edited to
None.
Directory .
• Select A2_SIZE_FORMAT.FRM as the format.
• When prompted, type &drawn_by for the
drawn_by parameter, and press ENTER.
• Notice an A2 format is placed on the drawing.
• In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
• Click Template from the Applications
group.
Note: The &drawn_by parameter is utilized when the drawing template is used to create a new drawing.
Task 2: Place a template view.
1. Create an exploded template view.
Views group.
• Type 3D_EXPLODED in the Name field.
• Notice that by default the Type is set to
General.
• Type EXP in the Explode field.
• Select the Scale check box, and type 1.5 in
the View scale field.
• Click Place View, and select a location in the
center of the drawing.

Task 3: Add a bill of materials table to the drawing.
1. Insert the table BOM.TBL.
• Click Table from File from the Table group
• Select the BOM.TBL table.
• Click Open.
• Place the table in the lower-right corner of the
drawing, as shown.
Note: When utilizing the drawing template, the bill of materials table populates with information when
an assembly model is placed in the drawing.
2. Save the template drawing and erase all objects from memory.
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the drawing window.
Task 4: Create a part drawing template.
• Type TEMPLATE_PART_A2_SIZE as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.
• Ensure the default model is edited to None.
• In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory .
• Select A2_SIZE_FORMAT.FRM as the format.
• When prompted, type &drawn_by for the drawn_by parameter, and press ENTER.
• Notice an A2 size drawing format is placed on the drawing.
• Select the Tools tab.
• Click Template from the Applications group.

Task 5: Add template views to the drawing.
1. Place the first template view.
Views group.
• Type FRONT_VIEW in the Name field.
• Notice the Orientation is set to FRONT by
default.
• Select the Dimensions check box, then select
the Create snap lines check box.
• Type 0.5 for the Incremental spacing, and
type 0.75 for the Initial offset.
• Click Place View, select a location in the
lower-left of the drawing, as shown.
• Keep the Template View Instructions dialog
box open.
2. Place a projected view.
• Click Repeat in the Template View Instructions dialog box.
• Type RIGHT_PROJ in the Name field.
• Select Projection as the Type.
• Notice the FRONT_VIEW is automatically configured as the parent view.
• Click Model Display, and ensure that the check box is selected.
• Click Dimensions, and ensure that the check box is selected.
• If necessary, select the Create snap lines check box.
• Type 0.5 for the Incremental spacing, and type 0.75 for the Initial offset.
• Click Place View, and select a location to the right of the front view, as shown.
• Keep the Template View Instructions dialog box open.

3. Place a second projected view.
• Click Repeat in the dialog box.
• Type PLAN in the Name field.
• Select Projection as the Type.
• Notice the FRONT_VIEW is automatically
configured as the parent view.
• Click Dimensions, and ensure that the check
box is selected.
• If necessary, select the Create snap lines
check box.
• Type 0.5 for the Incremental spacing, type
0.75 for the Initial offset.
• Click Place View, and select a location above
the front view, as shown.
• Keep the Template View Instructions dialog
box open.
4. Place a 3-D general view.
• Click Repeat in the dialog box.
• Click View States, and ensure that the check
box is selected.
• Type 3D_VIEW in the Name field.
• Click Place View. Drag a window to specify
the bounding box for the view, above the
RIGHT_PROJ view, as shown.
• Note that the location and scale of the view is
controlled by the bounding box.
• Click OK from the Template View Instructions
dialog box.
5. Save the template drawing and erase all objects from memory.
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the drawing window.

Creating Drawings Using Drawing Templates
Drawing templates reduce the time it takes to create drawings by automating the creation of
views and prearranging detail items.
Drawing templates enable you to:

• Copy drawing information from a template
drawing.
• Standardize drawings.
• Predefine routine tasks.
• Reduce detailing time.
Figure 1 – Drawing Template
Figure 2 – Resulting Drawing
Creating Drawings Using Drawing Templates

• When you use a drawing template to create a new drawing, all drawing information is copied from
the drawing template into the new drawing.
– During this process, pre-configured template views are replaced with views of the drawing model.
– All non-parametric information such as notes and drawing symbols are copied directly into the
new drawing.
– All parametric information such as parameters contained in tables and notes are automatically
updated with drawing model information.
• Using drawing templates enables you to standardize drawings as drawing views and detail items
are consistently prearranged.
• Many of the routine tasks are predefined, enabling you to focus on specific tasks required to finalize
a drawing.
• Overall you can reduce detailing time and create more consistent drawings.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drawings Using Drawing Templates
Drawing\Templates _Using NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a drawing for the CLUTCH_BODY.PRT.
1. Initiate a drawing.
• Type CLUTCH_BODY as the name of the drawing.
• Click OK.
• In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse from the Default Model section.
• Select CLUTCH_BODY.PRT as the default model.
• Click Open.
• Select TEMPLATE_PART_A2_SIZE.DRW as the template drawing.
• Notice a format and four views have been placed on the drawing. Notice also dimensions
have been shown on the drawing.
• Note some of the table cells have been populated with information from the part model.
Task 2: Create a drawing for the CLUTCH.ASM.

1. Initiate a drawing.
• Type CLUTCH_ASSY in the Name field.
• Click OK.

• In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse from the Default Model section.
• Select CLUTCH.ASM as the default model, and click Open.
• Select TEMPLATE_ASSEMBLY _A2_SIZE.DRW as the template drawing.
• Notice an exploded view has been placed on the drawing. Notice also a bill of materials table
has been placed on the drawing.

Module 39
Creating Drawing Views

Configuring Drawing Models
A 3-D model must be associated with a drawing before you can place model views on the drawing.
Drawing Models: Configuring Drawing Models:

• Drawing and design model associativity. • Use Drawing Models .
• Add models to a drawing: • Use the Set Active Model/Rep in the
– Parts or assemblies. Model Tree .
– Multi-model drawings.
• One active working model.
Figure 1 – Multi-model Drawings One Active Model
Drawing Models Theory

• It is important to understand that drawing views are 2-D representations of 3-D design models,
(parts or assemblies). There is two-way associativity between the design model and any referenced
drawing views. Therefore, changes to the design model, such as editing dimensions or adding
and removing features, are updated in referenced drawing views. Similarly, you can edit model
dimensions on drawings and these edits are reflected in the referenced model.
• Before you create views of 3-D models in drawings, you must associate a model with a drawing. This
is called adding a model to a drawing.
• A model can be a part or assembly. In addition, you can add more than one model to a drawing,
enabling you to create multi-model drawings.
• However, with multi-model drawings, only one model can be active within the drawing. When
a model is active, you can add drawing views of the active model and perform operations such as
showing dimensions. Note, you can edit the active model within a drawing at any time.
Configuring Drawing Models
You can use the following methods to configure drawing models:
• In the ribbon, on the Layout tab, you can click Drawing Models in the Model Views group. This
opens the DWG MODELS menu which enables you to perform various tasks including add model,
delete model, and set the current drawing model.
• For multi-model drawings, you can click Set Active Model/Rep in the Model Tree . You then
specify the current drawing model from the drop-down list.

PROCEDURE - Configuring Drawing Models
Drawing\Models_Configuring CLUTCH.DRW
Task 1: Configure models in a drawing.
Note: You normally specify a model to be referenced by a drawing when initially creating a drawing. In
this case CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT was specified as the default model. However, you can also add models
to a drawing after a drawing has been created.
2. Add CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT to the drawing.
• In the ribbon, select the Layout tab, if
necessary.
• Click Drawing Models from the Model
Views group.
• Click Add Model from the menu manager.
• Select CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT as the model
to add.
• Click Open.
• Model CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT has been added
to the drawing and is the current active model.
This is displayed in the drawing information at
the bottom of the graphics window, as shown.
• Notice also model CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT is
now displayed in the model tree, as shown.
Note: You can add both parts and assemblies to a multi-model drawing. You can also add simplified
representations of parts and assemblies as drawing models. You are prompted to select a simplified
representation if they exist.
3. Add the CLUTCH.ASM model to the drawing.
• Click Drawing Models .
• Click Add Model.
• Select CLUTCH.ASM as the model to add.
• Click Open.
• Model CLUTCH.ASM is now the current active
model in the drawing.
Note: You can select an alternative current active model at any time. This enables you to add drawing
views and detail items relating to different models during the development of your drawings.
4. Configure CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT as the current active model.
• From the Model Tree, click Set Active Model/Rep .
• Select CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT > Master Rep.
• Model CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT is now the current active model in the drawing.
Note: It is possible to remove a model if no drawing views are referenced by the model. However, you
cannot remove a model from a drawing if the drawing has views that use the model.

5. Remove the CLUTCH.ASM model from the drawing.
• Click Drawing Models .
• Click Del Model.
• Select CLUTCH to remove the model.
• When prompted, click Yes to delete this model.
Configuring Drawing Sheets

You can create multi-sheet drawings by adding sheets to a drawing. Various tools enable you to
configure drawing sheets.
Drawing Sheets Theory:

• Create multi-sheet drawings.
• Configure current drawing model before
adding drawing sheets.
Figure 1 – Document Group

Drawing Sheets Tools:
• Drawing Ribbon — Document Group
• Sheets Tab Figure 2 – Sheets Tab
• Drawing Tree
Drawing Sheets Theory

• You can create multiple sheet drawings and move items from one sheet to another. Each drawing
sheet has its own drawing scale, enabling you to configure different drawing scales on different
drawing sheets. This is useful when creating multi-model drawings where you can have views of
different size models on different sheets.
• Note, with multi-model drawings, you must configure the desired current model before adding
drawing sheets with formats. Model information is only transferred into format tables when the
format sheet is added to the drawing.
Drawing Sheets Tools
Sheets in a drawing are listed in the Sheets tab at the bottom of the graphics window and in the drawing
tree. The following tools enable you to configure drawing sheets:
• In the Layout tab of the Drawing ribbon, the Document group provides tools to create new sheets,
move or copy sheets, and configure the active sheet.
• Sheets in a drawing are listed in the Sheets tab area below the graphics window. You can navigate
across the sheets using the Sheets tab. Using the sheets tab you can create new sheets, move or
copy sheets, configure the active sheet, rename a sheet, and delete a sheet.

PROCEDURE - Configuring Drawing Sheets
Drawing\Sheets_Configuring SHEETS.DRW
Task 1: Add and reorder sheets on the drawing.
2. Add a drawing sheet with a format.
• Click New Sheet from the Document
group.
• When prompted, type J.Smith for the
your_name parameter and press ENTER.
• Notice the table in the drawing format has
transferred the current model name into the
model table cell.
Note: To transfer the correct model information into drawing format tables, you must configure the
current model before adding drawing sheets with formats. Model information is only transferred into
format tables when the format sheet is added to the drawing.
3. Reorder the drawing sheet.
• Click Move or Copy Sheets from the
Document group.
• Click OK to insert the sheet at the beginning.
Note: When moving or copying drawing sheets, you can select the Create a copy check box to copy a
sheet.
4. Rename a drawing sheet.
• In the sheets tab at the bottom of the graphics
window, cursor over Sheet 2.
• Right-click and select Rename, as shown.
• Type Sheet A for the name and press ENTER.
• Notice the sheet name has updated in the
sheets tab, as shown.
5. Delete a drawing sheet.

• In the Sheets tab, select Sheet A.
• Right-click and select Delete.
• When prompted, click Yes to delete the sheet.
• Notice the sheet is no longer displayed and the current sheet is now sheet 1.

Adding General Views
General views are the first view you can place in a drawing. You can then derive other views from
general views.
• Specify view location
• Specify view name.
• Determine view orientation:
– Named Model Views
– Geometry References
– Specify Rotation Angle
Figure 1 – View Orientation
Figure 2 – Named Model View Figure 3 – Isometric View

Adding General Views
When placing a general view, you can specify a number of items including the location of the view and
the view name. You can also determine the view orientation. You can do this using the following options:
• Named model views — You can select a named view from the model. You can also specify whether
the default orientation is trimetric, isometric, or user-defined.
• Geometry references — You can specify two orthogonal references to determine the view orientation.
• Rotation angle — You can specify an angle to rotate the view. You can also vary the rotation reference.
PROCEDURE - Adding General Views

Drawing_Views\General_Adding GEN_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create a general view of PISTON.PRT in the drawing.
2. Initiate the first general view.
group.
• Click OK to accept No Combined State.
• Select a location in the center of the drawing.
• Note a view of PISTON.PRT is placed on the
drawing, as shown. The active model for this
drawing is PISTON.PRT.

Note: All views added to this drawing appear in the No Hidden display style regardless of the current
display style environment setting. The drawing setup option, model_display_for_new_views, has been
edited to no_hidden for this particular drawing.
3. Configure the view orientation using a named
model view.
• In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT
from the Model view names list.
• Click Apply, then click Repaint from the
In Graphics toolbar to update the view, as
shown.
4. Configure the view orientation using geometry
references.
• In the Drawing View dialog box, select the
Geometry references option.
• Click Repaint to update the view. Notice
datum planes are temporarily displayed.
• In the Model Tree, select datum plane FRONT
for Reference 1, then select datum plane
RIGHT for Reference 2.
5. Configure the view orientation using angles.
• In the Drawing View dialog box, select the
Angles option.
• Type 45 in the Angle value field.
• Click Apply.
• Click OK to complete placing the view.
• Click in the background to de-select
highlighted items. Notice the view updates,
as shown.
6. Create a second general view.
• Select a location in the center of the drawing.
• Note the default orientation is set to Trimetric .
• Select Isometric from the Default orientation
drop-down list.
• Note the view orientation updates, as shown.
• Type ISOMETRIC in the View name field.
• Click OK to complete placing the view.

Adding Projection Views
A projection view is an orthographic projection of another view’s geometry along a horizontal
or vertical direction.
Figure 1 – Views Projected from Front View
Adding Projection Views

Projection views are placed above, below, or to the right or left of the parent view. The views are always
horizontally or vertically aligned with the parent view, and are placed along projection channels. The
type of projection can be third angle or first angle. This is controlled by the drawing setup file option
projection_type. The default value is third_angle.
PROCEDURE - Adding Projection Views

Drawing_Views\Projection_Adding PROJ_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create projection views on the drawing.
Note: All views added to this drawing appear in the No Hidden display style regardless of the current
display style environment setting because the drawing setup option model_display_for_new_views has
been edited to no_hidden for this particular drawing.

2. Create a right projection view.
• Click Projection View from the Model
Views group.
view, as shown.
• Notice a projected view is placed on the
drawing. The view is displayed using third
angle projection.
• With the projected view still selected,
right-click and select Properties from the
mini toolbar.
• Type RIGHT_VIEW in the View name field.
• Notice that the view type is configured as
Projection, and the parent view is the general
view. Click OK.
3. Create a left projection view.
• Click in the background to ensure no views
are selected.
• Click Projection View from the Model
Views group.
• When prompted, select the general view as
the parent view.
• Select a location to the left of the general
view, as shown.
• Notice a projected view is placed on the
drawing.
Note: If a drawing has multiple views, and no views are selected then you are prompted to select a
parent view when creating projection views.
4. Create a top projection view.
Ensure the view is highlighted.
shown.
• Notice you are not prompted to select a
parent view if an existing view is already
selected.

5. Change to first angle projection.
• Click File > Prepare > Drawing Properties .
• In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click
change in the Detail Options row.
• In the Options dialog box, select the
projection_type option.
• Edit the value to first_angle. Click
Add/Change.
• Click Apply, then click Close.
• Click Close in the Drawing Properties dialog
box.
6. Create a first angle projection view.
• Select the top projected view on the drawing.
• Select a location to the right of the top view,
as shown.
• Notice a projected view is created using first
angle projection.
• If necessary, right-click and select Lock View
Movement to enable view movement.
• With the new projected view still selected,
drag the view to the left and right. Notice
projected views can only be moved along
projection lines relative to the parent view.

Editing Drawing Views
You can perform many operations on a view, either during or after creation.
Perform view operations:
• Edit View Properties
– View Display
¨ Display Style/Tangent Edges
– View Scale
– View Origin
– Aligning Views
• Move Views
– Switch views to another sheet
– Delete Views
Figure 1 – Scaled Views
Figure 2 – View Display Options Figure 3 – Tangent Edge Display

View Operations
When a view is placed on a drawing, you can change how the view appears, as well as its position and
scale. These operations include editing view properties and moving views.
Editing View Properties
A number of default properties are assigned to a view, for example the display style and the scale of
the view. You can edit these properties either during or after creating the view. You can edit many view
properties, but once the view type and orientation have been determined, you need to configure a
number of key properties, including:
• View Display – There are many view display options depending on the type of view being configured.
The two most important options are:
– Display Style – This determines how model geometry is displayed in views. You can specify
wireframe, hidden, no hidden, or shaded. Alternatively, you can select the Follow Environment
option. This configures views using the current environment setting in Creo Parametric. Note
when placing drawing views, the initial display of views is controlled by the drawing setup option
model_display_for_new_views.
– Tangent Edges Display Style – This determines the display of tangent edges in model views. You
can specify none, solid, dimmed, centerline, or phantom. Alternatively, you can select the default
option. This configures views using the current environment setting in Creo Parametric.
• View Scale – New views in drawings, by default, take the current value of the drawing sheet scale.
However, you can configure a custom scale for a view if required. You can use the following types
of scales in drawings:
– Default scale for sheet – Scales the drawing views according to a default value. If you do not set
a default value, Creo Parametric determines a default scale for each sheet based on the sheet
size and the model dimensions. The scale applies to all views that do not have a custom scale or
perspective applied. The drawing sheet scale appears at the bottom of the drawing sheet.
– Custom scale – Scales the view using a custom value typed in the Drawing View dialog box.
When you modify the drawing sheet scale, custom views do not change, since their scale factor
is independent.
– Perspective – Configures a perspective view based on eye-point distance from the model and
view size. This scale option is only available for general views.
Other view properties that you can specify when configuring a view include:
• The View Origin – By default, the origin of a drawing view is in the center of its outline. You can reset
the origin of a drawing view by parametrically referencing model geometry or defining a location on
the drawing sheet. Designating an origin identifies the view location on the drawing and prevents it
from shifting whenever the model geometry changes.
• Aligning Views – Depending on the type of view, you can position a drawing view on the sheet by
aligning the view with another view.
Move Views
By default, when views are placed on a drawing they are locked in place to prevent them from
accidentally being moved. You can unlock views for movement by selecting a view then right-click
to select Lock View Movement. Alternatively, you can clear the Lock View Movement check box in
the Environment dialog box. Note, the ability to lock and unlock views for moving is a global setting
rather than an individual drawing view setting.
You can move drawing views according to their relationship with other views. For example, a projection
view can only move along its projection channels, whereas a general view can be moved anywhere on
a drawing, however any related views also can be moved with a general view.
A number of other operations can be performed on views, including:
• Switching views to another drawing sheet. Note that the view is located in the same position on
the new sheet.
• Deleting views – If you select a view with child views, the related views are also deleted. For
example, deleting a general view also deletes any related projection views.
PROCEDURE - Editing Drawing Views

Drawing_Views\Editing EDITING_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Edit view display properties.
2. If necessary, click Shading from the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Edit the display style of a view.
• Select the general view of the bolt on the left
side of the drawing.
• Notice the view is displayed in wireframe.
• With the view still selected, right-click and
select Properties from the mini toolbar.
• Select the View Display category.
• Edit the Display style to Follow Environment.
Click Apply.
• Notice the view display changes to shaded.
• Click Hidden Line from the In Graphics
toolbar.
• Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
4. Continue editing the display style of the view.
• Edit the Display style to No Hidden. Click
Apply.
• Notice the view display changes so hidden
lines are not displayed.
5. Edit the tangent edge display.

• Zoom in to the top of the selected bolt view.
• Edit the Tangent edges display style to
Phantom. Click Apply.
Task 2: Edit view scale properties.
1. If necessary, click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.

2. Edit the scale of the selected view.
• Select the Scale category.
• Type 0.5 for the Custom scale.
• Click OK.
• Notice the view scale updates.
3. Edit the drawing scale.

• Double-click the Scale value.
• Type 2 as the new scale value and press
ENTER.
Note: Notice the scaled view does not update because it is controlled by its own specific view scale value.

Task 3: Move views on a drawing.
1. Select the Sheet 2 tab below the graphics window.
2. Select the top view and move it upwards.
Movement to enable view movement.
• Notice this projected view can only move
along its projection channel.
• Select the front view and move it to a new
location.
• Notice the two projected views move and
maintain alignment with the front view.
Editing Visible View Area

You can edit a view so that only portions of the view are visible.
Figure 1 – Full View and Half View Figure 2 – Partial View
Figure 3 – Broken View Figure 4 – Full View and Z-Clipped View
Editing Visible View Area

If you want to view only certain portions of a drawing view, you can configure the visible area of a view
to determine which portions to show or hide. This is useful if the design model is an awkward shape
and standard views take up too much space on a drawing. There are a number of different view
area options available, including the following:
• Half View — Removes a portion of the model from the view on either side of a selected cutting plane.
• Partial View — Displays a portion of the model in a view within a closed boundary. Model geometry
outside the closed boundary is not displayed.

• Broken View — Removes a portion of the model from between two or more selected points, and
closes the remaining two portions together within a specified distance. You can break horizontally,
vertically, or both, and use various graphic border styles for the breaks.
• Z-direction clipping — You can specify a plane parallel to the screen and exclude all graphics behind
it. All geometry behind the defined Z-Clipping does not appear, but any geometry that the plane
contains entirely does appear.
PROCEDURE - Editing Visible View Area

Drawing_Views\View_Area VIEW_AREA.DRW
Task 1: Edit view area properties on different drawing views.
2. Configure a half view.
• Select the left view of the connecting rod.
• Select the Visible Area category.
• Select Half View from the View visibility
drop-down list.
• In the model tree, select datum plane RIGHT
as the half view reference plane.
• Notice you can change the side to keep if
required.
• Select Symmetry line from the Symmetry line
standard drop-down list.
• Click OK.
3. Configure a partial view.

• Select the middle view of the connecting rod.
• Select Partial View from the View visibility
drop-down list.
• Select a reference point on the model
geometry, as shown.
• Sketch a spline to create a boundary around
the reference point.
• Middle-click to complete sketching the spline.
• Click OK.

4. Configure a broken view.
• Select the right view of the connecting rod.
• Select Broken View from the View visibility drop-down list.
• Click Add Break .
5. Create the first break line.
• Select a location on the model for the first
break line, as shown.
• Drag to the right and then click to create the
first horizontal break line.
6. Create the second break line.

• Select a location on the model for the second
break line, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Notice the view updates.
Note: You can move the two portions of the broken view closer together or further apart if required.

Exercise 1: Creating Gearbox Views
Objectives
• Configure different general and projection views to develop the Gearbox drawing.
Scenario
You have been assigned the task of creating general and projection views of the gearbox.
Drawing_Views\Gearbox_Views GEARBOX.DRW
Task 1: Add a general view.
1. Place the first general view.
• Disable all Datum Display types.
group.
• Select a location in the center of the drawing,
as shown.
2. Configure the view orientation.
• Select the saved view name BACK from the
Model view names list.
• Click Apply.
3. Configure the view display.
• Click OK.
Note: Regardless of the current display setting in the environment, the initial display of drawing views is
controlled by the drawing setup option model_display_for_new_views. You can change this if required.
Task 2: Add projection views.
1. Edit the drawing setup file.
• In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click change in the Detail Options row.
• Select the model_display_for_new_views option.
• Edit the value to no_hidden. Click Add/Change.
• Click OK.
• Click Close.
2. Add the left projection view.
• Select a location to the left of the general
view, as shown.
• Notice how the view display for the new view
is now set to no_hidden by default.

3. Add the right projection view.
view, as shown.
4. Add the top projection view.
shown.
5. Move the projection views.

Movement to enable views to be moved.
• Select each projection view individually, and
move to a new location, as shown.
• Notice each projection move can only move
along its projected direction.

Task 3: Add a scaled view and a partial view.
1. Place a general view.
are selected.
• Select No Combined State and click OK.
• Select a location above the right projection
view, as shown.
2. Configure the view scale.
• Type 0.75 in the Custom scale field.
• Click OK.
3. Place another general view.

are selected.
• Select a location to the right of the scaled
view, as shown.
4. Configure the view orientation and the view
scale.
• Select the saved view name 3D_BACK from
the Model view names list.
• Click Apply.
• Type 1.5 in the Custom scale field.
• Click Apply.

5. Configure a partial view.
• Select Partial View from the View visibility
drop-down list.
• Select a reference point on the model
geometry, as shown.
• Sketch a spline to create a boundary around
the reference point.
• Middle-click to complete sketching the spline.
• Click OK.
6. Save the drawing and erase current objects from memory.

• Click OK to erase current objects from memory.
Adding Detailed Views

A detailed view is a small portion of a drawing view shown enlarged in another view.
Figure 1 – Example Detailed Views

Adding Detailed Views
A detailed view is an enlarged view of any existing model view. When you create a detailed view, a
reference note and border are added to the parent view. After a detailed view has been placed on a
drawing you can edit its properties, this includes editing the view scale, and editing the parent view
border outline. You can configure the following parent view border outlines:
• Circle — Displays a circular border in the parent view.
• Ellipse — Displays an elliptical border that closely follows the shape of the sketched outline in
the parent view.
• H/V ellipse — Displays an ellipse with a horizontal or vertical major axis. This is dependent on the
shape of the sketched border outline.
• Spline — Displays the sketched spline border outline in the parent view.
• ASME 94 Circ — Displays an ASME standard compliant circle in the parent view.
PROCEDURE - Adding Detailed Views

Drawing_Views\Detailed_Adding DETAIL_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create a detailed view of the piston.
2. Configure a detailed view.
• Click Detailed View from the Model Views
group.
• Zoom into the front view on the drawing.
• Select an edge on the model, as shown, to
specify the center of the detailed view.
• Select points to sketch a spline boundary, as
shown. Middle-click when finished.
3. Place the detailed view.

• Select a location above the parent view, as
shown.
• Notice a scaled detailed view is created.

4. Edit the detailed view scale, and reference note.
• With the detailed view selected, right-click
and select Properties from the mini toolbar.
• Edit the View name to B.
• Edit the Custom scale value to 5.0.
• Click OK in the Drawing View dialog box.
• Click in the background to de-select the view.
• Notice the reference note has updated on the
detailed view and the parent view.
5. Edit the parent view border outline.
• Select the detailed view.
• Edit the Boundary type on the parent view.
– Select Ellipse from the Boundary type on
parent view drop-down list.
– Click Apply.
– Notice the parent view border updates.
• Edit the Boundary type on the parent view
again.
– Select ASME 94 Circle from the Boundary
type on parent view drop-down list.
– Click Apply, and then click Cancel.
– Notice the parent view border updates
again.

Adding Auxiliary Views
An auxiliary view is a type of projection view that projects at right angles to a selected surface or
along a selected axis.
Figure 1 – Example Auxiliary View
Adding Auxiliary Views

When you create an auxiliary view, the direction of the selected reference in the parent view
determines the direction of the projection for the auxiliary view. If the reference on the parent view is an
edge, a surface, or a datum plane, then the projection is at right angles to the selected reference. If the
reference on the parent view is a datum axis then the projection is along the direction of the datum axis.
PROCEDURE - Adding Auxiliary Views

Drawing_Views\Auxiliary_Adding AUXILIARY_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create an auxiliary view of the CYLINDER.PRT.
2. Place an auxiliary view.
• Click Auxiliary View from the Model Views
group.
• Select the highlighted edge, as shown in the
general view, as the reference.
• Select a location above and to the right of the
general view.
Note: You can also use the datum axis shown on the general view as the auxiliary view reference.

3. Configure the auxiliary view.
• With the auxiliary view still selected,
mini toolbar.
• Type AUXILIARY in the View name text box.
• Notice that the view type is configured
to Auxiliary, and the parent view is the
GENERAL_VIEW.
• Select the Single Projection Arrows option.
• Click Apply from the Drawing View dialog box.
• Select the Double Projection Arrows option.
Understanding Cross-Section Concepts and View Types

Cross-sections are imaginary cuts through parts and assemblies. You can display and configure
many different types of cross-section views in drawings.
Figure 1 – 2-D and 3-D Section Views Figure 2 – Total and Area Section Views
Figure 3 – Half and Local Section Views Figure 4 – Total Unfolded Section
Cross-Section Views
There are two main types of cross-section views that you can display in drawings:

• 2-D Cross-section views — You can display these cross-sections in two dimensional views. They can
either be planar cross-sections where the cross-section cutting line follows a datum plane or planar
surface, or they can be offset cross-sections where you sketch a cutting line through the solid model.
• 3-D cross-section views — You can display these cross-sections in two- dimensional and
three-dimensional views. You can create them as 3-D cross-sections within parts or assemblies, and
you can control the display of their cross-hatching within drawing views.
2-D Cross-Section View Types
You can configure many types of 2-D cross-section views, including:
• Total or area sections:
– A total section shows not only the cross-sectioned area, but the edges of the model that become
visible when you create a cross-section.
– An area cross-section displays only the cross-section without any other model geometry.
• Full, half or local sections:
– A full cross-section displays the cross-section across the whole view.
– A half cross-section shows a cross-section of the model on one side of a selected plane, but
not on the other side.
– A local cross-section uses a breakout to see through an outer surface to a portion of an inner
cross-section.
– A full and local cross-section shows a full cross-sectional view with local cross-sections applied
within it.
• Revolved cross-section:
– A revolved view is a cross-section of an existing view, revolved 90 degrees around a cutting plane
projection. You can use a cross-section created in the model as the cutting plane, or you can
create one when placing the view. The revolved view differs from a cross-section view in that it
includes a line noting the axis of revolution for the view.
• Aligned or unfolded sections:
– An aligned cross-section displays an area cross-sectional view that is unfolded around an axis,
whereas a total aligned cross-section shows an aligned cross-section of a general, projection,
auxiliary, or full view.
– An unfolded cross-section shows a flattened area cross-section of a general view, whereas a total
unfolded cross-section shows a total unfolded cross-section of a general view.

Adding 2-D Cross-Section Views
You can configure 2-D cross-section views when placing a view in a drawing.
Figure 1 – Cross-Section Views Use

3-D Model Sections Figure 2 – Assembly Cross-Section View
Figure 3 – Planar Cross-Section View Figure 4 – Offset Cross-Section View
Adding 2-D Cross-Section Views

• It is important to understand that 2-D cross-sections are configured and stored within 3-D solid
models such as parts and assemblies.
• You can select and display existing cross-sections when configuring a cross-section view in a drawing.
Alternatively, you can create a cross-section during the configuration of a cross-section view.
However, cross-sections can only be displayed if they are parallel to the screen in the selected view.
• In both cases the cross-section can be displayed in a drawing view, but the cross-section information
is stored with the part or assembly.
• There are two types of 2-D cross-section that can be used in drawing views:
– You can use planar cross-sections where the cross-section cutting line follows a datum plane or
planar surface.
– Alternatively, you can use offset cross-sections where you sketch a cutting line through the
solid model.
• In both cases you can specify many different cross-section view types. For example, you can specify
total or area sections, and you can specify full, half, or local sections.
• When configuring 2-D cross-section views you can add section arrows to any view that is
perpendicular to the 2-D cross-section view. The direction of the arrows indicates which side of the
model material is kept along the section cutting line. You can change the direction of the arrows
using the flip material direction option if required.

PROCEDURE - Adding 2-D Cross-Section Views
Drawing_Views\Section_Adding SECTION_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create a planar cross-section view of CYLINDER.PRT.
2. Create a projection view.
• Select the cylinder model general view on the
drawing. Ensure the view is highlighted.
• Select a location below the general view, as
shown.
3. Configure a cross-section view from the

projection view.
• With the projection view still selected,
mini toolbar.
• Select the Sections category from the
Drawing View dialog box.
• Select the 2D cross-section option.
• Click Add Section .
• From the menu manager, click Done to
configure a planar section.
• Type A for the name of the cross-section and
press ENTER.
• Select datum plane FRONT from the model
tree.
Note: It is not essential to configure cross-section views from projection views. You can also configure
them from other view types including general views. However, the cross-section must be parallel to
the screen when placed in the view.
4. Add section arrows to the general view.
• With the section view still selected, right-click
and select Add Arrows.
• Select the CYLINDER.PRT general view.
• Notice section arrows are added to the
general view, as shown.

Task 2: Create an offset cross-section view of FIXING_BLOCK.PRT.
1. Set the FIXING_BLOCK.PRT as the current active model in the drawing.
• In the ribbon, select the Layout tab, if necessary.
• Click Drawing Models in the Model Views group.
• Click Set Model in the menu manager.
• Select FIXING_BLOCK to activate the model.
2. Configure a cross-section view.
• Select the existing front projection view for
FIXING_BLOCK.PRT.
• Select the Sections category.
• Select section A from the Name list of
cross-sections.
• Scroll to the right in the Section Options area.
• Click the box below Arrow Display to activate
it.
• When prompted, select the top general view
of FIXING_BLOCK.PRT.
• Click Apply to add arrows to this view, as
shown.
Note: Note, you can click Flip Material Side
to change the direction of the arrows if required.
Click Apply to see the changes.
3. Click OK in the Drawing View dialog box.

Modifying Cross Hatching Display
You can modify how cross hatching appears in cross-section views.
Modify cross hatching styles, including:

• Spacing
• Angle
Retrieve cross hatching patterns:
Use smart cross hatching.
Figure 1 – Editing Cross Hatching Patterns
Figure 2 – Smart Cross Hatching Figure 3 – Use Cross Hatching Patterns
Cross Hatching Theory

Cross-sectioned components are represented by different cross hatching styles. You can modify
the cross hatching styles displayed in part and assembly cross-sections views by editing a number
of attributes for cross hatch patterns, including:
• Spacing — You can half or double the cross hatching line spacing.
• Angle — You can edit the angle by selecting a predefined angle or by specifying a different angle.
You can also create and save new cross hatch patterns for future use. You can also retrieve standard
cross hatching patterns for materials such as steel, aluminium, and copper.
Smart Cross Hatching
When you create an assembly cross-section, Creo Parametric automatically applies a "smart" cross
hatch pattern on sectioned parts that provides a superior visual representation of the cross-section.
• Smart cross hatch applies cross hatch spacing appropriate to the model size and assigns different
angles to different parts in the assembly.
• Smart cross hatch uses a randomized slant angle between adjacent components, making it easier to
distinguish different parts in assembly drawings and also reducing the amount of time required to
clean up drawings with cross-sections and crosshatch.
• Smart cross hatch affects newly created cross-sectional views only. When you retrieve previously
saved drawings, smart cross hatch is not applied.
• For assembly cross-sections, smart cross hatch applies to both spacing and angle. For part
cross-sections, smart cross hatch applies to spacing only. By default, the angle is 45 degrees for parts.

PROCEDURE - Modifying Cross Hatching Display
Drawing_Views\Hatching_Display HATCHING .DRW
Task 1: Modify the cross hatching on a part section view.
2. Select the cross hatching on section A-A, as
shown.
3. Right-click and select Properties .
• Click Spacing > Half.
• Click Angle > 45, and notice the cross hatching
updates.
4. Save the modified cross hatching.
• Click Save.
• Type Custom_45 for the name of the cross
hatch style, and press ENTER.
• Click Done.
Task 2: Modify the cross hatching on an assembly section view.
1. Select the cross hatching on section B-B, as
shown.
• Note the cross hatching patterns have been
configured automatically using smart cross
hatching.
• Notice the cross hatching for one component
in the assembly is highlighted.
• Click Angle > 60. Notice the cross hatching
updates.

3. Edit the cross hatching on another assembly
component, and retrieve a standard cross
hatching style.
• Click Next.
• Notice the cross hatching for another
component in the assembly is highlighted.
• Click Retrieve.
• Select ISO_PATTERNS .PAT from the Open
dialog box, and click Open.
• Scroll and select ISO CAST IRON (DIN ISO
128-50 SM3), click OK.
• Notice the cross hatching updates.
4. Erase cross hatching on an assembly

component.
• Click Next > Next.
• Notice the cross hatching for another
component in the assembly is highlighted.
• Click Erase.
• Notice the cross hatching is now erased from
the selected component.
• Click Done.
Note: You can resume cross hatching on sectioned assembly components and part sections at any time.

Exercise 2: Creating Gearbox Cross-Section Views
Objectives
• Configure different cross-section views to develop the gearbox_front.prt drawing.
Scenario
You have been assigned the task to create cross-section views of the Gearbox.
Drawing_Views\Gearbox_Cross-Section GEARBOX.DRW
Task 1: Create cross-section views from existing projection views.
2. Re-configure an existing projection view.
• Select the right projection view, as shown.
• Select section A from the Name list of
cross-sections.

• With the section view still selected, right-click
• Select the general view.

4. Create a second cross-section view.
• Select the top projection view, as shown.
• Select section B from the Name list of
cross-sections.

• With the top section view still selected,
right-click and select Add Arrows.
6. Move the section B-B view name note.

• Select the section B-B view note.
• Relocate the view note below the section
view, as shown.
Task 2: Create an auxiliary cross-section view.

1. Place an auxiliary view.
are selected.
• Click Auxiliary View from the Model Views
group.
• From the model tree, select datum plane
DTM8 as the front surface in the general view
to determine the view orientation.
• Select a location above and to the right of the

2. Configure a cross-section view.
• With the auxiliary view still selected,
mini toolbar.
• Select section C from the Name list of
cross-sections.
• Click OK from the Drawing View dialog box.
3. Move the section C-C view name note for the
auxiliary cross-section.
• Select the section C-C view note, as shown.
• Relocate the view note below the auxiliary
section view.

• Select the auxiliary section view. Right-click
Task 3: Create a sectioned detailed view.

1. Configure a detailed view.
are selected.
• Click Detailed View from the Model Views
group.
• Zoom in to view section A-A.
• Select an edge on the model, as shown, to
specify the center of the detailed view.
• Select points to sketch a spline boundary, as
shown. Middle-click when finished.

2. Place the detailed view.
• Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
• Select a location to the left of section B-B, as
shown.
• Notice a note is added to the parent view.
Note: You can edit the detailed view scale. You can also edit the reference note associated with the
detailed view.
Task 4: Modify the cross-hatching on section A-A.
1. Click in the background to de-select any
highlighted items.
2. Select the cross-hatching on section A-A, as
shown.
• Click Angle > 135. Notice the cross-hatching
update.
• Click Done.

Task 5: Add a 3D section view.
1. Place a general view.
highlighted items.
• Select a location to the right of section A-A,
as shown.
2. Configure the view orientation.
• Select the saved view name, 3D_SECTION,
from the Model View Names list.
• Click Apply.
3. Configure the 3D section view.
• Notice 3D_XSEC is the only 3D cross-section
available.
• Ensure the Show X-Hatching check box is
selected.
• Click OK.

Adding Assembly Exploded Views
You can use drawing view states to create exploded assembly views.
Drawing view state options enable you to configure different views:

• Explode View
• Simplified Representation
• Combined State
Figure 1 – Explode Offset Lines Figure 2 – Exploded View
Adding Assembly Exploded Views

You can configure exploded assembly views in drawings by specifying different view states in drawing
views. Drawing view states enable you to specify a number of items including:
• Explode view — Enables you to specify if components in an assembly view are exploded. You can
configure exploded views by selecting a previously created explode state stored in the 3D assembly
model. Assembly explode states enable you to configure components in different exploded
positions. You can also add exploded offset lines that can be displayed in the drawing. In addition,
you can further customize the position of components in the exploded view if required. This does not
affect any explode states stored in the assembly model. However, changes to explode states in the
assembly model are reflected in associated exploded drawing views.
• Simplified representation — You can select a pre-configured simplified representation for display
in the drawing view.
• Combined state — You can select a pre-configured combination state. This can include a simplified
representation, named orientation, and explode state. Note however, in drawing views any style
representations included in combined states are ignored.

PROCEDURE - Adding Assembly Exploded Views
Drawing_Views\Exploded_Adding EXP_VIEWS.DRW
Task 1: Create an assembly exploded view.
2. Place a general view of the engine assembly on
the drawing.
• Ensure No Combined State is selected in the
Select Combined State dialog box. Click OK.
• Select a view location on the left side of the
drawing.
• Select EXPLODED from the Model view
names list.
• Edit the Default orientation to Trimetric . Click
Apply.
• Edit the Display style to Shading. Click Apply.
3. Configure an exploded view.
• Select the Explode components in view check box.
• Select ENGINE from the Assembly explode state drop-down list.
• Click Apply.
• Click Cancel.
• Click the background to de-select any views.
Note: Many of the options in the Drawing View dialog box can be pre-configured using View States.

4. Create a second exploded view using view states.
• Select FIXED_COMPS in the Select Combined State dialog box. Click OK.
• Select a view location on the right side of the drawing.
• Notice the named view FIXED is already selected.
• Edit the Display style to Shading. Click Apply.
• Notice that the Combined state has been configured as FIXED_COMPS. This also configures the
Explode View and Simplified Representation options. You can edit these selections if required.
5. Edit the position of an exploded component.

• In the Drawing View dialog box, click the
Customize Explode State button.
• Edit the Motion Reference to Plane Normal.
• Select the flat surface on ENG_BLOCK_
FRONT.PRT, as shown. Then select
ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT to begin dragging.
• Drag the component to the right, as shown.
Select a new position.
• Click OK > Done/Return.
• Notice the Assembly explode state has
changed to Custom.
• Click Cancel in the Drawing View dialog box.

Replacing View Models
You can replace view models in a drawing with a different related view model.
• Select a drawing view.
• Replace the model with one of the following
related models:
– Family Table
– Simplified Representation
– Reference Model
• All Dependent views are automatically included.
• Annotations and view settings are preserved.
• Option to delete the original model.
Figure 1 – Replace Dialog Box
Figure 2 – View Before Model Replacement Figure 3 – View After Model Replacement
Replacing View Models
You can replace view models in a drawing with a different related view model. When you replace the
model, all of its related views update as well.
In the Replace dialog box you have three options: Family Table, Simplified Representation, and
Reference Model. These options enable you to easily replace any model. Click Open , select the new
model or simplified representation, and click OK to update the selected view and all related views.
• Family Table – If the replacement models are a family table instance of the original model, the
generic or instances can be replaced with each other.
• Simplified Representation – If the replacement models are representations created using simplified
representation methodology, the created components can be replaced with each other.
• Reference Model – If the models intended to be replaced contain Merger/Inheritance or a Shrinkwrap
of the current model, the model replacement is easily done using this option. This process is valid for
the models containing Merger/Inheritance or Shrinkwrap with the No Dependency option selected.
When the view is placed using geometry references, replacing the Model with an instance is only
possible if the references used to place the views are retained in the replacing instance, representation,
Merger/Inheritance feature, or Shrinkwrap. If the referencing geometry is lost or suppressed, the
process may simply yield the following message: “No changes were made to selected view(s).”
The same rule applies to the sub-assembly.
When the drawing model is replaced, the annotations are preserved. This includes both annotations
created in the drawing as well as annotations shown from the model. But the visibility of shown
annotations for lost features are suppressed and reappear on the original model, whereas the created
annotations need to be manually deleted and re-created. However, you may lose all shown dimensions
replacing models using the Reference Model option.
The view settings are also preserved in the replaced view model, including:
• Scale
• Orientation
• Display options
• Visible area settings (for example, partial views)
There is also an option to replace callouts and repeat regions. For example, if a repeat region points to
an original assembly that is replaced, the repeat region points to the new view model.
Best Practices
Replacing the unrelated components is not encouraged as you may lose all the dimensional references.
PROCEDURE - Replacing View Models

Drawing_Views\Model_Replacing GEARBOX_REAR.DRW
Task 1: Replace models using family table and simplified representation options.
2. Select the front view and click Replace View
Model from the Model Views group.
3. In the Replace dialog box, ensure Family Table
is selected as the Replace By option, and click
Open .
4. Select GEARBOX_REAR_W_O_HANDLES from
the Family Tree dialog box and click OK.
5. Click OK from the Replace dialog box.
6. Notice the model is replaced by its instance and
the shown dimensions disappear along with the
features.
7. Notice that the dependent views are also
replaced.
8. If necessary, select the front view again, right-click and select Replace View Model .
9. In the Replace dialog box, select Simplified Representation as the Replace By option and click
Open .
10. In the Simplified Representations dialog box select HOLES_FILLED and click OK.

12. Notice the four holes disappear, as these holes
are excluded in the HOLES_FILLED simplified
representation.
13. Also notice the shown dimensions disappear,
whereas the created dimensions remain.
14. Select the created 30.19 and 27.25 dimensions,
right-click, and select Delete .
Task 2: Replace models using Reference Model options.
1. Select the front view, select Properties from the mini toolbar.
2. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View States category.
• Notice the Simplified representation option is set to HOLES_FILLED and is grayed out.
• Click OK.
3. With the view still selected, right-click, and
select Replace View Model .
4. In the Replace dialog box, select Simplified
Representation as the Replace By option, and
click Open .
5. In the Simplified Representations dialog box
select Master Rep and click OK.
7. Notice the shown dimensions re-appear.
8. If necessary, select the front view, right-click,

and select Replace View Model .
9. In the Replace dialog box, click Clear.
10. Notice the references are cleared.
11. In the drawing, select the top view.
12. Select Reference Model as the Replace By
option and click Open .
13. Select STATOR .PRT and click Open.
14. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Note: The STATOR .PRT model was created using a
merge of the GEARBOX_REAR.PRT.

Module 40
Adding Model Details to Drawings

Understanding Annotations in Drawings
Model annotations such as 3-D model dimensions and model axes, can be shown on drawing views.
Model Annotations in Drawings:

• Model Annotations.
– Dimensions, model axes, geometric tolerances,
set datum planes.
• Show in drawing views.
– Associative with the model.
• Erase or delete annotations in a drawing.
– Erase — Temporarily remove from display.
– Delete — Remove from display. Not deleted
from model.
• Show model dimensions only once.
Figure 1 – Showing Model Annotations
– Move to different views.
– Create additional (driven) dimensions in the
drawing.
Understanding Annotations in Drawings

• When you create a 3-D model you create various dimensions and other references that describe
the size and shape of parts, and the position of components within assemblies. In addition, you can
create other items in the model including datum axes, geometric tolerances, and set datum planes.
These items are known as model annotations. You can show these 3-D model annotations from parts
and assemblies on model drawing views. This can be done at any time during the detailing process.
• These "shown" annotations are associative with the 3-D model. This means if you edit their values in
the model, they update in the drawing. For dimensions you can edit "shown" dimension values in the
drawing which will update the model.
• You can erase or delete model annotations that have been shown on a drawing.
– Erasing model annotations temporarily removes the items from display in the drawing.
– Deleting model annotations removes the items from display in the drawing. However, you should
understand that deleted model annotations still exist within the 3-D model. They are just not
displayed in the drawing. Furthermore, you cannot delete model annotations from drawings. The
only way to permanently remove model annotations from a model is to make changes directly
within a part or an assembly.
• When showing model dimensions in a drawing, you can only show a model dimension once. You can
however move a shown dimension from one view to another. If the shown model dimensions do
not provide you with the required dimension scheme on a drawing then you can either change the
dimension scheme in the model, or you can create additional (driven) dimensions on the drawing.
Best Practices
If you show model dimensions in a drawing it is recommended you only edit these model dimensions
from within their respective parts or assemblies. This enables you to fully understand the impact on the
design of editing model dimensions.

Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations
Dimensions and other detail items created in a 3-D model can be shown in drawings.
• Show various types, based on tab
• Context sensitive, based on selection
• Erase/Unerase
• Delete
Figure 1 – Showing Axes and Dimensions Figure 2 – Show Model Annotations Dialog Box
Showing Annotations
When you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various items useful for annotating the
model in a drawing, such as dimensions and axes.
When creating a 2-D drawing, you can select which information from the 3-D model to show in the
drawing:
• Dimensions
– Driving Dimension Annotation Elements
– All Driving Dimensions or Strong Driving Dimensions
– Driven Dimensions, Reference Dimensions, or Ordinate Dimensions
• Geometric Tolerances
• Notes
• Surface Finishes
• Symbols
• Datums
– Datum Feature Symbols
– Datum Targets
– Datum Axes
The Show Model Annotations dialog box is context-sensitive. You can control which annotations
display on the drawing and where they display based on how items are selected:
• Select a model from the model tree – Indicates all the selected item types for the model on the
drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.
• Select features from the model tree – Indicates the selected item types for the selected features on
the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.
• Select a drawing view – Indicates all the selected item types within a particular drawing view.
• Select features from a particular drawing view – Indicates the selected item types for the selected
features on the drawing, within the view in which the feature was selected. If an item is not
appropriate to that view, it does not display.
• Select a component in a particular drawing view (Assembly Drawings only) – Indicates the selected
item types for the selected component on the drawing, within the view in which the component was
selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it does not display.
All of the possible items that can be shown based on the selected tab and selected items display in the
drawing in a preview color. You can then select or de-select items to show by using the dialog box or
by selecting them from the drawing.
Note: When dimensions are shown, the system automatically arranges and spaces them apart. You can
then adjust them further manually or by using the Cleanup Dimensions dialog box.
Erasing and Deleting Annotations
If at any point during drawing creation you decide that you no longer wish to display certain shown
items, you can erase or delete them. The differences between these two options are as follows:
• Erase – Temporarily removes the items from the display. The items are shown grayed out in the
drawing tree.
– Erased items can be returned to the display by right-clicking and selecting Unerase.
• Delete – Removes the items from the drawing.
– Any item originating in the model is retained in the model and can be shown again.
– Any item created in the drawing, such as dimensions or notes, is deleted and must be recreated.
To erase/delete items, select them in the drawing:
• Right-click and select Erase or Delete .
• Select Erase or Delete from the mini toolbar.
You can select items to erase or delete using the following methods:
• Select an individual item.
• Press CTRL and select multiple items.
• Apply a selection filter to quickly select desired items.
• Select items from the drawing tree.
PROCEDURE - Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations

Drawing_Details\Show_Erase_Delete SHOW_ERASE.DRW
Task 1: Show dimensions using different methods.
3. Click Show Model Annotations from the
Annotations group.
• In the Show Model Annotations dialog box,
ensure the Dimensions Tab is selected.
4. Select HOLE 2 from the model tree.
• Notice the dimensions appear in different
views.

5. Select HOLE 2 from the top view.
• Notice the dimensions now only appear in this
view.
6. Click Select All and then click Apply in the
dialog box.
7. Select the front view.

Note: To select a view, click within the view boundary,
but not on the model geometry.
8. Click Select All .

• Click OK in the dialog box.
• Notice the dimensions from both views are
now shown.
selected items.
9. Select the Sheet 2 tab to view sheet 2.

10. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT from the model tree.
11. Click Show Model Annotations .
click Select All .
• Clear the d22 and d35 check boxes.
• Click OK.
selected items.

Task 2: Erase, unerase, and delete dimensions.
1. Press CTRL and select the 65 and 32.5
dimensions in the front view.
• Select Erase from the mini toolbar.
selected items.
2. Specify Dimension as the selection filter.

• Drag to select all dimensions in the top view.
• Right-click and select Erase .
selected items.
3. Expand the Front view Annotations node in the

drawing tree.
• Select d5, and select Unerase from the
mini toolbar.
• Select d25, and select Delete from the
mini toolbar.
• Select d2, and select Delete .
4. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT from the model tree.

• Notice the deleted dimensions may be shown
again.
select d25 to show it again.
• Click OK.
selected items.
Task 3: Show datum axes using different methods.

1. Select the Sheet 3 tab to view sheet 3.
• Select the Datums Tab .
3. Select the Front view.
select axes A_4, A_5, and A_6 .
• Click Apply.

4. Select the top view and click Select All .
• Click OK.
5. Click in the background to de-select all selected
items.
Inserting Driven Dimensions

You can add new dimensions to a drawing. These dimensions reflect model sizes and are therefore
driven by the model.
• Driven Dimensions:
– Reflect model sizes.
– Update to model changes.
• Types:
– Standard
– Common Reference
– Ordinate/Auto Ordinate
– Coordinate
• Clipped Dimensions
• Reference Dimensions
Figure 1 – Standard and Common

Reference Dimensions
Figure 2 – Clipped Dimensions Figure 3 – Reference Dimensions
Inserting Driven Dimensions

New dimensions can be created within a drawing. These inserted dimensions are often called added
or driven dimensions. Driven dimension values reflect model sizes, therefore they cannot be edited
directly. However, driven dimensions update in a drawing if the model is edited. Driven dimensions
are useful when you need to create a different dimensioning scheme in the drawing compared to the
model dimensioning scheme.

Types of Driven Dimensions
There are many different types of driven dimensions, including the following:
• Standard (New References) — You can create dimensions based upon one or two selected
references. Depending upon the references, the result can be an angular, linear, radius, or a diameter
dimension.
• Common References — You can create dimensions between a common base reference and one or
more other references.
• Ordinate — You can create ordinate dimensions that measure a linear distance from a reference
identified as a baseline.
• Auto Ordinate — You can automatically create ordinate dimensions on a selected surface of a part or
sheetmetal part.
• Coordinate — You can assign an existing X and Y dimension to a label and leader box.
Clipped Dimensions
• You can create automatically clipped linear dimensions that display twice the distance between
the selected entities. Clipped linear dimensions are useful for dimensioning revolved protrusions,
extrusions, and copy geometry.
• You can also automatically create one-sided, clipped angular dimensions that display twice the
angle between the selected entities.
Reference Dimensions
• Reference dimensions are the same as standard dimensions except that they have special notation
that indicates they are reference dimensions.
• You can use the parenthesize_ref_dim configuration option and edit the value to yes to enclose these
dimensions in parentheses. If this option is set to no, the text “REF” follows the dimension value.
PROCEDURE - Inserting Driven Dimensions

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Driven_Drw DRIVEN_DIMS.DRW
Task 1: Create driven dimensions.
2. Add a linear driven dimension.
group.
• Select the left edge of the model.
• Middle-click to place the dimension on the
drawing.
3. Add a diameter driven dimension.
• Select the edge of the hole feature.
• Right-click and select Diameter from the
drop-down list.
drawing.

4. Add driven dimensions with a common
reference.
• Select the left edge of the model.
• Press and hold CTRL, then select the other
two vertical edges on the model, as shown.
• Middle-click to place the dimensions with a
common reference.
• Click Cancel.
5. Add a reference dimension.

• Click Reference Dimension from the
Annotations group drop down.
• Select the vertical edge of the model, as
shown.
• Click Select Tangent from the Select
Reference dialog box.
• Press CTRL and select the arc edge on the
model, as shown.
drawing.
• Click Cancel.
6. Add a clipped angular dimension to the half

view.
• Click Dimension .
• Select the angled edge of the model in the
half view.
• Press CTRL and select the vertical center line
on the model.
• Right-click and select Double Value from the
drop-down list.
drawing.
• Notice a clipped angular dimension is created.

7. Add a clipped linear dimension to the half view.
• Select the vertical edge of the model.
• Press CTRL and select the vertical center line
on the model.
• Right-click and select Double Value from the
drop-down list.
drawing.
• In the ribbon, click Display from the Display
group and click Flip.
• Notice a clipped linear dimension is created.
• Click Cancel.
Inserting Ordinate Dimensions

You can create ordinate dimensions on drawings. They appear with a single witness line and
no leader.
Ordinate dimensions:
• Common baseline reference.
• Single witness line and no leader
Auto ordinate dimensions:
• Reference single surface.
Ordinate dimension setup options:
• Control dimension appearance.
Convert linear dimensions to ordinate:
• Model or created dimensions. Figure 1 – Ordinate Dimensions
Figure 2 – STD_JIS Standard Figure 3 – Auto Ordinate Selected Surface
Inserting Ordinate Dimensions Theory

You can create driven ordinate dimensions on a drawing. These dimensions are associated with a
common baseline reference. Each dimension appears with a single witness line and no leader. Ordinate
dimensions that share the same baseline must also share a common plane or edge.
You can also automatically create ordinate dimensions on one or more selected surfaces on a part or
sheetmetal part.
You can control how ordinate dimensions are displayed using the following combination of drawing
file setup options:
• ord_dim_standard – Defines the ordinate dimension standard. For example, std_jis places dimensions
along a connecting line that is perpendicular to the baseline and starts with an open circle.
• draw_arrow_style – Controls the style of the arrow and circle. This can be open, closed, or filled.
• draw_dot_diameter – Sets the diameter for the leader line dots (the circle on the baseline).
Converting Linear Dimensions to Ordinate Dimensions
You can convert shown linear model dimensions and created linear model dimensions to ordinate
dimensions. Note, if model dimensions are converted to ordinate dimensions in a drawing they
also appear as ordinate dimensions in the 3-D model. The conversion process involves selecting a
dimension and then selecting a witness line to be the baseline reference.
PROCEDURE - Inserting Ordinate Dimensions

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Ordinate ORDINATE.DRW
Task 1: Create ordinate dimensions.
2. Create ordinate dimensions on the left drawing
view.
• Zoom in to the left drawing view.
• Select the Annotate tab in the ribbon.
• Select Ordinate Dimension from the
Ordinate Dimension types drop-down menu.
• Select the left edge of the model to specify
the baseline.
• Press CTRL and select three vertical edges
and the vertical center line on the model, as
shown.
• Middle-click to place the dimensions on the
drawing.
• Click Cancel in the Select Reference dialog
box.

3. Create auto ordinate dimensions on the center
drawing view.
• Zoom in to the center drawing view.
• Select Auto Ordinate Dimension from the
Ordinate Dimension types drop-down menu.
• Select the surface on the model, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Select the lower horizontal edge of the model
to specify the baseline.
• Notice ordinate dimensions are automatically
placed on the drawing view.
4. Convert linear dimensions to ordinate

dimensions in the right drawing view.
• Zoom in to the right drawing view.
• Select the 70 linear dimension.
• Press CTRL, and select the 100, 160, and 190
dimensions.
• Right-click and select Toggle Ordinate/
Linear .
• Notice the selected dimensions now appear
as ordinate dimensions.

5. Change the ordinate dimension option in the
drawing setup file.
• Click File > Prepare > Drawing Properties .
• Type ord_dim_standard in the Option field.
• Edit the value to std_jis.
• Click Add/Change.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to close the Message window.
• Click Close.
• In the ribbon, select the Review tab.
• Click Update Sheets in the Update group.
• Notice the display of all ordinate dimensions
in the drawing has changed.

Using Radial Dimensions
Now, defining radial dimensions is faster, easier, more visual, and intuitive.
Benefits:
• Better default arrow states.
• Evaluated depending on cursor position.
• More visual and predictive arrow.
• Flexible flip control workflows.
Figure 1 – Position 1
Figure 2 – Position 2
Figure 3 – Position 3 Figure 4 – Position 4

Using Radial Dimensions
Typically, creating a radial dimension provides for up to four flip states that represent different witness
line and arrow configurations. In Creo Parametric, the definition of flip states is now improved to provide
better default states, depending on the position of the pointer. As a result, the desired solution is
provided faster and with fewer clicks. Visual feedback reduces the need to perform subsequent flip
operations to get to the desired state. When creating the radial dimension, move the pointer to different
locations to see an updated default arrow state. Middle-click to place the dimension.
You can flip to different arrow states using the methods described below:
• Click Flip on the Dimension tab.
• Click the dimension. Keeping the pointer on the dimension, click and then right-click to toggle
through the states.
• Click Flip Arrows from the mini toolbar.
Benefits of Using Radial Dimensions
The following are the benefits of using radial dimensions:
• Better default arrow states for radial dimensions.
• Evaluated depending on cursor position.
• More visual and predictive arrow states during creation of radial dimensions.
• Flexible flip control workflows for arrow states.
Adjusting Dimensions and Detail Items

After dimensions and detail items have been placed on drawings, you can clean them up using
various tools.
Adjusting detail items options:
• Cleanup Dimensions
• Snap Lines
• Manually Move Items
• Align Dimensions
• Change Dimension Scheme
Figure 1 – Aligned Dimensions
Figure 2 – Cleaned Up Dimensions with Snap Lines
Adjusting Dimensions and Detail Items

To meet industry drawing standards and enable easier reading of drawings, you need to be able to
change the position of detail items such as dimensions and axes. There are various ways to adjust
dimensions and detail items including the following.
• Cleanup Dimensions – The Cleanup Dimensions tool is used to reposition dimensions. You can
specify a distance from a view for dimensions, and specify a distance between dimensions. You can
also use the tool to center text between witness lines, and create breaks in witness lines where they
intersect each other.
• Snap Lines – These are dashed lines used to locate detail items at exact locations on drawings. You
can configure snap lines relative to view outlines, selected model edges, or datum planes. Note,
snap lines can be configured when using the cleanup dimensions tool.
• Manually Move Items — Using drag handles, you can manually change the position of dimensions
and detail items. When moving dimensions you can center them between witness lines. You can
also move dimensions from one view to another.
• Align Dimensions – You can align multiple dimensions together. You can also align linear and angular
dimensions at the same time. When you align mixed dimension types, all dimensions are aligned
with the first selected dimension.
• Change Dimension Scheme – In extreme cases, you can change the dimension scheme in the model.
However, this method should only be used if the design intent has changed. Any changes to the
dimension scheme are reflected in model drawings. If the model dimension scheme does not meet
your detailing requirements, you should consider adding driven dimensions to the drawing.
PROCEDURE - Adjusting Dimensions and Detail Items
Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Adjust ADJUST_DIMS.DRW
Task 1: Clean up dimensions on the drawing.
2. Move a dimension to another view.
• Select the 8.10 diameter dimension on the
front view, then click Move to View from
the mini toolbar.
• Select the top view.
• Notice the dimension has moved to the
selected view.
3. Cleanup dimensions in the front view.
• Click Cleanup Dimensions from the Edit
group.
• Drag a window to select all the dimensions in
the front view, as shown.
• Middle–click the mouse button.
• In the Clean Dimensions dialog box, type 30
in the Offset field.
• Type 15 in the Increment field.
• Ensure the Create snap lines check box is
selected.
• Click Apply and click Close.
• Notice the dimensions have been cleaned up
and snap lines have been created.
4. Move a dimension using drag handles.
• Select the 8.10 diameter dimension in the top
view.
shown.

5. Align two dimensions.
• Select the 5 linear dimension in the top view.
• Press CTRL and select the 4 linear dimension
in the top view.
• Right-click and select Align Dimensions .
• Notice the dimensions are now aligned.
6. Use drag handles to modify a hole axis center

line.
• Zoom in to the top view.
• Select the hole axis, as shown.
• Drag each vertical end of the axis center line
to a new position.
highlighted items.

Changing Dimension Display
You can customize the display of dimensions in drawings. You can do this globally or for selected
dimensions.
Global dimension display control:

• Drawing setup file options
• Configuration file options
Edit the display of selected dimensions:
• Flip arrow
• Configure witness line display
• Dimension text display
– Dimension Properties dialog box
Figure 1 – Flip Arrows
Figure 2 – Witness Line Breaks and Jogs
Changing Dimension Display

To meet your company drawing requirements you need to be able to edit the display of dimensions in
drawings. You can control the display of dimensions globally using two different configuration methods:
• Drawing setup file options – Using various drawing setup file options, you can control the display
of all dimensions in a drawing. You can configure these options to conform to either ANSI or ISO
standards. Drawing setup file options relate to all aspects of drawing configuration including:
– Dimension text size and font.
– Dimension orientation.
– Witness line configuration.
– Dimension arrow style.
– Number of decimal places displayed in dimensions.
– Display dimension on the drawing in two different units.
• Configuration file options – There are a number of options that relate to drawings and dimension
display including:
– Setting the displayed units for angular dimensions.
– Displaying reference dimensions with parentheses or appending reference dimensions with
REF text.
You can also control the display of dimensions by selecting and then editing the display of specific
dimensions. A number of options are available, including:
• Flip arrows – You can edit the arrow direction for diameter, radius, linear and angular dimensions.
Various options are available and are dependent on the text_orientation setting in the drawing
setup file.
• Configure witness line display – You can customize witness lines in many ways including adding
breaks, adding jogs, and editing the gap between the model and the witness line using drag handles.
• Configure arrow head style display – You can customize arrow head style; options include dot,
filled dot, double arrow, and slash.
• Editing dimension text display – The Dimension Properties dialog box enables you to format the
display of selected dimensions. From within the dialog box you can do the following:
– Configure the display of dimensions to decimal or fractional format and adjust the settings for
decimal places, trailing zeros, and angular dimension units.
– Modify the dimension values and configure tolerances.
– Edit the way the dimension is displayed (basic or inspection).
– Format the positioning and decimal places for dual dimensions.
– Show and erase dimension witness lines.
– Modify dimension text, including displaying symbolic values rather than dimensional values,
and adding prefixes and postfixes.
– Specify the dimension text style, including font type, height, line spacing, and color.
PROCEDURE - Changing Dimension Display

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Display PLATE.DRW
Task 1: Edit the display of various dimensions.
2. Edit the arrow direction on the diameter
dimension.
• Select the 10 dimension on the drawing, as
shown.
• Right-click and select Flip Arrows from the
mini toolbar.
• Notice the dimension arrows update.
• Right-click and select Flip Arrows again.
• Notice the dimension arrows update again.
• Click in the background to de-select the
dimension.
• Note, you can use the same method to
flip arrows on radius, linear, and angular
dimensions.

3. Dynamically drag a witness line end using drag
handles.
• Select the 40 horizontal dimension on the
drawing, as shown.
• Drag the top end of the left witness line to a
new location, as shown.
dimension.
4. Add a jog to a witness line.

• Click Jog from the Edit group.
• Select the 40 horizontal dimension on the
drawing.
• Select a location on the left witness line to
specify the jog point.
• Drag the jog point to a new location, as shown.
• Click to locate the new position for the jog
point.
• Middle-click to exit creating jogs.
5. Add a break to a witness line.
• Click Break from the Edit group.
• Select the right witness line on the 30
horizontal dimension, as shown.
• Select the vertical intersecting witness line
below the 10 dimension, as shown.
• Middle-click to exit adding break.
• Notice a break is created in the vertical
witness line.

6. Edit the dimension properties on the diameter
dimension.
• Select the 10 dimension on the drawing, as
shown.
• Notice the Dimension tab that automatically
displays in the ribbon once a dimension is
selected.
• Click Display from the Display group.
• Select ISO-above-extended from the Te xt
Orientation drop-down list.
dimension.
• Notice the dimension display updates, as
shown.

Exercise 1: Adding Dimensions to Drawings
Objectives
• Add dimensions to drawing views.
• Modify the location of dimensions.
• Edit the display of dimensions.
• Edit global dimension properties.
Scenario
You have been assigned to add details to the clutch shoe drawing. You must also maintain the
company drawing standards. You do this by adding model dimensions to drawing views, modifying
the location of dimensions and editing the display of dimensions.
Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Adding CLUTCH_SHOE_LEFT.DRW
Task 1: Add model dimensions to the drawing and move dimensions in the drawing.
2. Review the layout of views on the drawing.
3. Show dimensions by feature.

• Click Show Model Annotations from the
Annotations group.
• Select the feature MAIN_PROTRUSION from
the model tree. Notice the feature geometry
highlights on the drawing.
• Notice the dimensions are shown on the front
and projection views.
• Click Select All and then click OK in the
dialog box.

4. Move a dimension to another view.
• Select the 46.5 diameter dimension on the
front view, and then click Move to View
• Select the cross-section view.
• Notice the dimension has moved to the
selected view.
Note: Dimensions can also be placed on 3-D views if the drawing setup file option allow_3d_dimensions
is set to yes.
5. Move more dimensions to the cross-section
view.
• Drag a window across the front view to select
all the dimensions in that view.
• Right-click and select Move to View from
the mini toolbar.
• Select the cross-section view.
• Notice the dimensions have moved to the
selected view.
6. Show dimensions by feature in a selected view.

• Click Show Model Annotations .
• Select the feature F6(CUT_1) on detail 1 view,
as shown.
• Click Select All and then click OK from the
dialog box.

7. Show more dimensions by feature in a selected
view.
• Select the feature F7 (CUT_2) in the detail 2
view, as shown.
• Notice model dimensions appear in the
selected view.
• Click Select All and then click OK in the
dialog box.
8. Rearrange the shown dimensions.

• Select each newly shown dimension and
move it to a new location using drag handles.
9. Continue showing dimensions.

• Right-click where shown and select the
feature F11 (SLOT_1) in the detail 1 view.
• Click Select All and then click OK from the
dialog box.
Task 2: Manipulate dimensions on the drawing.

1. Move the shown dimensions in the detail 1 view
using drag handles.
• Select each newly shown dimension and
move it to a new location using drag handles.

2. Flip arrows on selected dimensions in the detail
1 view.
• Press CTRL, select both the linear vertical
2 dimensions, and select both the linear 3
dimensions.
• With all four dimensions selected, right-click
and select Flip Arrows from the mini
toolbar.
• Notice the arrows are flipped on the four
selected dimensions.
• With all four dimensions still selected,
right-click and select Flip Arrows again.
3. Flip arrows on a diameter dimension.

• Select the 2 diameter dimension, in the detail
1 view.
mini toolbar.
• Notice the arrows are updated.
• Right-click and select Flip Arrows again.
• Notice the arrows are updated again.

4. Edit the display of the radius dimension.
• Select the 1 radius dimension, in the detail 1
view.
mini toolbar.
• Notice the arrows are updated.
shown.
5. Move and align dimensions in the detail 1 view.

• Select the left vertical 2 dimension.
• Drag it to a new location, as shown.
• Press CTRL and select the vertical 3
dimension.
• Right-click and select Align Dimensions .
• Notice the dimensions are now aligned.

6. Change the arrow head style on a dimension.
• Zoom into the vertical 3 dimension in the
detail 1 view.
• Cursor over the top arrow for the dimension
and select it.
• Right-click and select Arrow Style > Filled
Dot.
• Notice the arrow updates, as shown.
7. Change the display of the diameter dimension

to linear in the detail 1 view.
• Select the 2 diameter dimension, in detail
view 1.
• Right-click and select Show as linear.
• Right-click and select Edit Attachment
• Rotate the dimension to a new location, as
shown.

8. Move the diameter dimension in detail view 1
using drag handles.
• Select the 2 diameter dimension, in the detail
1 view.
• Move the dimension to a new location using
drag handles.
9. Add a jog to a witness line on the diameter
dimension in the detail 1 view.
• Click Jog from the Edit group.
• Select the 2 diameter dimension in the detail
1 view.
• Select a location on the right witness line to
specify the jog point.
• Drag the jog point to a new location, as shown.
• Click to locate the new position for the jog
point.
• Middle-click twice to exit creating jogs.
Task 3: Adjust dimensions in the cross-section view.
1. Clean up dimensions in the cross-section view.
• Drag a window to select all the dimensions in
the cross-section view, as shown.
• Right-click and select Cleanup Dimensions
.
• In the Clean Dimensions dialog box, type 15
in the Offset field.
• Type 10 in the Increment field.
• Ensure the Create snap lines check box is
selected.
• Click Apply. Click Close.
• Notice the dimensions have been cleaned up
and snap lines have been created.

Task 4: Add a driven dimension and a reference dimension to the cross-section view.
Note: If a dimension scheme does not meet required drawing standards you can either edit the dimension
scheme or remove unwanted dimensions, and create driven dimensions.
1. Remove a selected diameter dimension on the
cross-section view.
• Select the 46.5 diameter dimension in the
cross-section view, as shown.
• Click Delete from the mini toolbar.
2. Move a linear dimension in the cross-section
view using drag handles.
• Select the 36.5 linear dimension, in the
cross-section view.
• Move the dimension to a new location.
3. Add a driven radius dimension to the

cross-section view.
group.
• Select the curved edge on the model, as
shown.
drawing.
• Click Cancel.
4. Add a reference dimension.
• Click the Annotations group drop-down menu
and select Reference Dimension .
• Select the vertical edge of the model, as
shown.
• Click Select Tangent in the Select
Reference dialog box.
• Press CTRL and select the curved edge on
drawing.
• Click Cancel.

Task 5: Edit a dimension to display in symbolic form.
1. Edit the dimension text display for a dimension.
• Select the 36.5 linear dimension in the
cross-section view, as shown.
• Click Dimension Te xt from the Dimension
Te xt group.
• Type @S in the Dimension Te xt field.
• Type SHOE_WIDTH in the Modify Symbolic
Name field from the Value group.
Note: You can edit the dimension back so it displays the numeric form by changing @S to @D. This can be
done at anytime.
Task 6: Globally change the display of dimensions on the drawing.
1. Edit the drawing setup file.
• Click Find and type lead_trail_zeros in the
Type keyword field.
• Click Find now.
• Select the lead_trail_zeros option.
• Select std_english from the Set value
drop-down list.
• Click Add/Change > Close.
• Click OK > Close.
• Click Update Sheets from the Update
group.
• Notice trailing zeros are displayed after the
decimal place on all applicable dimensions.

Module 41
Adding Tolerance Information

Understanding Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances enable you to specify allowable variations in model dimensions.
Dimensional Tolerances:
• General
• Individual
Tolerance Standards:
• ANSI
• ISO
Figure 1 – ISO Tolerance Example

Tolerance Display Formats:
• Nominal
• Limits
• Plus-Minus
• Symmetric
ISO Tolerance Tables:
• General
• Broken edge
• Holes and shafts
• Tolerance class Figure 2 – Tolerance Formats
Understanding Dimensional Tolerances

When you design a part in Creo Parametric you specify allowable variations in model dimensions.
These variations are known as dimensional tolerances. All model dimensions are controlled by
tolerances, except basic dimensions which are considered exact. By default, all model dimensions
have a general tolerance applied to them. However, you can also apply individual tolerances to model
dimensions. General tolerances apply to all model dimensions that appear in a nominal format, without
a specific tolerance applied, whereas individual tolerances are applied to specific individual dimensions.
Tolerance Standards
You can specify the tolerance standard for a model to be either ANSI or ISO.
• ANSI Tolerance Standard — This is the default tolerance standard in Creo Parametric. The tolerance
is based on the nominal dimension's number of digits after the decimal point. You can control this
globally using the configuration file options linear_tol, and angular_tol. You can also set individual
dimensions with a specific number of digits after the decimal point.
• ISO Tolerance Standard — This tolerance standard is controlled by a set of standard tolerance tables.
The tolerance tables are loaded into a model when the tolerance standard is specified as ISO. The
tables are removed from a model if the tolerance standard is changed to ANSI.
Tolerance Display Formats
You can display dimensional tolerances in four types of formats :
• Nominal — The nominal dimension appears.
• Limits — The nominal dimension is not displayed, instead the upper and lower limit values appear.
• Plus-Minus — The nominal value appears together with the positive and negative variation.
• Symmetric — The nominal value appears together with a symmetric positive and negative variation.

ISO Tolerance Tables
For models configured to the ISO standard, you can assign dimensions to different tolerance tables
depending on your requirements. By default, dimensions are assigned to the General table. When
you assign a dimension to a table, the tolerance table and the dimension value control the resulting
tolerance values of the dimension. You can edit the tolerance table reference to any of the following
tables:
• General — There can be only one general tolerance table assigned to a model. You can combine this
with a specific tolerance class to apply the dimensional tolerance to unassigned dimensions.
• Broken edge — Similar to general tolerance tables, there is only one broken edge table in a model,
this applies to radii dimensions and chamfers.
• Holes and shafts — There can be as many hole and shaft tolerance tables in a model as required.
These tables are applied to dimensions based on specific functional needs and the required
manufacturing tolerances.
• Tolerance class — Each ISO standard model has an extra attribute called the tolerance class which
determines the general coarseness of the model. You can select fine, medium, coarse or very
coarse depending on your requirements. You use the tolerance class with the dimension value when
retrieving tolerances for general or broken edge dimensions.
Configuring Dimensional Tolerances

You can configure dimensional tolerances within models and drawings. You can configure global
default tolerance settings and assign specific tolerances to individual dimensions.
Default settings for dimensional tolerances: Assigning Individual Tolerances:
• Configuration File Options • Dimension Properties
– tolerance_standard – Tolerance mode
– linear_tol – Tolerance values
– angular_tol – ISO tolerance tables
– tolerance_class Switching Tolerance Standards:
– tolerance_table_dir
• ANSI to ISO
• Drawing Setup File Option
– Tolerance class
– default_tolerance_mode
– Specific tolerance tables
– tol_display
• ISO to ANSI
– All ISO tables removed
Figure 1 – ANSI Dimension Tolerance Properties Figure 2 – ISO Dimension Tolerance Properties
Configuring Dimensional Tolerances

The default settings for how tolerances are configured and displayed in models and drawings are
controlled by the following options:
• Configuration File Options:
– tolerance_standard – This option determines the tolerance standard. It can be ANSI or ISO; the
default setting is ANSI. You configure ANSI tolerances using the number of decimal places
displayed in dimensions. You configure ISO tolerances using tolerance tables.
– linear_tol – Configures the default tolerance for linear dimensions when the tolerance_standard is
ANSI. For example, linear_tol 2 0.05 specifies a tolerance of 0.05 for linear dimensions with two
decimal places. You can select multiple linear_tol options, one for each number of required
decimal places.
– angular_tol – Configures the default tolerance for angular dimensions when the tolerance_standard
is ANSI. For example, angular_tol 1 0.5 sets a tolerance of 0.5 for angular dimensions with one
decimal place. You can select multiple angular_tol options, one for each number of required
decimal places.
– tolerance_class – Configures the default tolerance class for ISO tolerance standard models. The
options are medium, fine, coarse, or very coarse.
– tolerance_table_dir – Configures the default directory for user-defined ISO tolerance tables.
• Drawing Setup File Option:
– tol_display – Determines whether tolerances appear in drawings. The default setting is no. Note
the Environment dialog box option to display tolerances is not available when you create drawings.
– default_tolerance_mode – This option determines the default tolerance displayed on dimensions.
You can edit it to nominal, basic, limits, plusminus, plusminussym, or plusminussym_super.
This option applies to newly created dimensions. It does not apply retroactively to any existing
dimensions. The default setting value is nominal. Therefore, if you require most dimensions to be
displayed as limits for example, you should configure this option before creating new dimensions.
Assigning Individual Tolerances
You can assign specific, non-default dimensional tolerances in the model or in the drawing. The
Dimension Properties dialog box provides you with a number of options. These options vary depending
on which tolerance standard you use, for example ANSI or ISO:
• Tolerance mode – Enables you to specify the tolerance display. The options are nominal, basic,
limits, plus-minus, +-symmetric, or +-symmetric (superscript). The last option displays the tolerance in
superscript, for example .
• Tolerance values – You can specify different tolerance values. Depending on the type of tolerance
being configured, you can specify either the nominal value and/or the upper and lower tolerance
values.
• Tolerance tables – If you select the ISO tolerance standard, then you can specify which tolerance
table is assigned to a dimension. You can select general, broken edge, hole, or shaft tables. For hole
and shaft tables you can also select which specific table is used; for example, hole-g3 table.
Switching Tolerance Standards
You can switch the tolerance standard applied to a model at any time.
• ANSI to ISO – When you switch from ANSI to ISO all model dimension tolerances are controlled by
ISO tolerance tables. By default, dimensions are assigned to the general table. You can configure
additional items:
– Tolerance class – Having selected the ISO tolerance standard, you can specify the tolerance class.
You can specify the class as fine, medium, coarse, or very coarse depending on your requirements.
The default setting is medium. You use the tolerance class with the dimension value when
retrieving tolerances for general or broken edge dimensions.
– Specific tolerance tables – To refine your tolerances, you can assign broken edge tables to
external radii and chamfer dimensions, and you can assign hole and shaft tables to hole and
shaft diameter dimensions.
• ISO to ANSI – When you switch from ISO to ANSI, the ANSI tolerances are configured using each
nominal dimension’s number of digits. All referenced tolerance tables are removed from the model.

PROCEDURE - Configuring Dimensional Tolerances
Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Tolerances PLATE.PRT
Task 1: Add tolerances to dimensions in a design model and a drawing.
2. Display tolerances in the model.
• Select the EXTRUDE feature in the model tree
and click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar.
• Notice that the dimensional tolerances do not
appear.
• Click File > Options.
• In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box,
• Select the Show dimension tolerances check
box.
• Click OK.
• Click NO from the Creo Parametric Options
dialog box.
• Right-click the EXTRUDE feature and select
Edit Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
• Notice dimensional tolerances now appear
and the default ANSI tolerance values appear
at the bottom of the graphics window.
3. Edit a tolerance in the model.
• Select the 100 dimension.
• Select Plus-Minus from the Tolerance
types drop-down list in the Tolerance group.
• Edit the lower tolerance value to –0.02 from
the Tolerance group.
4. Display tolerances in a drawing.
• Select PLATE.DRW and click Open.
• Notice tolerances are not displayed in the
drawing.
• Type tol_display in the Option text box.
• Select Yes for the value.
• Click Add/Change. Click OK.
• Click Close.
Note: Tolerance display in drawings is controlled through the drawing setup option tol_display.

5. Edit a tolerance in the drawing.
• Select the Annotate tab in the Drawing ribbon.
• Select the 140 dimension.
• Select Limits from the Tolerance types
drop-down list.
• You can edit tolerances in both models and
drawings.
Task 2: Configure ISO tolerances in a model and a drawing.
1. Change the model to ISO tolerance standard.
• Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select PLATE.PRT.
• Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
• In the Model Properties dialog box, click change in the Tolerance row.
• Click Standard > ISO/DIN.
• Click Yes to regenerate the model.
2. Change the tolerance class.
• Click Model Class > FINE.
3. Add a tolerance table to the model.
• Click Tol Tables > Retrieve.
• Select HOLE_G.TTL and click Open.
• Click Close from the Model Properties dialog box.
4. Activate the drawing.
• Click Windows from the Quick Access
toolbar and select PLATE.DRW.
• Notice the dimensional tolerance values
have changed because the model is now
controlled by ISO tolerance tables.
5. Apply the hole tolerance table to the hole
diameter.
• Select the 30 hole diameter dimension.
• Select Plus-Minus from the Tolerance
types drop-down list.
• Edit the Tolerance table to Hole.

Exercise 1: Configuring Dimensional Tolerances in the Piston
Objectives
• Configure dimensional tolerances in a model.
• Configure dimensional tolerances in a drawing.
• Control the display of dimensional tolerances.
Scenario
You have been assigned the task of adding dimensional tolerances to the piston drawing.
Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Tolerances PISTON.PRT
Task 1: Add tolerances to dimensions in the design model.
2. Display tolerances in the model.
• Click File > Options.
• In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box,
• Select the Show dimension tolerances check
box.
• Click OK.
• Click NO in the Creo Parametric Options
dialog box.
• Notice that the default ANSI tolerance values
appear in a table at the bottom of the graphics
window.
3. Add a plus-minus tolerance in the model.
• Select the EXTRUDE_1 feature in the model
tree. Click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar.
• Click Plus-Minus from the Tolerance types
drop-down list in the Tolerance group.
• Type 0.00 in the Upper tolerance field.
• Type –0.02 in the Lower tolerance field.
• Press ENTER.
• Notice the updated dimensional tolerance
now appears.

4. Add a limits tolerance in the model.
• With the model dimensions still displayed,
select the 14 linear dimension.
• Click Limits from the Tolerance types
• Notice the updated dimensional tolerance
now appears.
5. Add another limits tolerance in the model.

• With the model dimensions still displayed,
select the 16 linear dimension.
• Click Limits from the Tolerance types
• Type 15.98 in the Lower limit text box.
• If necessary, press ENTER.
• Notice the updated limits dimension.
• Click Regenerate from the Quick Access
toolbar.
Note: It is necessary to regenerate the model because changing the lower tolerance value changes
the nominal value.

Task 2: Show dimension tolerances in the drawing.
1. Display tolerances in a drawing.
• Select PISTON.DRW and click Open.
• Notice that tolerances are not displayed in
the drawing.
• Type tol_display in the Option field.
• Select Yes for the value.
• Click Add/Change. Click OK.
• Click Close.
Note: Tolerance display in drawings is controlled through the drawing setup option tol_display, not
the Environment option.
2. Edit a tolerance in the drawing.
• Type 0.01 in the Upper tolerance field.
• Press ENTER.
• Note, you can edit dimensional tolerances in
both models and drawings.
Task 3: Add a tolerance to a dimension in the drawing.
1. Zoom in to the Section A-A view.
2. Add a tolerance to a hole feature dimension.
• Select the 8 diameter dimension.
• Edit the Tolerance mode to Plus-Minus.
• Click to pull down 0.12 from the Precision
group and select 0.123.
• Type +0.010 in the Upper tolerance field.
• Type –0.005 in the Lower tolerance field.
• Press ENTER.

Task 4: Configure ISO tolerances in a model and a drawing.
1. Change the tolerance standard in the model to ISO.
• Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select PISTON.PRT.
• Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
• In the Features and Geometry section, click change in the Tolerance row.
• Click Standard > ISO/DIN.
2. Change the tolerance class.
• Click Model Class > FINE. Click Yes to regenerate the model.
3. Add tolerance tables to the model.
• Select HOLE_G.TTL, and click Open.
• Select SHAFT_D.TTL, and click Open.
• Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
4. Activate the drawing.
• Click Windows from the Quick Access
toolbar and select PISTON.DRW.
• Notice the dimensional tolerance values
have changed because the model is now
controlled by ISO tolerance tables.
• Observe the dimensional tolerances on the 8
diameter dimension in view Section A-A.
5. Apply the shaft tolerance table to a shaft

diameter.
• Select the 30.5 diameter dimension in the top
view.
• Click General to pull down and select Shaft.
• Set the tolerance class letter to d and set the
tolerance grade to 6.
• Notice the tolerance values are now taken
from the shaft tolerance table.

6. Apply a hole tolerance table to a diameter.
• Select the 8 hole diameter dimension in view
Section A-A.
• Click General to pull down and select Hole.
• Set the tolerance class letter to G.
• Set the tolerance grade to 4.
Understanding Geometric Tolerances

Geometric tolerances are the maximum allowable deviation from the exact sizes and shapes
specified in a model design.
Geometric tolerances enable you to:
• Specify critical surfaces.
• Document related critical surfaces.
• Provide inspection and deviation information.
Figure 1 – Geometric Tolerance Example

Geometric Tolerance Types: • Orientation
• Form – Angularity
– Straightness – Parallelism
– Flatness – Perpendicularity
– Circularity • Location
– Cylindricity – Position
• Profile – Concentricity
– Line – Symmetry
– Surface • Runout
– Circular
– Total
Geometric Tolerances Theory
Geometric tolerances are detailing tools that enable you to:
• Specify the critical surfaces on a part model.
• Document the relationship between critical surfaces.
• Provide information on how the part should be inspected and what deviations are acceptable.
Within drawings, you can either show a geometric tolerance from the solid model or create a geometric
tolerance directly in the drawing. Geometric tolerances have a number of characteristics including the
following:
• You can attach a geometric tolerance to dimensions (reference, driven, radius, or diameter), set
datums, single or multiple edges, or another geometric tolerance. You can also place geometric
tolerances as free notes anywhere on the drawing, or attach them to leader elbows for notes, or
relate them to dimension text.
• You can attach multiple lines of additional text and text symbols to a geometric tolerance while
creating or editing it.
• You can stack multiple geometric tolerances one above the other. In addition, if the first tolerance in
a stack is attached to a dimension, then you can attach additional stacked geometric tolerances to
the same dimension.
Types of Geometric Tolerances
Geometric tolerances are classified by class and type. Each type has a special symbol used to show
the tolerance condition. You can use the following types and symbols.
Class Type and Symbol Reference Entity
Form Straightness Surface of revolution, axis, or straight edge
Flatness Plane surface (not datum plane)
Circularity Cylinder, cone, or sphere
Cylindricity Cylindrical surface

Profile Edge
Line
Surface Surface (not datum plane)

Orientation Angularity Plane, surface, or axis
Cylindrical, surface, or axis
Parallelism
Planar surface
Perpendicularity
Location Position Any
Concentricity Axis, or surface of revolution
Symmetry Any
Runout Circular Cone, cylinder, sphere, or plane
Total Cone, cylinder, sphere, or plane

Setting Up Geometric Tolerance References
Before you can apply geometric tolerances you must set up certain references including reference
datums and basic dimensions.
Set Up Geometric Tolerance References:

• Basic Dimensions
• Reference Datums
• Inspection Dimensions
• Datum Targets
Figure 1 – Reference Datum
Figure 2 – Basic Dimension Figure 3 – Inspection Dimension
Setting Up Geometric Tolerance References

You must set up certain geometric tolerance references before you can place geometric tolerances.
This includes the following items:
• Basic Dimensions – Basic dimensions are theoretically exact dimensions that appear with the
measurement value in a feature control frame. You can configure them by selecting existing
dimensions in drawings. Any tolerances are automatically removed from the selected dimension,
because you cannot add tolerances to basic dimensions.
• Reference Datums – Are theoretically exact datum planes or datum axes. A reference datum is the
origin from which the location or geometric characteristics of features of a part are defined. Before
you can reference a datum plane or datum axis in a geometric tolerance, you must set it. When you
set a datum, its name is enclosed in a rectangle. Once you have set a datum, you can still use it, for
example, when creating features or assembling parts.
• Inspection Dimensions – Normally indicate that a dimension is measured frequently during the
quality control checking of a component. (Typically, when performing quality control checks not all
component dimensions are checked). You can configure inspection dimensions by selecting existing
dimensions in drawings and editing their properties.
• Datum Targets – Indicate critical measurement points on a plot. You can create a datum target
specifying any set datum point, except one that has been created using Offset Csys. Point datum
targets reference a selected set datum point on a surface or edge. Diameter datum targets contain a
required diameter. Box datum targets contain the dimensions of the selected area, and Line datum
targets contain the datum name and a leader line pointing to the selected datum curve.

PROCEDURE - Setting Up Geometric Tolerance References
Drawing_Details\Gtol_References GTOL_REFS.DRW
Task 1: Configure a basic dimension and an inspection dimension.
2. Configure a basic dimension.
• Select the 140 horizontal dimension in the
front view.
• Select Basic from the Tolerance types
• Click in the background to de-select all.
• Notice that the dimension is now displayed in
a feature control frame. Also notice that the
tolerances have been removed automatically.
3. Configure an inspection dimension.
• Select the 120 horizontal dimension in the
front view.
• Select the Inspection check box.
• Click in the background to de-select all.
• Notice that the dimension now appears as an
inspection dimension.
Task 2: Set a reference datum in a drawing.
2. Create a reference datum plane.
• Click Draft Datum Plane from the Draft
Datum types drop-down list in the Annotations
group.
• Click Vertex in the Select Point dialog box.
• Select the lower vertex from the view as
shown. Click OK.
• Select the upper vertex from the view and
middle-click the mouse button.
• Type A and click Accept Value .
• Close the Select Point dialog box.

3. With the datum still selected, right-click and
select Properties from the mini toolbar.
• Click Set Datum from the Datum dialog
box.
• Click OK.
de-select all.
Creating Datum Feature Symbols

You can create datum feature symbols with different placement types.
• Create or show the annotation.
• Multiple placement options
• Automatic naming
• Syntax checking
• Various editing options
• Add additional text
Figure 1 – Various Datum Feature Symbols
Figure 3 – Showing a 3-D Model Datum

Figure 2 – Elbow Display Feature Symbol
Creating Datum Feature Symbols
You can create datum feature symbols with different placement types. There are two different
methods you can use to create datum feature symbols in a drawing:
• Create the datum feature symbol as an annotation within the 3-D model. From within the drawing
you can then click Show Model Annotations from the Annotate group and select the datum
feature symbol from the Datums Tab .
• Click Datum Feature Symbol from the Annotations group. Select a reference in a drawing view,
and you see an immediate preview of the datum feature symbol with the plunger attached to the
selected reference. Drag the height to the desired amount and middle-click to complete the datum
feature symbol.
You can specify any of the following as references for the datum feature symbol attachment:
• Edge
• Point on a surface.
• Dimension
• Geometric tolerance
Note: A datum feature symbol is a regular standalone annotation. It is not a property of a datum plane or
datum axis that was created in a 3-D model. Therefore it doesn’t require a plane or an axis and you can
place it wherever you want.
Note: Previously, a datum feature symbol was called a set datum tag.
Editing a Datum Feature Symbol
You can easily edit a datum feature symbol by selecting it. A context-sensitive ribbon tab open on
selection, enabling you to perform any edits to the datum feature symbol. The ribbon tab closes
on de-selection of the datum feature symbol.
You can always edit the plunger reference by selecting the datum feature symbol, right-clicking, and
selecting Change Reference from the mini toolbar. You can then select a different reference to replace
the datum feature symbol.
Using Automatic Naming
When creating a datum feature symbol, the system automatically names it the next available name in
the standard sequence, starting with A, then B, C, and so on. You can also manually name the datum
feature symbol, or change the existing name. If there is a gap in the names, the system automatically
fills in the gap when the next datum feature symbol is created. For example, if there are datum feature
symbols A and C, the system automatically names the next created datum feature symbol B. Automatic
naming saves time by not having to keep track of the next name in the sequence.
Note: To display a datum feature symbol in more than one drawing view, you must manually name the
subsequent datum feature symbols to the same name as the original one.
Syntax Checking
If you edit the name of the datum feature symbol, the system automatically checks the syntax to
verify proper naming convention according to the ASME Y14.5 standard. If you specify a name that
does not follow proper syntax, the system displays a caption to let you know, and also displays a red
spell checker line underneath the incorrect syntax.
Editing Options
The following editing options are available for a datum feature symbol:
• Specify the leader display – You can choose the leader style either as Straight or Elbow.
• Edit the display style to the ASME Y14.5m-1982 standard.
• When attached to a diameter dimension, you can edit the location of the datum feature symbol to
the dimension elbow.
Adding Additional Te xt to the Datum Feature Symbol
You can type additional text placed adjacent to the datum feature symbol, supporting the proper
standards. You can also click Rotate text position to move the additional text to any of the three
sides where the datum feature symbol stem does not come out of the box.

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Feature Symbols
Drawing_Details\Datum-Feature-Symbols DATUM-FEATURE.DRW
Task 1: Create datum feature symbols on geometry.
3. Click Datum Feature Symbol from the
Annotations group.
4. Zoom in on the front view.
5. Select the reference shown, drag the cursor up,
and middle-click to place the datum feature
symbol.
6. Click in the background to de-select the datum

feature symbol.
7. Notice that the system automatically named the
symbol A.
8. Click Datum Feature Symbol .

9. Select the bottom edge, drag the cursor down,
and middle-click to place the datum feature
symbol.
symbol B.
feature symbol.
12. Pan to the right view.

13. Click Datum Feature Symbol , select the
bottom edge, drag the cursor down, and
middle-click to place the datum feature symbol.
symbol C.

15. Click Elbow from the display group.
feature symbol.
17. Pan to the aux view.

18. Click Datum Feature Symbol , select
the circle edge, drag the cursor out, and
middle-click to place the datum feature symbol.
symbol D.
20. Drag the datum feature symbol as necessary
to position it and click in the background to
de-select it.
Task 2: Create a datum feature symbol in dimensions.

1. Pan to the top view.
2. Click Datum Feature Symbol and select the
2.500 dimension as the reference.
3. Drag up and middle-click to place the datum
feature symbol.
4. Notice that the system snaps the datum feature
symbol to the center of the witness lines.
feature symbol.
6. Pan to the aux view.
2.089 diameter dimension as the reference.
8. Drag up and middle-click to place the datum
feature symbol.
9. Right-click and clear the Dimension Elbow

check box.
10. Select the dimension and move it as necessary.
feature symbol.

Task 3: Create a datum feature symbol in a geometric tolerance.

flatness geometric tolerance as the reference.
2. Drag down and middle-click to place the datum
feature symbol.
feature symbol.
Task 4: Show a datum feature symbol created in the 3-D model.

1. Select the right view, right-click, and select
Show Model Annotations from the mini
toolbar.
2. In the Show Model Annotations dialog box,
select the Datums Tab .
• Select the Datum_Tag _H check box and click
Apply.
3. Select the front view.

• Select the Datum_Tag _H check box and click
OK.
5. Move the datum feature symbol as necessary.
feature symbol.
Task 5: Add additional text to a datum feature symbol.
1. In the front view, select datum feature symbol B.
2. In the Datum Feature tab, click in the Additional
Te xt field, type B1, 2, 3 and press ENTER.
3. Click Rotate text position from the Additional
Te xt group.
feature symbol.

Creating Datum Targets
You can create datum targets to specify a location on a model to establish a datum.
• Create or show the annotation.
• Multiple target area shapes and sizes.
• Automatic indexing.
• Semantic referencing to datum feature symbols.
• Syntax checking.
• Various editing options.
Figure 1 – Various Datum Target Shapes, Sizes, and Options

Creating Datum Targets
You can create datum targets to specify a location on a model to establish a datum. Click Datum
Target from the Annotations group. Select a reference in a drawing view, and you see an immediate
preview of the datum target with the target area attached to the selected reference location. Drag the
target to the desired location and middle-click to complete the datum target.
You can also create the datum target as an annotation within the 3-D model. From within the drawing
you can then click Show Model Annotations from the Annotate group and select the datum target
from the Datums Tab .
Editing a Datum Target
You can easily edit a datum target by selecting it. A context-sensitive ribbon tab opens on selection,
enabling you to perform any edits to the datum target. The ribbon tab closes on de-selection of
the datum target.
You can always edit the target area reference location by selecting the datum target, right-clicking, and
selecting Change Reference. You can then select a different reference to re-place the target area.
Using Automatic Indexing
When creating a datum target, the system automatically indexes it the next available number in the
standard sequence, starting with 1, then 2, 3, and so on. You can also manually index the datum target,
or change the existing index number. If there is a gap in the index numbers, the system automatically
fills in the gap when the next datum target is created. For example, if there are datum targets A1 and
A3, the system automatically names the next created datum target A2. Automatic indexing saves time
by not having to keep track of the next index number in the sequence.
Using Semantic References
When creating a datum target, if you reference an existing datum feature symbol, the system
establishes a semantic reference between the two, and the label turns green in the field. If you change
the datum feature symbol label, the datum target label automatically updates when the drawing is
regenerated. Of course, you can opt to create a non-semantic reference, also.
Syntax Checking
If you edit the name of the datum target, the system automatically checks the syntax to verify proper
naming convention according to the ASME Y14.5 standard. If you specify a name that does not follow
proper syntax, the system displays a caption to let you know, and also displays a red “spell checker”
line underneath the incorrect syntax.
Editing Options
The following editing options are available for a datum target:
• Target Area – Click Target Area from the ribbon and choose from the following target area shapes:
– Point
– Circle
– Rectangle
– None
The datum target displays an intelligent prefix for the size, based on the target area selected.
• Size – Depending on the Target Area shape specified, you can edit its size.
• Area Size dimension placement – Specify whether the target area size is displayed inside or outside
the target circle.
• Movable Datum Target – Specify whether the datum target circle is movable and if so, rotate the
symbol in ninety degree increments.
• Leader information – You can edit the following parts of the datum target leader:
– Arrow Style.
– Straight versus No Leader.
– Set the leader to either Near-Side or Far-Side.
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Targets

Drawing_Details\Datum-Targets DATUM-TARGETS.DRW
Task 1: Create datum target annotations.
.
3. Click Datum Target from the Annotations
group.
4. Zoom in on the left view.
5. Select the datum point, drag the cursor down,
and middle-click to place the datum target.

6. In the ribbon, click Target Area and select
Circle .
• Edit the target size to 1 and press ENTER.
7. Click Select Datum Reference from the Size

& References group.
8. Select datum feature symbol B and click OK.
9. Notice that a semantic reference has been
created between the datum target and the
datum feature symbol.
target.
11. Disable Point Display .
12. Click Datum Target and select the surface.

13. Drag the cursor up and middle-click to place
the datum target.
14. In the ribbon, click Target Area and select

Rectangle .
• Edit the target size to .75 x 1.5 and press
ENTER.
• Cursor over the middle of the rectangle and
drag the handle if necessary to reposition the
rectangle.

15. Click Select Datum Reference , select datum
feature symbol B, and click OK.
16. Notice that a semantic reference has been
created between the datum target and the
17. Notice also that the system automatically
incremented the index number.
target.
Task 2: Edit the datum target annotation properties.

1. Select datum target B1.
2. Click Movable Datum Target from the
Movable Datum Target group.
3. Click Rotate Symbol from the Movable
Datum Target group.
target.
5. Select datum target B2.

6. Click Outside from the Area Size Display
group.
7. Notice that the target size has been moved
outside of the target symbol.
target.
Task 3: Edit the datum feature symbol label.

1. Select datum feature symbol B.
2. In the ribbon, edit the label from B to C and
press ENTER.
feature symbol.

4. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the drawing.
5. Notice that both datum targets updated to
the new label due to the semantic references
established.
Task 4: Show a datum target created in the 3-D model.

1. Select the front view, right-click, and select
Show Model Annotations from the mini
toolbar.
• Select the dt0 check box and click OK.
• Move the datum target as necessary.
target.

Applying Geometric Tolerances
Geometric tolerances are displayed in a standard layout known as a feature control frame.
• Feature Control Frame Elements: • Create or show the annotation.
– Geometry Control Tool • Semantic referencing to datum
¨ Tolerance Symbol feature symbols.
– Tolerance Zone • Syntax checking.
¨ Tolerance Value • Various editing and symbol options.
¨ Material Condition
¨ Symbols
– Datum Reference Frame
¨ Datum References
Figure 2 – Example Geometric

Tolerances
Figure 1 – Feature Control Frame
Feature Control Frame Elements
Geometric tolerances are displayed in a standard layout called a feature control frame. This is a
rectangular box containing all the elements that make up geometric tolerances. This includes the
geometry control tool, the tolerance zone definition, and the datum reference frame definition.
• Geometry Control Tool — This contains the type of tolerance displayed as a symbol; for example,
Circularity.
• Tolerance Zone — This can contain the following items:
– Tolerance Value — The stated tolerance value.
– Material Condition — Geometric tolerances are understood to be applied regardless of feature
size (RFS). If Least Material Condition (LMC) or Maximum Material Condition (MMC) is required, it is
placed in the feature control frame.
¨ Regardless of Feature Size (RFS) — Indicates that a geometric tolerance or datum reference
applies to any increment of size of the feature within its size tolerance. If no symbol is shown it
is understood as RFS.
¨ Least Material Condition (LMC) — The condition in which a feature of size contains the least
amount of material within stated limits of size. For example, maximum hole diameter and
minimum shaft diameter.
¨ Maximum Material Condition (MMC) — The condition in which a feature of size contains the
maximum amount of material within stated limits of size. For example, minimum hole diameter
and maximum shaft diameter.
– Symbols — You can add other symbols; for example, Free State, Projected Tolerance Zone, or
Statistical Tolerance .
¨ Free State (F) — Indicates that components should not be restricted during inspection.
¨ Projected Tolerance Zone (P) — Indicates that the standard tolerance is extended beyond
the surface of the part, not within the part.
¨ Statistical Tolerance (ST) — Is a tolerance for the part or assembly based on the results of a
statistical calculation. The desired result is larger tolerances.
• Datum Reference Frame — This can contain up to three datum references, known as primary,
secondary, and tertiary datums. You can add a material condition to each datum reference.
Creating Geometric Tolerances
When creating geometric tolerances the feature control frame is displayed on the drawing, and
updates automatically as you configure the tolerance. This enables you to check the configuration as
you make adjustments, if necessary. The steps involved in creating geometric tolerances include:
• Specifying the type of geometric tolerance to insert; for example, Position.
• Using the Geometric Tolerance tab to configure the following elements:
– Specify the model and the reference entity to which you add the geometric tolerance, as well as
place the geometric tolerance on the drawing.
– Specify the datum references and material conditions for the datum references.
– Specify the tolerance value and the material condition.
– Specify the geometric tolerance’s symbols and modifiers, as well as the projected tolerance zone.
– Specify additional text that you want associated with a geometric tolerance while creating or
editing it.
Editing a Geometric Tolerance
You can easily edit a geometric tolerance by selecting it. A context-sensitive ribbon tab opens on
selection, enabling you to perform any edits to the geometric tolerance. The ribbon tab closes on
de-selection of the geometric tolerance.
You can always edit the geometric tolerance reference location by selecting the gtol, right-clicking,
and selecting Change Reference. You can then select a different reference to re-place the feature
control frame leader line and arrow.
Using Semantic References
When creating a geometric tolerance, if you reference an existing datum feature symbol for the
primary, secondary, or tertiary datums, the system establishes a semantic reference between the two,
and the label turns green in the field. If you change the datum feature symbol label, the datum label
automatically updates in the feature control frame when the drawing is regenerated.
Syntax Checking
As you fill out the geometric tolerance’s feature control frame, the system automatically checks the
syntax to conform to the ASME Y14.5 standard. If you enter a character or symbol in a location that
violates the standard, the system displays a caption to let you know, and also displays a red “spell
checker” line underneath the incorrectly specified character or symbol.
Additional Editing Options
The following editing options are available for a geometric tolerance:
• Composite frame – Add multiple rows to the base geometric tolerance.
• Indicators frames – Add additional Indicators frames to the geometric tolerance, including: Direction
Feature, Collection Plane, Intersection Plane, and Orientation Plane.
• Modifiers – Add additional modifiers to the geometric tolerance, including All Over, All Around,
Unilateral, and Boundary.
• Additional Te xt – Add additional text to any of four areas around the outside of the feature control
frame.
• Arrow Style
• Symbols – Add symbols to many areas of the feature control frame by placing the cursor in the
desired location and clicking from the context-sensitive tab in the ribbon. A comprehensive set of
both ASME and ISO symbols displays. You can then select the desired symbol, and it is added to
the field where your cursor is placed. The system dynamically checks the syntax to verify that it
meets the standards.
PROCEDURE - Applying Geometric Tolerances

Drawing_Details\Gtol_Applying GTOLS.DRW
Task 1: Create a geometric tolerance for angularity.
3. Click Geometric Tolerance from the
Annotations group.
• Select the angled surface shown.
• Drag the cursor down and middle-click to
place the geometric tolerance.
4. In the ribbon, click Geometric Characteristic

and select Angularity .
• Click in the primary datum field, type A, and
press ENTER.
Note: Notice that a semantic reference has been
established between the geometric tolerance and the
5. In the Tolerance & Datum group, edit the

tolerance value to 0.05 and press ENTER.
6. Click in the background to de-select the
completed geometric tolerance.

Task 2: Create a geometric tolerance for perpendicularity.
1. Click Geometric Tolerance .

• Select the top edge of the right view.
• Drag the cursor up and middle-click to place
the geometric tolerance.
2. Click Geometric Characteristic and select

Perpendicularity .
• In the Tolerance & Datum group, edit the
tolerance value to 0.02 and press ENTER.
• Click in the primary datum field, type C, and
press ENTER.
• Click in the secondary datum field, type B,
and press ENTER.
3. Place the cursor at the end of the specified

tolerance value.
4. Click Symbols from the Symbols group.
• Select the Statistical tolerance symbol.

5. Click Additional Te xt from the ribbon.
6. Click in the field above the feature control frame
and type 2 SURFACES .
Task 3: Create a geometric tolerance within a dimension.
1. Click Geometric Tolerance .

2. In the top view, select the .50 diameter
dimension.
3. The geometric tolerance is automatically added
to the dimension.
4. Click Additional Te xt and delete the text

from the field above the feature control frame.
5. Click Additional Te xt again to collapse it in
the ribbon.
6. Click Geometric Characteristic and select

Position .
• In the Tolerance & Datum group, edit the
tolerance value to 0.001 and press ENTER,
making sure to also delete the statistical
tolerance symbol.
• Click in the primary datum field, type A, and
press ENTER.
• Click in the secondary datum field, type B,
and press ENTER.
• Click in the tertiary datum field, type C, and
press ENTER.

7. Place the cursor at the end of the specified
tolerance value.
8. Click Symbols from the Symbols group.
• Select the Maximum Material Condition
symbol.
• Place the cursor at the beginning of the
specified tolerance value.
• Select the Diameter symbol.
Exercise 2: Creating and Editing Geometric Tolerances

Objectives
• Create geometric tolerances in drawings.
• Edit geometric tolerances in drawings.
• Create basic dimensions.
• Create reference datums.
• Create inspection dimensions.
Scenario
You need to add geometrical tolerances to the engine block drawing. This information enables correct
manufacture and inspection of the component.
Drawing_Details\Gtol_Creating-Editing ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.DRW
Task 1: Configure a basic dimension and an inspection dimension.
2. Configure a basic dimension.
• Select the Annotate tab in the ribbon.
• Zoom in to the top view on the drawing.
• Select the 45 vertical dimension in the top
view.
• Click Basic from the Tolerance types
drop-down menu in the Tolerance group.
• Click in the background to de-select all items.
• Notice that the dimension is now displayed in
a feature control frame.

3. Configure an inspection dimension.
• Zoom in to the Section A-A view on the
drawing.
• Select the 66 diameter dimension in the view.
• Select the Inspection check box.
• Notice the dimension is now displayed as an
inspection dimension.
Task 2: Create reference datums in the drawing.
1. Create a draft datum plane.
• Click Draft Datum Plane from the Draft
Datum types drop-down list in the Annotations
group.
• Click Snap Vertex from the Select Point
dialog box and select the bottom right vertex
of the TOP view as shown.
• Click OK from the Select Point dialog box.
• Select the bottom left vertex and middle-click
the mouse button.
• Type A and click Accept Value .
• Click Close from the Select Point dialog
box.
2. Set the datum A.
• Ensure the reference datum A is still selected,
mini toolbar.
box and click OK to close the dialog box.

3. Create a reference datum axis.
• Select Draft Datum Axis from the Draft
Datum Plane drop-down menu in the
Annotations group.
• Click Free Point from the Select Point
dialog box and click the location as shown.
• Drag the cursor and click to place the axis as
shown
• Type B and click Accept Value .
• Click Close from the Select Point dialog
box.
4. Set datum B.
• Ensure that the reference datum B is still
selected, right-click and select Properties
box and click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Delete the draft datum axis B in the drawing.
• Select the set datum axis B in the 3-D view,
as shown.
• Right-click and select Delete from the mini
toolbar.
• Notice that the selected datum axis no longer
appears.
Task 3: Create a geometric tolerance for parallelism between the front and rear surfaces of the
component.
1. Start creating the geometric tolerance for
parallelism.
• Click Geometric Tolerance from the
Annotations group.
• Select the surface shown on the top view.
• Select a location for the GTOL and
middle-click to place.
• Select Parallelism from the Geometric
Characteristic drop-down menu in the Symbol
group.
• Type 0.002 in the Tolerance Value field.
• Click Symbols from the Symbols group.
• Click Statistical Tolerance icon from the
symbol tray.
• Type A in the Primary Datum Reference field.

2. Click in the background to de-select all items.
Task 4: Create a geometric tolerance for concentricity on a cylindrical surface.

1. Start creating the geometric tolerance for
concentricity.
• Click Geometric Tolerance from the
Annotations group.
• Select the surface shown in section A-A.
• Select a location for the GTOL and
middle-click to place.
Note: Notice that the placed geometric
tolerance has retained some options from
the previously created parallelism geometric
tolerance. These options update as you
continue the configuration.
• Select Concentricity from the Geometric
Characteristic types drop-down menu.
• Type B in the Primary Datum Reference field.
• Clear the contents of the Tolerance Value
field.
• Click Symbols and select Diameter icon
from the symbol tray.
• Type 0.001 in the Tolerance Value field.
• Click Symbols and select Free State icon
from the symbol tray.
2. Click in the background to de-select all items.
Task 5: Edit the parallelism geometric tolerance in the drawing.

1. Select the parallelism geometric tolerance, in
the top view, as shown.
• Place the cursor after 0.002 in the Tolerance
Value field.
• Click Symbols and select Material Condition
icon from the symbol tray.
Note: You can modify geometric tolerances after you place them on a drawing.


Module 42
Adding Draft Geometry and Symbols

Creating and Editing Draft Geometry
You can create and edit 2-D draft geometry in drawings. You can use them to create drawing
symbols and modify draft drawing entities imported from other systems.
You can use draft geometry to:
• Create symbols.
• Create formats.
• Create layouts.
• Maintain legacy data.
• Add 2-D details to model drawings.
Figure 1 – Draft Geometry

Draft Geometry Uses
You can create 2-D draft geometry to do the following:
• Symbols — You can create a collection of draft geometry and text and configure it as a drawing
symbol.
• Formats — You can use draft geometry such as lines in drawing formats.
• Layouts — You can use draft geometry to sketch a design in a layout.
• Legacy data — You can update and maintain legacy data of drawings imported from other systems.
• Add 2-D details — You can add 2-D details such as lines, boxes, and circles to further annotate
model drawings.
Creating Draft Geometry
You can create draft data in drawings using many different methods:
• Importing data — You can import data such as IGES, DXF, or set files. This type of data is considered
in the same way as drafted entities.
• Sketching — Using the Sketch menu enables you to create various types of geometry, including lines,
circles, arcs, splines, ellipses, points, and chamfers.
– Parametric sketching — You can parametrically associate draft entities with model geometry or
other draft entities. Edits to references result in edits to the draft geometry. For example, if you
sketch a line and parametrically associate it to an edge and the edge moves, the dimensions of
the drafted line are dynamically updated with the new edge position.
– Chain sketching — When you use chain sketching, the ending point of one entity automatically
serves as the starting point for the next. Chaining geometry affects only the creation of the entities.
Once you have created them, you can select and move each one separately.
• Existing geometry — You can use existing model edges to create draft geometry. When creating
draft entities in this way, you can optionally erase the model edges from the drawing. You can also
create draft geometry by offsetting a specified distance from existing model edges.
• Locating Draft Geometry
– Approximate — When sketching draft geometry you can locate the position of sketched entities
approximately using the location of the Sketcher cross-hair.
– Precisely — A number of tools enable you to locate sketched entities more precisely:
¨ Snapping references and constraints — You can select other draft geometry and model
geometry as references to locate and create draft geometry. In addition, you can use
constraints such as parallel, perpendicular, midpoint, and tangent.
¨ Draft grid — You can enable grid snap in the Environment dialog box. This causes draft
geometry end points to snap to grid points.
¨ Construction geometry — You can create construction lines and circles that you can use as
snap references to locate draft geometry.
¨ Sketch menu — There are additional options in the sketch menu to help you locate points
for draft geometry, such as relative to the last point selected, and specifying an angle when
creating lines.
Editing Draft Geometry
There are a number of tools that enable you to edit draft geometry, including the following:
• Trim — You can trim or extend geometry, or break the geometry into smaller segments.
• Translate and rotate — You can translate or rotate geometry to a new location.
• Mirror — You can mirror geometry about a construction line.
• Stretch — You can temporarily group selected objects and stretch them all in a given direction.
• Scale — You can scale geometry relative to a selected point.
Grouping draft geometry — You can group draft entities together and manipulate the group using
various editing tools.
PROCEDURE - Creating and Editing Draft Geometry

Drawing_Details\Draft_Geometry DRAFT_DATA .DRW
Task 1: Add details to the drawing by creating and editing draft geometry.
2. Create a chamfer in the top view.
• In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab.
• Click Chamfer from the Sketching group.
• Press CTRL, and select the vertical and
horizontal edges, in the top view.
• Click OK.
• In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, type 15
in the D field.
• Click OK > OK.

3. Create a vertical draft line to represent the
chamfer in the front view.
• Click Line from the Sketching group.
• Click Select References in the Snapping
References dialog box.
• Select the chamfer line, as shown.
• Select the horizontal line in the front view, as
shown.
• Middle-click in the background.
• Right-click and select Angle .
• Type 90 in the Angle field and press ENTER.
• Sketch a vertical line starting at the endpoint
of the chamfer and finishing at the horizontal
snapping reference in the front view, as
shown.
4. Trim the end of the line in the front view.

• Click Bound from the Trim group.
• Select the horizontal line in the front view as
the boundary, and then select the vertical line
as the line to trim.
• Notice the vertical line is trimmed, as shown.
5. Create a horizontal draft line to represent the

chamfer in the side view.
• Select the chamfer line.
• Right-click and select Angle .
• Type 180 in the Angle field and press ENTER.
• Sketch a horizontal line starting at the
endpoint of the chamfer and finishing
anywhere beyond the side view, as shown.

6. Divide the line in the side view.
• Click Divide at Intersection from the Trim
group.
• Select the vertical and horizontal lines in the
side view, as shown.
7. Divide the line again in the side view.
• Select the divided horizontal line and the
vertical line in the side view, as shown.
8. Delete the two unwanted horizontal lines.
• Press CTRL and select the two unwanted
horizontal lines.
toolbar.
• Click Update Draft from the Update group.
entities.

Exercise 1: Adding Draft Geometry to a Drawing
Objectives
• Import 2-D drawing data into a drawing.
• Create draft geometry in a drawing.
• Edit draft geometry in a drawing.
• Use existing draft geometry when creating draft entities.
Scenario
You have been assigned the task of making minor edits to a drawing. This involves adding draft
geometry to a drawing and editing the draft geometry.
Drawing_Details\Draft_Geometry TRIGGER_DRAFTED.DRW
Task 1: Import 2-D drawing data into a drawing.
2. Click Import Drawing/Data from the Insert group.
3. Select TRIGGER_DRAWING.IGS.
4. Click Import.
• Select the No Views option.
• Select the Automatically Associate Dimensions check box.
• Select the Import User Colors check box.
• Clear all other check box selections.
• Click OK.
• Notice drawing data is imported into the drawing.

Task 2: Temporarily hide drawing dimensions.
2. Select Dimension from the Selection Filter drop-down list in the Status bar.
3. Drag a window to select all dimensions in the drawing.
• Right-click and select Erase from the mini toolbar.
• Click in the background to de-select any items.
• Notice all dimensions are no longer displayed.
4. Select General from the Selection Filter drop-down list in the Status bar.
Task 3: Create 2-D draft geometry in the front view.

1. Zoom in to the front view in the drawing.
2. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab.
3. Create a drafted line in the front view.
• Select the horizontal axis line, as shown.
• Start sketching a line from the selected
vertex. Drag the end point of the line to a new
location, as shown.
• Right-click and select Angle.
• Type 45 in the Angle field, and press ENTER.
• Notice the line now extends along an angle of
45 degrees to the horizontal.

4. Complete sketching the line.
• Click to locate the line endpoint at
approximately the position shown.
5. Create a second line perpendicular and equal in

length to the previous line.
• Start sketching a line from the selected
reference vertex.
• Drag the end point of the line until the line
is perpendicular and equal in length to the
previous line, as shown.
• Click to locate the line endpoint at this
position.
6. Middle-click to complete sketching lines.

highlighted items.
7. Create an arc offset from existing geometry.

• In the Sketching group, select Offset Edge
from the Edge types drop-down menu.
• Select the arc, as shown.
• Type 2 as the offset value, and press ENTER.

8. Complete creating arc geometry.
• Middle-click twice to stop creating arcs.
highlighted items.
• Click Update Draft from the Update group
to regenerate draft entities.
Task 4: Trim the drafted entities.

1. Trim the lines in the front view using the larger
arc as a boundary.
• Select the Sketch tab.
• Click Bound from the Trim group.
• Select the arc as the boundary.
• Select the first drafted line at the location
shown.
• Notice the selected line is trimmed.
• Select the second drafted line at the location
shown.
• Notice the second selected line is also
trimmed.
• Middle-click to complete trimming.

2. Trim the lines in the front view using the smaller
arc as a boundary.
• Click Bound .
• Select the arc shown as the boundary.
• Select the first drafted line at the location
shown.
• Notice the selected line is trimmed.
• Select the second drafted line at the location
shown.
• Notice the second selected line is also
trimmed.
3. Trim one end of the arc.

• Click Bound .
• Select the line shown as the boundary.
• Select the arc at the location shown.

4. Trim the other end of the arc.
• Click Bound .
• Select the line shown as the boundary.
• Select the arc at the location shown.
Task 5: Create projected detail in the side view.

1. Create references in the front view for the
projected lines.
• Select the horizontal axis line in the front view,
as shown.
• Select the sketched arc in the front view, as
shown.

2. Create two horizontal lines to represent projected detail in the side view.
• Sketch a horizontal line starting at the upper endpoint of the arc and finishing to the right
of the side view, as shown.
• Sketch a second horizontal line starting at the lower endpoint of the arc and finishing to the
right of the side view, as shown.
• Middle-click to complete sketching.
3. Create two vertical lines offset from the

centerline in the side view.
• Select Offset Edge from the Edge types
drop-down menu.
• Select the vertical centerline, as shown.
• Type 3.5 as the offset value, and press ENTER.
• Select the same vertical centerline.
• Type –3.5 as the offset value, and press
ENTER.
• Middle-click twice to complete offsetting.
highlighted items.

Task 6: Trim the drafted lines in the side view.
1. Divide the lines in the side view.
• Click Divide at Intersection from the Trim
group.
• Consecutively select the vertical and
horizontal lines in each corner of the drafted
rectangle, as shown.
• Middle-click to complete dividing.
2. Delete the unwanted lines.

• Press CTRL and select the eight unwanted
lines, as shown.
toolbar.

Task 7: Create projected details in the section view.
1. First mirror drafted entities in the front view.
• Click Mirror from the Edit group.
• Drag a window and select the three drafted entities in the front view, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Select the vertical centerline to mirror about.
• Notice that mirrored geometry is created.
2. Move the mirrored drafted entities to the section view.

• Click Translate from the Edit group.
• Drag a window and select the mirrored drafted entities in the front view, as shown.
• Middle-click to complete selecting.
• In the Select Point dialog box, click Vertex .
• Click in the Vertex collector to activate it.
• Select the circle as the reference in the front view, as shown and click OK.
• Pan to the section view.
• Select the circle as the reference in the section view, as shown and click OK.
• Notice that the mirrored entities have been moved to the section view.


Understanding Drawing Symbols
Drawing symbols are collections of draft geometry and text that you can place on drawings.
Drawing Symbol Theory: Symbol Types:
• Geometry and Te xt • Simple
• Customized or Standard • Generic
• Symbol Definition and Instance – Surface Finish
• Storing Symbols – Weld
– pro_symbol_dir Configuring and Using Symbols:
• Simple and Generic Symbols
• Symbol Gallery — define symbols.
• Symbols in 3-D Models
• Symbol Palette — common symbols.
– Show or erase in drawings.
• Custom Drawing Symbol Dialog Box — use
customized symbol instances.
• Surface Finish Symbols — use system surface finish
symbols.
Figure 1 – Symbol Palette Examples Figure 2 – Surface finish and Weld Symbols
Drawing Symbols Theory
Drawing symbols consist of draft geometry and text. You can use them as simple labels in drawings,
or to represent more complicated objects such as electrical components. You can create your own
customized symbols and store them in a library. In addition, you can use the standard symbols supplied
with Creo Parametric. These symbols include surface finish symbols and weld symbols.
• When you initially create a symbol, it is added to the current drawing symbol gallery as a symbol
definition. Whenever you place a symbol on a drawing, it is added as a copy of the definition called
an instance.
• By default, symbols are saved to the current working directory. However, you can use the
configuration option pro_symbol_dir to specify an alternate directory.
• You can define and store symbols as simple or generic. Simple symbols have fixed graphic and
text content, and each instance is identical. Generic symbols are composed of different groups of
graphic elements saved within the definition.
• You can also place symbols in 3-D models. You can show or erase any symbols placed this way in
a drawing using the Show/Erase dialog box.
Symbols Types
A symbol definition is a collection of properties that determine its attachment leader options, its graphic
appearance, and graphic groups if any. When you place an instance, you can edit the properties of
the instance from those of the definition. For example, you can edit the leader attachment style for
one instance, or edit which groups appear in a generic instance, without redefining the style for the
remainder of the instances on a drawing sheet.
You can use either standard supplied symbols, or customize your own symbols. In both cases, you
can use two different types of drawing symbols:
• Simple — These symbols have fixed graphic and text content. Each instance, or placement, of the
symbol is identical. The graphic and textual content remain unchanged.
• Generic — These symbols are composed of different groups of graphic elements saved within the
definition. Each instance contains geometry or textual content that can vary. You can select the
graphic and textual content from a common group of symbol attributes during placement. You can
create different symbols from one "generic" symbol definition.
There are also two types of generic system symbols supplied with Creo Parametric:
• Surface Finish Symbols — A set of generic surface finish symbols that can vary when placed.
• Weld Symbols — A set of generic system symbols adhering to the ANSI or ISO standards for creating
welding, brazing, and examination symbols in drawings.
Configuring and Using Symbols
There are a number of different tools that you can use to configure symbols and place them on
drawings, including the following:
• The Symbol Gallery ( Symbol Gallery ) — A collection of symbol definitions that have instances
within the drawing. You can use the Symbol Gallery to define new symbols, or redefine existing
symbols.
• The Symbol Palette ( Symbol From Palette ) — A .drw file used to store frequently used instances
of symbols. It is a convenient way of finding and placing simple common symbols.
• The Custom Drawing Symbol dialog box ( Custom Symbol ) — Enables you to create custom
instances from generic definitions. When you place the instance, you can specify the graphics
displayed, and the size, the color, and the values of variable text within the symbol.
• Surface Finish Symbols ( Surface Finish ) — Provide access to menu manager commands that
enable you to select and use the system surface finish symbols.
Using Surface Finish Symbols

You can add surface finish symbols to a drawing using the available standard surface finish
symbols. You can also create and use your own surface finish symbols.
Surface Finish Symbols: Attachment options for placing symbols:
• Standard set of generic symbols • Leader
• Location — <load-point>/symbols/surffins • Entity
• Consist of building blocks or groups • Normal
• Types • No Leader
– Generic/Machined/Unmachined • Offset
¨ Standard/No_value
• Associated with a single surface
– No multiple placements
• User-defined surface finish symbols
– pro_surface_finish_dir
Figure 1 – Symbol Finish Examples and Attachment Options

Using Surface Finish Symbols
A set of standard generic surface finish symbols is available in Creo Parametric. You must understand a
number of key points before using these symbols.
• The symbols are located in the directory <load-point>/symbols/surffins, where <load-point> is the
directory where Creo Parametric has been installed.
• The symbols consist of building blocks, or groups. To create a desired instance, you must select
the groups that you want to include in the symbol and specify required information, such as surface
roughness.
• The symbols are divided into three types: generic, machined, and un-machined. You can place each
type with a surface roughness value (standard), or without a surface finish value (no_value).
• Surface finishes are associated with surfaces in a part, not entities or views in a drawing. Each surface
finish symbol applies to the entire surface. If you specify a new surface finish for a surface that
already has one, then the surface finish information is redefined and the existing symbol is replaced
with a new one. Just as you cannot display the same dimension in two different views, you cannot
display the same surface finish in two drawing views.
• If you create and add your own surface finish symbols, you can specify their location by setting the
configuration file option pro_surface_finish_dir.
• When placing a symbol you must specify how the instance is attached to the selected reference
using one of the following options:
– Leader — Creates the symbol with a leader.
– Entity — Attaches the symbol to an entity (model edge or draft geometry).
– Normal — Places the symbol normal to the selected edge, entity, or dimension.
– No Leader — Creates a symbol that is unattached.
– Offset — Creates a symbol without leaders that is placed relative to a detail entity.

PROCEDURE - Using Surface Finish Symbols
Drawing_Details\Symbols_Surface-Finish GEARBOX.DRW
Task 1: Place surface finish symbols in a drawing.
2. Place a surface finish symbol on a 3-D view.
• Click Surface Finish from the Annotations
group.
• Double-click the Machined folder.
• Select the STANDARD1.SYM symbol.
• Click Open.
• Select With Leaders from the Placement
Type drop-down menu.
• Select On Surface from the Next Leader
drop-down menu.
• Select a point on the surface in the 3-D view,
as shown.
• Middle-click a location outside the view, as
shown.
• In the Surface Finish dialog box, select the
Variable Te xt tab.
• If necessary, type 32 for the roughness_height
value, and click OK.
• Select the arrow head, right-click and select
Arrow Style.
• Select Single Arrow from the drop-down.
highlighted items.
3. Move the symbol to another view.
• Select the surface finish symbol in the 3-D
view.
• Click Move to View from the mini toolbar.
• Select the side view to place the symbol, as
shown.
• Drag the symbol to a new location in the side
view, as shown.
highlighted items.
Note: You can move symbols to different views and edit their attachment points after they have been
placed.

4. Edit the properties of the surface finish symbol.
• Select the surface finish symbol in the side
view.
• Type 0.2 in the Height field.
• Select the Variable Te xt tab.
• Type 30 in the roughness_height field.
• Click OK.
highlighted items.

Using the Symbol Palette and Custom Symbols
The symbol palette is a drawing file that you can use to store frequently used symbols. You can
create custom symbols when placing generic symbols.
Symbol Palette Custom Symbols
• Simple symbols: • Instances configured from generic symbols:
– No variations – Vary graphics and text.
• Symbols in two sections: Placement Method:
– Free placement types
• Select symbol.
– On-entity placement types
• Specify height, angle, color.
Placement Options: • Alternative origin if required.
• Free Placement • Specify group options.
• On-entity Placement • Specify variable text.
• Locate symbol on drawing.
Figure 1 – Free Placement Symbols Figure 2 – Placing Custom Symbols
Symbol Palette Theory

The symbol palette is a drawing file that usually contains simple symbols, without graphic groups
or variable text. The commonly used symbols are arranged in two sections in the palette. The left
section stores the symbols as free-placement types. The right section shows the same symbols as
on-entity placement types.
Placement Options
You can place symbols from the symbol palette using one of the following methods:
• To place a free-placement symbol:
– Select the symbol you want to place. The symbol is highlighted.
– Move the cursor off of the palette and onto the drawing. The symbol is attached to the cursor.
– Drag the cursor to the symbol placement location and click to place it. The symbol is placed,
and the instance remains on the cursor enabling you to place an instance again. Right-click to
cancel placement.
• To place an on-entity symbol:
– Select the symbol to place. The symbol is highlighted, but it is not attached to the cursor.
– Click to select the attachment object in the drawing. The symbol is added, and you may continue
to select attachment points for more symbols.
– Click OK in the Select dialog box to stop placing symbols.
Custom Symbols Theory
The Custom Drawing Symbol dialog box enables you to create custom instances from predefined
generic symbols. When placing custom symbols, you can specify the graphics displayed in a symbol,
and the values of any variable text.
Placement Method
You can place symbols from the Custom Drawing Symbol dialog box using the following method:
• Select the name of the symbol you want to place.
• Specify the type of placement. Many options are available including, free, on-entity, and with leaders.
• In the Properties area, specify the height, angle, and color of the symbol.
• If necessary, specify an alternative origin.
• Select the Grouping tab to specify which groups appear in the instance.
• Select the Variable Te xt tab to select the content of notes appearing with the symbol.
• Move the pointer on the drawing sheet. The symbol is attached to the pointer.
• Click to place the symbol at a required location. You can continue placing more instances at other
locations.
• When you have finished placing symbols, click OK to close the dialog box.
PROCEDURE - Using the Symbol Palette and Custom Symbols

Drawing_Details\Symbols_Palette-Custom SYMBOLS.DRW
Task 1: Place a custom surface finish symbol on a drawing view.
2. Retrieve and configure a custom symbol.
• Select Custom Symbol from the Symbol types drop-down list in the Annotations group.
• Click Browse.
• Click the Working Directory folder.
• Select the SURFTEXTURE.SYM symbol.
• Click Open.
• Select the Grouping tab.
• Select the MACHINED option.
• Select the ROUGHNESS and WAVINESS check boxes.
• Select the WAVE _HEIGHT check box.
• Type 20 in the average roughness text box.
• Type 1.5 in the max waviness height text box.

3. Place the symbol on the drawing.
• Select the General tab.
• Type 0.3 in the Height text box.
• Select With Leaders from the Placement
Type drop-down list.
• Select On Entity from the Next leader
drop-down list.
• Select an edge on the side view, as shown.
• Middle-click to place the symbol away from
the view, as shown.
• Notice that the symbol remains attached to
the cursor even after a symbol is placed.
• Click OK.
highlighted items.
Task 2: Place a symbol from the symbol palette.

1. Start the Symbol Palette tool.
• Select Symbol From Palette from
the Symbol types drop-down list in the
Annotations group.
• Select the instance shown in the free
attachment section.
• The symbol is now attached to the cursor.
• Drag the symbol into the drawing.
• Place the symbol to the right of the top view,
as shown.
• Right-click to stop placing symbol instances.
• Click Close.
highlighted items.

Creating Symbols
You can create symbols and store them in a library for later use.
Creating Symbols Theory Creating Symbols Types

• Symbol Geometry: • Simple Symbols:
– Drafting – Fixed geometry
– Copy from a drawing – Variable or invariable text
– Copy an existing symbol – Scaling option
– Importing data • Generic Symbols
• Symbol Te xt – Symbol families
– Free note: – Geometry groups:
¨ Invariable ¨ Exclusive
¨ Variable ¨ Independent
Figure 1 – Simple Symbol Figure 2 – Exclusive and Independent Groups
Creating Symbols Theory

Drawing symbols consist of draft geometry and text. It is important to understand the options available
when creating symbol geometry and text.
• Symbol geometry — You can create draft geometry in a symbol using the following methods:
– Drafting — You can simply draft the required geometry using various drafting tools.
– Copy from a drawing — You can copy draft entities from a drawing to create symbol geometry.
– Copy an existing symbol — You can copy an existing symbol and modify it to create a new symbol.
– Importing data — You can import 2-D data in the form of IGES, DXF, SET, TIFF, or CGM files. You
can then modify the imported data to configure your symbol geometry.
• Symbol text — You can create text within a symbol as a free note.
– By default, the text is placed as invariable. This means you cannot edit the text and it remains the
same every time you use the symbol.
To create text that varies depending on the placement of the symbol, you can add variable text
to the symbol. To create variable text, you need to enclose the text within two back slashes, for
example, \note\. This enables you to change the value of the text when you place the symbol
on a drawing. You can specify the type of text to show in the note. This can be text, integers, or
floating points. You can also use parameters in variable text, enabling the text to update when the
parameter value changes.
Creating Symbol Types
When creating symbols, there are two types of symbols that you can configure: Simple and Generic.
• Simple symbols have fixed geometry and textual content that can include variable and invariable
text. Although the symbol geometry remains the same, you can scale the symbol during placement.
• A generic symbol enables you to define a family of similar symbols. It contains all entities relating
to the family. You can arrange geometry and text in a generic symbol in groups and subgroups,
creating a tree structure of the symbol definition.
– Each level of symbol definition is described by the group attribute which restricts the selection of
groups at the specified level. There are two types of attributes:
¨ Exclusive — You can select only one group in a symbol instance.
¨ Independent — You can select any number of groups in a symbol instance.
PROCEDURE - Creating Symbols

Drawing_Details\Symbols SYMBOLS.DRW
Task 1: Create a simple symbol with variable text.
2. Create a new symbol.
• Select Symbol Gallery from Symbol types
drop-down menu in the Annotations group.
• Click Define.
• Type Delta as the name and press ENTER.
• Notice the symbol editing window opens with
options to create draft geometry.
3. Copy draft geometry from the drawing.
• Click Copy Drawing.
• Drag a window to select the draft geometry
from the drawing, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Notice the selected geometry is copied into
the symbol edit window.
4. Configure variable text in the symbol.
• Click Insert > Note.
• Click Make Note.
• Select a location within the symbol geometry,
as shown.
• Type \num\.
• Press ENTER twice, to finish typing text.
• Place the note, as shown.

5. Open the Symbol Attributes dialog box.
• Click Done.
• Notice the Symbol Definition Attributes dialog
box appears.
6. Configure the placement attributes.
• Select the Free check box.
• Select the top arc in the geometry, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Select the Left Leader check box.
• Select the left arc in the geometry, as shown.
• Select the Right Leader check box.
• Select the right arc in the geometry, as shown.
7. Configure the symbol height.

• From the Symbol instance height options,
select the Variable - text related option.
• Select the text, as shown.
8. Configure the variable text in the symbol.

• Type values 1 to 5 in the Preset values for:
num text box, as shown.
• Select the Integer option.
9. Complete the symbol configuration and save the symbol.

• Click OK from the Symbol Definition Attributes dialog box.
• Click Done in the Symbol Edit menu.
• Click Write in the Sym Gallery menu.
• Press ENTER to accept the default path for storing symbols.
10. Click Done.
Note: You must click Write to save the symbol. If you do not complete this step the symbol is only
stored in the current drawing, and is not available for use in other drawings. You can assign the default
path by selecting Symbol Gallery from the Symbol types drop-down menu in the Annotations group.
Then click Symbol Dir.

Embedding Images in Drawings
You can embed raster images into a drawing.
• Variety of supported formats.

• Control placement:
– Location
– Scale
– Rotation
• Control transparency
• Does not depend on Microsoft OLE
Figure 1 – Raster Image Added to Drawing
Embedding Images in Drawings

You can embed raster images into a drawing. For example, you can insert a chart or graph of an oil
pump’s flow curves, or a gear’s involute spline table.
The tool that you use to embed an image in a drawing is the same tool used for 3-D models and Creo
Layout. Click Images from the Insert group, and click Import from the Image group. A variety
of raster image types are supported.
On import, you can specify the location, scale, rotation, and transparency.
Note: There is no dependency on Microsoft Windows OLE.

Exercise 2: Creating and Using Generic Symbols
Objectives
• Create generic symbols.
• Place instances of generic symbols.
Scenario
You have been tasked with creating a generic symbol which will form part of a symbol library. After
you have created the symbol, you need to ensure that it is working correctly by placing symbols on
a drawing.
Drawing_Details\Symbols_Generic GROUPS.DRW
Task 1: Create a symbol and configure symbol groups.
2. Create a new symbol.
• Select Symbol Gallery from the Symbol
types drop-down menu in the Annotations
group.
• Click Define.
• Type Gen_Sym as the name and press ENTER.
• Notice that the symbol editing window opens
with options to create draft geometry.
3. Copy draft geometry from the drawing.
• Click Copy Drawing.
• Drag a window to select all the draft geometry
from the drawing, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Notice that the selected geometry is copied
into the symbol edit window.
4. Create two symbol groups.
• Click Groups > Create.
• Type SQUARE as the name of the group, and
press ENTER.
• Press CTRL, and select the note and all the
geometry except the circle, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Click Groups > Create.
• Type CIRCLE as the name of the group, and
press ENTER.
• Press CTRL and select the note and all the
geometry except the square, as shown.
• Click OK.

Task 2: Create subgroups in the defined groups.
1. Edit the level of group to Square.
• Click Change Level > SQUARE > This Level.
• Notice the change in the appearance of the
symbol, as shown.
2. Create subgroups of the Square.
• Click Create.
• Type LEFT_ARROW as the name of the group,
and press ENTER.
• Press CTRL, and select the note, the left
arrow, and the square geometry, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Click Create.
• Type RIGHT_ARROW as the name of the
group, and press ENTER.
• Press CTRL, and select the note, the right
arrow, and the square geometry, as shown.
• Click OK.
3. Define group attributes.
• Click Group Attr > Exclusive.
• Note exclusive attributes only enable you to
place one instance of the square subgroup
at a time.
4. Edit the level of group to Circle.
• Click Change Level > Up... > Circle > This
Level.
symbol, as shown.
5. Create subgroups of the Circle.
• Click Create.
• Type LEFT_ARROW as the name of the group,
and press ENTER.
• Press CTRL, and select the note, the left
arrow, and the circle geometry, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Click Create.
• Type RIGHT_ARROW as the name of the
group, and press ENTER.
• Press CTRL, and select the note, the right
arrow, and the circle geometry, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Click Group Attr > Independent.
• Note independent attributes enable you to
display the circle with a left arrow, right arrow,
or both arrows.

7. Edit the level of group to the top level.
• Click Change Level > Up... > This Level.
symbol, as shown.
• Click Group Attr > Exclusive.
• Note exclusive attributes enable you to place
either the square or circle, but not both.
9. Open the Symbol Definition Attributes dialog
box.
• Click Done/Return > Done.
• Notice that the Symbol Definition Attributes
dialog box appears.
10. Configure the symbol attributes.
• Select the Free check box.
• Select the circle geometry in the symbol, as
shown.
• Click OK in the Select Point dialog box.
• For the symbol height, select the Variable -
text related option.
• Select the text in the symbol.
• Select the Variable text tab.
• Type 1 in the Preset values for: no field.
11. Complete the symbol configuration and save the symbol.
• Click OK in the Symbol Definition Attributes dialog box.
• Select Done from the Symbol Edit menu.
• Click Symbol Dir.
• Click Open.
• Select Write from the Sym Gallery menu.
• Press ENTER to accept the default path for storing symbols.
• Select Done from the Sym Gallery menu.
Task 3: Place symbol instances on a drawing.
1. Open a drawing.
• Select SYMBOL_PLACEMENT.DRW.
• Click Open.

2. Retrieve and configure a custom symbol.
• Select the Annotate tab.
• Select Custom Symbol from the Symbol
types drop-down menu in the Annotations
group.
• Select GEN_SYM.SYM.
• Click Open.
• Select the Grouping tab.
• Expand the SQUARE option.
• Ensure the LEFT_ARROW option is selected.
• Click in the drawing to place the symbol.
• Select the RIGHT_ARROW option.
Note: Notice that you can only select the LEFT_ARROW or RIGHT_ARROW option. You cannot select
both options because the attributes for the square group are exclusive. Similarly, you can only select the
SQUARE option or the CIRCLE option, as the group attributes are exclusive at this level.
3. Place circle symbol instances.
• Select the CIRCLE option.
• Select the LEFT_ARROW check box.
• Select the RIGHT_ARROW check box.
• Clear the LEFT_ARROW check box.
• Click OK.
highlighted items.
Note: Notice that you can select both circle options together. This is because the attributes for the
circle group are independent.

Module 43
Using Layers in Drawings

Understanding Layers in Drawings
It is important to understand the differences between layers in drawings and models.
Drawing Layers Theory:
• Organize and control detail items.
Drawing Layers:
• From 3-D models.
• From drawing templates.
• Manually create.
• Default layers.
Layer Display in Drawings and Models:
• Independent or dependent.
• Controlled by drawing setup file options.
Figure 1 – Layer Tree in Drawings
Figure 2 – Layer Status Control Figure 3 – Layer Properties Dialog Box

Understanding Layers in Drawings
You can organize and control the display of detail items in drawings, such as dimensions and geometric
tolerances, by assigning them to layers. You can hide and show layers as necessary, which enables you
to control the display of multiple drawing items simultaneously. For example, you can assign notes to a
specific layer and then hide them before plotting a drawing. You can access layers and their contents
from the model tree. To show the layer tree, click Show > Layer Tree in the Model Tree window. The
display status (hidden, unhidden, or isolated) of a layer controls the appearance of items in the layer.
You can create layers in drawings from a number of different sources:
• Layers from the 3-D model — Layers that reside in 3-D models are automatically available in the
drawing. You do not need to recreate these layers in a drawing. The layer display status in the
drawing and the 3-D model is either associative or non-associative. When you use the Layers dialog
box or the drawing setup file, you can easily turn the associativity on or off.
• Layers from a drawing template — Layers that reside in the drawing template are automatically
available in a drawing. You can also use the drawing template to standardize default layers. These
layers are added in the drawing in addition to the model layers. As a best practice, you should
create the default layers that contain 3-D model entities in the part and assembly templates. You
should also create the default layers that contain drawing entities, such as notes and dimensions, in
the drawing templates.
• Layers manually added in the drawing — You can add new layers to a drawing and associate items
with these layers.
• Default layers in drawings — You can automatically place specific drawing item types on a layer by
defining a default layer. You can use the def_layer configuration option to specify which drawing
item type to automatically place on a layer. When you create or show a drawing item type, it
is simultaneously placed on the layer. For example, you can use the layer_dim_(layer_name)
configuration option to specify a default layer for shown or created dimensions. Any shown or
created dimensions are then automatically placed on this layer.
Layer Display in Drawings and Models
By default, drawing layers are independent of models layers. This has two implications:
• First, modifying the display of a layer in a drawing does not modify any parts or assemblies. This
means that you do not need to save parts and assemblies when you edit and save layers in drawings.
• Second, it ensures that the drawing layer status does not change, upon retrieval, regardless of any
changes that may have taken place to the model layers.
However, two drawing setup file options enable the relationship between drawing layers and model
layers to change:
• If the setting for draw_layer_overrides_model is yes, then items assigned to model layers are
automatically included in a drawing layer with the same name. The default value is no. Therefore,
this does not occur.
• If the detail setting for ignore_model_layer_status is yes, then the display setting for model layers
in the drawing is totally independent of the drawing's model. To hide layers without affecting the
status of the drawing model layer, you can use Save Status in the drawing, to save any changes. You
can save the drawing, and when subsequently retrieved, it retains its model layer settings. This is
useful when plotting drawings.
• You can configure these two options outside of the drawing setup file in the Layer Status Control
dialog box. Edits here are automatically propagated to the drawing setup file.

You can use layers in drawings to control the display of detail items such as dimensions.
Configuring Items in Layers:
• Add Items
– Select manually
– Rules
– Set active
– Default layers
• Edit Layers
• Layer Display
– Hide/Unhide/Isolate
• Save Layer Status
Layer Display — Individual Views
Figure 1 – Changing View Status for a
• Control status for selected views. Drawing View
• Alternatively views drawing dependent.
Figure 2 – Active Drawing View

You can add detail items to layers, such as shown dimensions, created dimensions, notes, and
geometric tolerances. You can then control their display using the hide and unhide layer options.
• You can add items to layers using the following options:
– Select manually – After creating a layer in a drawing, you can select items manually using the
Layer Properties dialog box. You can filter your selection to include for example only dimensions
using the selection filter.
– Rules – You can use rules to categorize a type of feature or detail item in a layer. When you create
a rule, a search is performed for the type of detail item. You can save the result in a new layer. You
can also configure the rule to update the layer as new detail items are added to the drawing.
– Set Active – Enables you to designate a layer and automatically add all new entities, that can be
added to layers, to the selected layer. Activating a different layer deactivates any currently active
layer. This enables you to quickly switch to a different layer.
– Default layers – You can use default layers to automatically add items to layers. However, these
layers are not retroactive. You need to manually add existing items to a default layer.
• Edit layers – You can perform various editing operations on items assigned to layers. For example,
you can select items and either cut or copy and then paste them to other layers. You can also
remove items from layers.
• Layer display – The display status controls the appearance of items in the layer:
– Hide – Removes any item on the selected layer from display.
– Unhide – Displays all items on that layer.
– Isolate – Displays selected layers and hides all non-isolated layers.
• Save layer status — You must save any edits to layer display status using Save Status in the layer
tree. You must do this before saving drawings, otherwise edits are not saved with the drawing.
Individual View — Layer Display
Drawing views do not have individual layers for each view. However, by default you can control the
layer display status of drawing layers independently for each view. Alternatively, you can make the
drawing view layer display dependent on the drawing. For example, you can selectively hide a layer
containing notes on an individual view.
• To specify different layer status for an individual view, click Active Object in the layer tree, then
select the drawing view you wish to make active. You can then independently edit the display
status of layers for that view.
• To make the drawing view dependent on the drawing layers click Active Object in the layer tree,
then click Layer > Drawing Dependent.
PROCEDURE - Using Layers in Drawings

Drawing\Layers_Using PISTON.PRT
Task 1: Configure layers in a drawing to control detail item display.
2. Check the layer status in the drawing model.
• In the model tree, click Show .
• Click Layer Tree .
• Notice that all model layers are hidden, as
shown.
3. Check the layer status in the drawing.
• Double-click PISTON.DRW.
• Notice that the model layers are not hidden,
as shown.
• Notice that all the datum features appear in
the drawing.

4. Temporarily change the drawing layer status in the drawing.
• In the layer tree, click Settings .
• Click Drawing Layer Status.
• In the Layer Status Control dialog box, select the No - Display status of layers is controlled by
the model radio button. Click OK.
• Notice that all model layers are now hidden. The layer status is aligned with the model.
• In the layer tree, click Settings .
• Click Drawing Layer Status.
• In the Layer Status Control dialog box, select the Yes - Display status of common layers is
controlled separately in drawing radio button. Click OK.
5. Select and hide all model layers.
• In the layer tree, select layer 01__PRT_ALL_
DTM_PLN, press SHIFT, and select layer
COPY_SURF.
• Right-click and select Hide.
• Notice that all model layers are again hidden,
as shown.
6. Add items to a layer by manual selection.
• In the layer tree, click Layers drop-down
menu.
• Click New Layer.
• Type Dimensions in the Name text box.
• Edit the selection filter in the Status bar to
Dimension.
• Drag a window to select all dimensions on the
drawing. Click OK.
• In the layer tree, select layer DIMENSIONS,
if necessary.
• Notice that all dimensions are now hidden.

7. Add items to a layer using the search tool.
• Click Find in the Status bar.
• Select Note from the Look for drop-down list.
• Click Find Now. Notice 19 items were found.
• Click Options and select Save Query.
• Type Notes in the Enter layer name for rules
text box. Click OK.
• Click Close from the Search Tool dialog box.
• In the layer tree, expand layer NOTES.
• Select note ID9(NOTE), press SHIFT, and
select note ID22(NOTE).
• Right-click and select Remove Item. Click
Yes.
• In the layer tree, select layer NOTES.
• Notice that all notes outside the drawing table
are hidden.
Exercise 1: Managing Layers in Drawings

Objectives
• Add layers to a drawing.
• Use different methods to place detail items on layers.
• Change the display of layers in drawings.
• Configure the layer display of individual views in a drawing.
Scenario
You need to configure layers in the drawing in order to change the display of certain detail items.
Drawing\Layers_Managing GEARBOX_FRONT.DRW
Task 1: Add all created dimensions in the drawing to a new layer.
2. Check the layer status in the drawing model.
• Notice all model layers are hidden, as shown.

3. Search for created dimensions in the drawing.
• Select Find from the Status bar.
• Select GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT (VIEW ID 1)
from the Look in drop-down list.
• Select Dimension from the Look for
drop-down list.
• Select the Type option from the Rule area.
• Select Geometry Driven from the Value
drop-down list.
• Click Find Now. Notice seven items were
found.
4. Place the search results on a layer.
• Click Options, and select Save Query.
• Type CREATED_DIM in the Enter layer name
for rules field.
• Click OK.
• Notice the new layer in the layer tree.
Task 2: Add all model dimensions on the drawing to a new layer.
1. Search for model dimensions in the drawing.
• Ensure the Search Tool dialog box is still open.
• If necessary, select Dimension from the Look
for drop-down list.
• Select the Type option in the Rule area.
• Select Controlling Geometry from the Value
drop-down list.
• Click Find Now, and notice that 39 items were
found.
2. Place the search results on a layer.
• Click Options, and select Save Query.
• Type DIMENSIONS in the Enter layer name
for rules field.
• Click OK.
• Notice the new layer in the layer tree, as
shown.
• Click Close in the Search Tool dialog box.
• Click Update Sheets from the Update
group.

Task 3: Copy the created dimensions into the DIMENSIONS layer.
1. Add the created dimensions to the DIMENSIONS
layer.
• Expand the CREATED_DIM layer in the layer
tree.
• Expand the GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT node in
the layer tree.
• Select created dimension ad158, press SHIFT,
and select created dimension ad168, as
shown.
• Right-click and select Copy Item.
• Expand the DIMENSIONS layer.
• Expand the GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT node in
the layer tree.
• Select the GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT node in the
layer tree.
• Right-click and select Paste Item.
• Scroll down the layer tree. Notice the
created dimensions have been added to the
DIMENSIONS layer, as shown.
2. Hide the DIMENSIONS and CREATED_DIM layers.
• Collapse the DIMENSIONS layer.
• Collapse the CREATED_DIM layer.
• Select layer DIMENSIONS, press CTRL, and select layer CREATED_DIM.
Task 4: Add all reference dimensions on the drawing to a new layer.
1. Add items to a layer by manual selection.
menu.
• Click New Layer.
• Type REF_DIM in the Name field.
• Press CTRL and select the four reference
dimensions on the drawing, as shown.
• Click OK.
• Notice the new layer in the layer tree, as
shown.
• If Necessary, select layer REF_DIM.

2. Reset the layer display status.
• Click anywhere in the layer tree.
• Right-click and select Reset Status.
• Notice that all the three layers created in the
drawing are now unhidden.
• Notice also that all the dimensions now
appear.
Task 5: Change the layer display for a view to be independent of the drawing layers.
1. Change the layer display in a view.
• Click the Active Object selection tool.
• Notice that all views appear with dashed
boxes around them.
• Select view SECTION C-C in the drawing.
• Notice that the layer tree shows the display
status for this view, not the drawing.
• Select layer DIMENSIONS.
• Notice that only the created dimensions in
view SECTION C-C are hidden.
2. Change the layer status to be drawing

dependent.
menu.
• Click Drawing Dependent > Yes.
• Notice the layer tree now shows the display
status for the drawing.
• Notice also all the dimensions now appear.


Module 44
Creating and Using Tables in Drawings

Inserting Tables
You can insert tables into a drawing using either the Table Grid or the Insert Table dialog box.
• Table Grid:
– Visually drag the desired number of rows
and columns.
– Click in the drawing to place the table.
– The table origin is the upper-left by
default.
• You can also use the Insert Table Dialog box.
– Specify table options.
– Select Point dialog box.
Figure 1 – Inserting a Table using the Table Grid
Figure 2 – Inserting a Table Figure 3 – Table Placement Options

Inserting Tables
You can insert tables into the drawing using either of the following two methods:
• Table Grid – Enables you to visually drag the desired number of rows and columns for the table. This
grid is similar to the Microsoft grid UI. Once you drag the desired table size, click in the drawing to
place the table. By default, the table origin is the upper-left when placing it in the drawing. However,
you can change this in the table properties.
• Insert Table dialog box – Available options for inserting a table using the Insert Table dialog box
include:
– Direction – Specify rightward and descending, leftward and descending, rightward and ascending,
or leftward and ascending.
– Number of rows and columns – Specify the table size by typing in the desired number of rows
and columns in fields.
– Column height
– Column width
At the point when you go to place the table, the Select Point dialog box displays. This dialog box
enables you to specify the reference type to which you snap the table. Options include:
– Free Point .
– Absolute Coordinates .
– Relative Coordinates .
– Object or Entity .
– Vertex .
PROCEDURE - Inserting Tables
Drawing_Details\Tables _Inserting TABLES_1.DRW
Task 1: Insert a table using the Table Grid.
3. In the Table group, click Table , move the
cursor to highlight a 3x6 Table grid, and click
to select it.
4. Move the cursor to locate the table near the

upper-right corner of the drawing sheet.
5. Click to place the table.
6. Zoom in on the table to view it.

Task 2: Insert a Table using the Insert Table dialog box.
1. Select Insert Table from the Table types

drop-down menu in the Table group.
2. In the Insert Table dialog box, click Leftward
and Ascending .
• Type 3 for the Number of Rows.
• Click OK.

3. In the Select Point dialog box, click Vertex .
4. Select the vertex in the drawing title block.
5. Click OK from the Select Point dialog box.

Editing Table Properties
You can edit different properties of a created drawing table.
• Select the desired table entity.
– Cell, row, column, table
• Use ribbon icons.
• Use Table Properties dialog box.
– Origin and growth
– Row height, column width
– Intelligent wrapping
¨ Automatic Height Adjustment Figure 1 – Selecting Table Entities
¨ Wrap Te xt
Figure 2 – Table Ribbon Icons Figure 3 – Editing Table Properties

Table Selection
To edit a table’s properties, you must first select the table or the portion you wish to edit. You cursor
over a table cell and right-click, or query, to cause the following order of table entity preselection:
• Cell
• Row
• Column
• Table
Once the desired entity has been pre-highlighted, click to select it.
Tip: You can cursor over the top-left corner of a table to pre-highlight the entire table for selection.
Basic Table Editing using Ribbon Icons
Now that the desired table entity is selected, you can right-click and select from a set of options or use
the icons in the ribbon. The following are commonly used icons for editing the table or table entities:
• Add Row .
• Add Column .
• Height and Width .
• Merge Cells .
Editing Table Properties
You can also access the Table Properties dialog box once the table is selected. You can edit the
following table properties using the dialog box:
• Modify the table origin and growth direction.
• Modify the row height or column width.
• Specify intelligent wrapping of text in table cells. Options include:
– Automatic Height Adjustment – Used for rows.
– Wrap Te xt – Used for columns.
String parameter values used in tables will automatically wrap in table cells.
Adding Te xt to a Table
To add text to a table, double-click the cell you wish to modify. In the ribbon, the Format tab is then
enabled. The Format tab contains options to modify the text style and insert symbols. Type in the
desired text and click in the background to place the text when complete.
Detail Options
There are also default detail options that you can specify for tables. Those options include:
• default_table_row_height
• default_table_column_width
• default_table_rows
• default_table_columns
PROCEDURE - Editing Table Properties

Drawing_Details\Tables _Editing TABLES_2.DRW
Task 1: Edit the first table.
3. In the graphics window, query three times over
a cell and select the entire table.
4. Right-click and select Properties from the

mini toolbar.
5. In the Table Properties dialog box, edit the
direction to Leftward and Descending .
• Type 15 as the Width in number of characters.
• Click OK.
6. Click Add Column from the Rows & Columns

group.
7. Select the location in the table.

8. Notice that the added column grows to the left
in the table.
9. Middle-click to stop adding columns.
10. Query the newly added column and select it.

11. Click Delete from the mini toolbar.
12. Query the entire table and select it.

13. Click Delete from the mini toolbar.
Task 2: Edit the second table.

1. In the table just above the title block, select the
first cell, press CTRL, and select the fourth cell.
2. Click Merge Cells from the Rows & Columns

group.
3. Double-click the merged cell and notice the

Format tab appears in the ribbon.
4. Type REVISION HISTORY and click in the
background to place the text.
• Click Center from the Style group.
• Click in the background to de-select the table.
5. Double-click in the other cells and enter the text

as shown.

6. Query the DESC column and select it.
7. Click Height and Width from the mini toolbar.
8. In the Height and Width dialog box, type 20 as
the Width in number of characters.
• Click OK.
9. Click Add Row from the Rows & Columns

group.
10. Select the row border just above the REV cell.
11. Notice that the table grew upwards.
12. Middle-click to stop adding rows.
Creating Tables from File

You can insert tables from a file or using quick tables.
• Table From File
– Ribbon Options
• Quick Tables Gallery:
– Contains a gallery of previously created
tables with thumbnails
– User Tables
Figure 1 – Table Ribbon Options
– System Tables
• Place the table
– Select Point dialog box
Figure 2 – Browsing for a Table From File Figure 3 – Quick Tables Gallery
Creating Tables from File
You can insert tables from a file. Table files that were previously saved can be reused throughout your
organization. You can save your own created tables as files, if desired.
To insert a table from a file, click Table from File from the Table group or select it from the Table
drop-down menu, also located in the Table group. You then browse to the desired location that
contains saved tables, such as your working directory.
Creating Tables from the Quick Tables Gallery
You can also select a previously created table from the Tables Gallery. To access the Tables Gallery,
click Table from the Table group and then select Quick Tables . A gallery of previously created
tables with thumbnails displays. You can also click More User Tables to access tables shared in
your organization in the pro_table_dir path. Click More System Table to access system tables
stored in the <loadpoint>/text/tables directory.
Once you have selected your desired quick table, the Select Point dialog box displays, enabling you to
specify the reference type to which the table snaps. Options include:
• Free Point – Enables you to select a free point on the drawing.
• Absolute Coordinates – Enables you to specify absolute coordinates to locate the table.
• Relative Coordinates – Enables you to specify relative coordinates to locate the table.
• Object or Entity – Enables you to select a point on a drawing object or entity.
• Vertex – Enables you to select the vertex on a drawing object or entity.
PROCEDURE - Creating Tables from File

Drawing_Details\Tables _From-File TABLES_3.DRW
Task 1: Save a table to file.
3. Query-select the revision history table.
4. Select Save as Table from the Save Table types drop-down menu in the Table group.
5. In the Save Drawing Table dialog box, select Working Directory if necessary, and then type
rev_hist.tbl as the File name.
• Click Save.
Task 2: Insert a Table from File.
1. Click Table from File from the Table group.

2. In the Open dialog box, select Working Directory
if necessary and notice that REV_HIST.TBL is
available.
• Select BOM_TABLE.TBL.
• Click Open.
upper-right corner of the sheet.
5. Click in the background to de-select the table.

6. Zoom in to view the table.
Note: This table was created with a Repeat
Region and Report Parameters which enables it
to update to the assembly.
Task 3: Insert a Quick Table .
1. Click Table from the Table group and select

Quick Tables .
2. Scroll and select the tooltable.
right side of the sheet.

5. Click in the background to de-select the table.
6. Zoom in on the table to view it.

Creating Hole Tables
Hole tables can display detailed information for hole features, datum points, and datum axes
within a specified drawing view.
Hole Table Information: Hole Table Setup:

• Location in X and Y coordinates: • Hole-naming options.
– Holes • Number of decimals displayed.
– Datum Points • Label position and size.
– Datum Axes • Sorting options.
• Hole diameter. Changes only apply to new hole tables.
• User-defined parameters.
Figure 1– Hole Table Labels Figure 2– Hole Table
Hole Table Information

You can create hole tables for a specified view. This functionality automatically creates a table that
documents the locations of hole features, datum points, and datum axes with respect to a selected
model coordinate system. The table can also document each hole diameter, and user-defined feature
parameters.
Hole Table Setup
You can configure the hole table using a number of options in the Hole Table dialog box:
• Hole naming — You can label the holes with alphanumeric or numeric labels.
• Number decimals — You can specify the number of decimal places displayed for the x and y location
and the hole diameter.
• Label position and size — You can edit the default label position and size.
• Sorting options — You can sort the hole listing based on the hole position in x or y or the hole diameter.
Note: Setup changes only apply to newly created hole tables. They do not apply to existing hole tables. If
you need to edit an existing table, you must delete it and then recreate the table.

PROCEDURE - Creating Hole Tables
Drawing_Details\Tables _Hole MUFFLER.DRW
Task 1: Create a hole table.
3. Click Hole Table from the Table group.
4. Configure the hole table options in the Hole Table dialog box.
• Select Alphanumeric from the Naming convention drop-down list. This option labels the holes
using letters or numbers in the drawing view.
5. Generate the hole table.
• Click Create.
• Select coordinate system CSO from the
model tree.
• Select a location at the top of the drawing to
place the hole table, as shown.
• Notice the hole labeling added to the drawing
view.
Note: You cannot edit a hole table setup once it is created. Any edits in the setup only affect newly
created hole tables.
6. Delete the existing hole table.
• Select any cell in the table.
• Select Select Table from the Select Table
types drop-down menu in the Table group.
toolbar.
• Click Yes to delete the table.
7. Edit the hole table setup.
• Click Hole Table from the Table group.
• In the Hole Table dialog box, type 2 in the Decimal places field.
• Select Numeric from the Naming convention drop-down list.

8. Generate a new hole table.
• Click Create.
• Select coordinate system CSO from the
model tree.
• Select a location at the top of the drawing to
place the hole table, as shown.
• Notice that the updated hole labeling was
added to the drawing view.
Exercise 1: Creating a Revision Table

Objectives
• Create a table in a drawing.
• Add text to a table.
• Configure table cell and text properties.
• Store tables for future use.
Scenario
You have been assigned the task of creating a Revision Table . First you need to create a Table and
then configure for future use.
Drawing_Details\Tables _Revision PISTON.DRW
Task 1: Crate a table with three columns and three rows using the Table Grid.
2. Create a table and specify column widths and
row heights.
• In the Table group, click Table , move the
cursor to highlight a 3x3 Table grid, and click
to select it.
• Select a location for the top-left corner of the
table, as shown.

3. To specify the width of the first column and
height of the first row, select the top-left cell.
• Click Height and Width from the mini toolbar.
• Ensure Automatic height adjustment is
selected.
• Type 15 in the Width (characters) field and
click OK.
Note: The height can be manually adjusted by
clearing the Automatic height adjustment check box.
4. To specify the width of the second column,
select the top-middle cell.
selected.
click OK.
5. To specify the width of the third column, select
the top-right cell.
selected.
click OK.
Task 2: Add text to the table cells.
1. Add text to cells in the left column.
• Double-click the upper-left cell in the table.
• Type REV. as the text for the cell.
• Click in the background to place the text.
• Double-click the middle-left cell in the table.
• Type 1 as the text for the cell.
• Double-click the lower-left cell in the table.
• Type 2 as the text for the cell.

2. Add text to cells in the center column.
• Double-click the upper-center cell in the
table.
• Type DATE as the text for the cell.
• Double-click the middle-center cell in the
table.
• Type 06-June-2011 as the text for the cell.
• Double-click the lower-center cell in the
table.
• Type 14-June-2011 as the text for the cell.
3. Add text to cells in the right column.
• Double-click the upper-right cell in the table.
• Type DESCRIPTION as the text for the cell.
• Double-click the middle-right cell in the table.
• Type PIN DIA CHANGED as the text for the
cell.
• Double-click the lower-right cell in the table.
• Type TOLERANCE ADDED as the text for the
cell.
Task 3: Edit the width and height of the table cells.
1. To configure the left column width, select the
top-left cell of the table.
• Type 5 in the Width (characters) field.
• Click OK.
• Notice that the left column width has been
updated.
2. To configure the center column width, select

the top-center cell of the table.
• Type 12 in the Width (characters) field.
• Click OK.
• Notice that the center column width has been
updated.

3. To configure the middle row height, select the
left-middle cell of the table.
• Clear the Automatic height adjustment
check box.
• Type 2 in the Height (characters) field field.
• Click OK.
• Notice that the middle row height has been
updated.
Task 4: Configure text within table cells.
1. To configure text wrapping within a cell, select
the middle-right cell of the table.
• Add FROM 8.2 TO 8.0 to the text.
• Click in the background to place the edited
text.
• Notice that the text extends outside the cell.
• With the cell still selected, right-click and
select Wrap Te xt .
• Notice that the text now wraps within the cell.
2. To edit the text style of the top row, select

the upper-left cell, press CTRL, select the
upper-center cell and the upper-right cell.
• Right-click and select Te xt Style .
• Clear the Default check box and select filled
from the Font drop-down list.
• Select Center from the Horizontal drop-down
list.
• Click OK.
Task 5: Edit the number of rows in the table.
1. To add a row to the bottom of the table, click
Add Row from the Rows & Columns group.
• Click the lower horizontal line on the table.
• Notice that an extra row is added.
• Middle-click to exit adding row.

Task 6: Move the table to a new location.
1. To reposition the table in the drawing, select
any cell in the table.
• Move the cursor to the top left corner of the
table, as shown.
• Click the table and drag it to a new location.
• Release the mouse button to place the table
in the new location.
Task 7: Save the table for future use.

1. To store the table, select any cell in the table.
• Select Save as Table from the Save Table types drop-down menu in the Table group.
• Type rev_info in the File name field.
• Click Save.

Module 45
Using Report Information in Drawings

Creating Report Tables
Report tables enable you to create many types of customized reports, including associative bill
of materials in assembly drawings.
Report Tables Overview: Creating Report Tables:
• Customized reports. • Create table.
• Associative information. • Create repeat region.
Repeat Regions: • Add report symbols.
• Update table.
• Expandable cells in tables.
• Set attributes:
• Contain report symbols.
– Duplicates/No
Report Symbols:
Dup-Level
• Add manually or select from list. – Recursive/Flat
• Common report parameters:
– asm.mbr.name – Component name
– asm.mbr.type – Component type
– asm.mbr.user defined – Value of
user-defined parameter
– rpt.index – Index number
– rpt.qty – Item quantity
Figure 1 – Bill of Materials Report Table
Report Tables Overview

Using report tables enables you to create customized reports that are associated with assembly or part
models. They update automatically if changes occur to the referenced model. You can display and
configure the report tables in drawings. You can create several kinds of output using different report
functions. For example, you can create a bill of materials for assemblies. You can also create wire lists
for cabling assemblies, and part catalog tables for family table parts.
Repeat Regions
• Report tables are based on the principle of "smart" table cells called repeat regions. Repeat
regions are user-configured cells within a table that expand or contract to display information from
an associated model.
• The information they contain is determined by text-based report symbols, entered as text into
each cell within the region. For example, in an assembly drawing, you can add the report symbol
asm.mbr.name into a repeat region cell. This automatically expands the report table to list the
component names from the associated assembly.
Report Symbols
• If a table has a repeat region, you can add report symbols into cells within the repeat region. You can
either type the report symbol in manually, or you can select the report symbol from the cascading list
within the Report Symbol dialog box.
• You can use many different report symbols including those that relate to bill of materials, family table
parts, and electrical harness cabling. Some of the more common report symbol parameters relating
to an assembly bill of materials are listed below:
– asm.mbr.name – Displays the name of a component in an assembly.
– asm.mbr.type – Displays the type of component in an assembly.
– asm.mbr.user defined – Displays the value of a user-defined parameter for an assembly member,
for example, cost or vendor.
– rpt.index – Displays the number assigned to each item in a repeat region.
– rpt.qty – Displays the quantity of an item.
Creating Report Tables
To create report tables, you must complete the following steps:
• Create a table – You should position the table appropriately to enable subsequent expansion of the
table without overlapping other detail items.
• Create a repeat region – You need to specify which cells in the table will form the repeat region.
You can configure a simple repeat region which expands in one direction, or a 2-D repeat region
which can expand in both directions.
• Add report symbols – You need to specify which report symbols are added to the repeat region cells.
This determines the type of information displayed in the report table.
• Update table – When you have completed adding report symbols, you need to update the table.
This extracts information from the referenced model and populates the cells in the repeat region.
• Set attributes – In most cases, you need to edit the table attributes to complete the table
configuration. You can configure a number of attributes, including the following:
– There are three options that control the listing of duplicate items:
¨ Duplicates – Lists every occurrence of a component, in a separate row. This is the default option.
¨ No Duplicates – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component only once. For example, if an
assembly has eight bolts, that bolt is only listed once in the table.
¨ No Dup/Level – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component once in each subassembly
in which they occur.
– There are two options that control the search levels for parameters:
¨ Flat – Only top-level items are displayed, the default option.
¨ Recursive – Displays and searches all levels of the assembly for parameters.
PROCEDURE - Creating Report Tables

Drawing_Details\Reports_Creating REPORT.DRW
Task 1: Create a repeat region.
2. Create a repeat region in the table.
• Zoom in to the table.
• Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
• From the menu manager, click Add > Simple.
• Select the lower-left cell in the table, as
shown.
• Select the lower-right cell in the table to
create the repeat region, as shown.
• Click Done.

Task 2: Add report symbols in the repeat region.
1. Add the report index parameter to a table cell.
• Select the first cell in the lower row, as shown.
• Right-click and select Report Parameter.
• Click rpt > index.
• Notice that text is added to the cell.
2. Add the component name parameter to a table

cell.
• Select the second cell in the lower row, as
shown.
• Click asm > mbr > name.
3. Add the component type parameter to the table
cell.
• Select the third cell in the lower row, as
shown.
• Click asm > mbr > type.
4. Add the report quantity parameter to a table

cell.
• Select the fourth cell in the lower row, as
shown.
• Click rpt > qty.
5. Update the repeat region.

• Notice that the table includes duplicate
components and the quantity column is
empty.

6. Change the table attributes to remove duplicate
components.
• Click Attributes.
• Select the repeat region in the table.
• Click No Duplicates > Done/Return > Done.
• Notice that the table lists duplicate
components only once, and the quantity
column is now populated.
Exercise 1: Adding a Bill of Materials Table

Objectives
• Set up repeat regions in a table.
• Create a bill of materials (BOM) table.
• Edit the display of information in a BOM table.
• Add BOM balloons to a drawing view.
Scenario
You need to add a BOM table to ENGINE_ASSEMBLY .DRW. You need to configure the table to list all
components in the assembly, display the cost of each component, and the total cost.
Drawing_Details\Tables _Adding_BOM ENGINE_ASSEMBLY .DRW
Task 1: Create a BOM table in the drawing.
2. Create a repeat region in the table.
• Zoom in to the BOM table located in the
lower-right corner of the drawing.
• From the menu manager, click Add > Simple.
• Select the middle-left cell in the table, as
shown.
• Select the middle-right cell in the table to
create the repeat region, as shown.
• Click Done.
• If necessary, click Switch Symbols from
the Data group to view the Repeat Region.

Task 2: Add report symbols in the repeat region.
1. Add the report index parameter to a table cell.
• Select the first cell in the second row, as
shown.
• Click rpt > index.
• Notice that the text is added to the cell.
2. Add the component name parameter to a table
cell.
• Select the second cell in the second row, as
shown.
• Click asm > mbr > name.
3. Add the component type parameter to a table
cell.
• Select the cell above Type, as shown.
• Click asm > mbr > type.
4. Add the report quantity parameter to a table
cell.
• Select the cell above Qty, as shown.
• Click rpt > qty.
5. Add a user-defined component parameter to a
table cell.
• Select the cell above Cost/Unit, as shown.
• Click asm > mbr > User Defined.
• Type cost and press ENTER.
6. Add a relation parameter to a table cell.
• Select the cell above Cost, as shown.
• Click rpt > rel > User Defined.
• Type total_cost and press ENTER.
• Click Switch Symbols from the Data group.
• Notice that the table updates. However,
it includes duplicate components and the
quantity column is empty.

Task 3: Edit the table attributes to remove duplicate components and search all subassemblies for
information.
1. Edit the table attributes.
• Click Repeat Region .
• Click No Duplicates > Recursive >
Done/Return > Done.
• Notice that the table lists duplicate
components only once, and the quantity
column is now populated. Notice also that
all components and subassemblies are now
listed in the table.
Task 4: Add a relation to calculate the cost per component in the table.
1. Add a relation to the repeat region.
• From the menu manager, click Relations.
• Select anywhere within the repeat region.
• In the Relations dialog box, expand Local
Parameters.
• Right-click TOTAL _COST and select Insert to
Relations.
• Click the = sign.
• Right-click ASM_MBR_COST and select Insert
to Relations.
• Click the x sign.
• Right-click RPT_QTY and select Insert to
Relations.
• Click OK.
• Click Update Tables .
• Notice that the total cost is now calculated
for each component and displayed in the cost
column.
2. Reorder the parts and assemblies by editing the
table attributes.
• Click No Dup/Level > Done/Return > Done.
• Notice that each subassembly is now grouped
with its own components.

Task 5: Filter assembly items from the table listing.
1. Filter items using a rule.
• From the menu manager, click Filters.
• Click By Rule > Add.
• Type &asm.mbr.type != assembly and press
ENTER twice.
• Notice that assembly components have been
filtered from the table.
Task 6: Create summation calculations to sum columns of data in the table.
1. Create a summation of the total parts in the
assembly.
• Click Summation.
• Click Add > By Name > RPT_QTY.
• Type assy_qty as the parameter name, and
press ENTER.
• Select the cell shown to locate the parameter.
2. Create a summation of the total cost of the parts
in the assembly.
• Click TOTAL _COST.
• Type assy_cost as the parameter name, and
press ENTER.
• Select the cell shown to locate the parameter.
• Click Done/Return > Update Tables > Done.
• Notice that the table updates to display the
total number of parts in the assembly and the
total cost.

Task 7: Add BOM Balloons in a drawing view.
1. Display the BOM balloons in a drawing view.
• From the Balloons group, click Create
Balloons and select Create Balloons - All.
• Notice that the BOM balloons are displayed.
2. Display Quantity BOM balloons in a drawing

view.
• Click anywhere in the table.
• Click Select Table from the Table group.
• Right-click the table and select Properties
• Select the BOM Balloons tab.
• Select Quantity Split Circle from the Type
drop-down menu.
• Click OK .
• Notice that the BOM balloons are now
displayed with quantities.
3. Edit a BOM balloon symbol type.
• Click the Balloons group drop-down menu
and select Alt Balloon Symbol .
• Select the symbol attached to BEARING.PRT,
as shown.
• Click OK > Retrieve.
• Select DELTA _BOM.SYM, and click Open.
• Select the new symbol and drag it to a new
location, as shown.
• Click in the background to de-select items.

• In the ribbon, click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group.
Editing Report Tables

There are a number of options that enable you to edit the appearance of report tables.
Editing Report Tables:

• Sorting.
• Filter components:
– By Item
– By Rule
¨ &asm.mbr.name!=bolt*
• Relations in reports:
– total_cost=asm_mbr_cost
*rpt_qty
• Fixing an index.
• Summation calculation.
• Comment cells.
• Dash items.
• Pagination.
Figure 1 – Sorting and Filtering Report Tables
Editing Report Tables

There are several tools that enable you to edit the configuration of a report table, including:
• Sorting – You can sort the contents of a repeat region by one or more parameters, moving forward or
backward in order. You can specify more than one parameter symbol for sorting a region. The entries
are sorted by the first parameter, and then by each succeeding parameter, if necessary. For example,
you can first sort components by type and then sort them alphabetically by part name.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Sort Regions.
• Filter components – You can set up a filter to remove components from the listing. Two options are
available:
– By Item – Manually select components from the listing to remove.
¨ To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Filters.
– By Rule – Set up a rule to remove multiple components that match a specified pattern.
For example, you can remove all components with bolt in their name by adding the rule
&asm.mbr.name != bolt*.
¨ To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Filters.

• Relations in reports – You can write relations between parameter symbols in a repeat region and
output the computed information in the same repeat region. When writing relations, you must convert
the period in report parameters to an underscore, for example total_cost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Relations.
• Fixing an index – You can fix the index of a repeat region record so it remains the same even after you
insert additional items into the repeat region or sort the repeat region differently.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Fix Index.
• Summation calculation – You can calculate the sum of the values of a specified report parameter.
The summation value is placed in a table cell and updates with any edits in value of the referenced
report parameter. It is useful for calculating values, such as total assembly cost, total weight, and
total number of parts.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Summation.
• Comment cells – You can add comment cells to a repeat region, these cells contain user-supplied
text rather than data that is read from a model. Using comment cells, you can annotate data in a
column of a repeat region.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Comments.
• Dash items – You can convert selected "rpt.qty" and "rpt.index" values in a report table to a dash "-".
To remove a dash symbol from the report table, select the symbol and the appropriate parameter
value appears again.
– To access this option, click Repeat Region , then click Dash Item.
• Paginate tables – If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by breaking it at
a particular row and continue it on the next page or you can create a new segment on the same page.
If you add more information to the table, it flows into the next segment and adds additional sheets, as
necessary. You can also repeat the header information from the original table onto the next page.
– To access this option, select a repeat region, click the Table group drop-down menu and select
Paginate .
PROCEDURE - Editing Report Tables

Drawing_Details\Reports_Editing EDIT_REPORTS.DRW
Task 1: Edit a report table.
2. Add a user-defined component parameter to a
table cell.
• Select the fifth cell in the second row, as
shown.
• Click asm > mbr > User Defined.
• Type vendor and press ENTER.
• Notice that a report symbol is added to the
cell.

• Click Update Tables , from the Data group.
• Notice that the vendor column in the table
has updated.
4. Sort the repeat region.

• From the menu manager, click Sort Regions.
• Click Add > Forward.
• Select the Dieset cell, as shown.
• Click OK > Done.
• Notice that the table is now sorted
alphabetically using the values from the
vendor column.
5. Filter items using a rule.

• Click By Rule > Add.
• Type &asm.mbr.material != ABS and press ENTER twice.
• Notice that components with the material parameter equal to ABS have been filtered from
the table.

6. Filter items by selecting items directly in the repeat region.
• Click By Item > Exclude.
• Press CTRL and select the two rows containing bolt components, as shown.
• Click OK > Done > Done/Return.
• Notice that the selected rows have been removed from the table.
7. Edit an item listing to a dash.

• From the menu manager, click Dash Item.
• Select item 2, as shown.
• Click Done.
• Notice that the item number is removed
from the cell, and the item column numbers
update.

Creating BOM Balloons
You can use balloons in conjunction with Bill of Materials tables to detail the location and number
of parts included in the assembly for manufacturers.
• Numerous balloon creation
options.
• Manipulate placed balloons:
– Merge Balloons
– Split Balloons
– Detach Balloons Figure 1 – Balloon Ribbon Options
– Redistribute Quantity
• Edit BOM balloon settings.
Figure 2 – Viewing Created

Balloons Figure 3 – Editing BOM Balloon Properties
Creating BOM Balloons
Bill of Materials (BOM) tables can be used to detail the location and number of parts included in the
assembly for manufacturers. BOM tables are created with repeat regions. A repeat region is a group of
user-designated table cells that automatically populate, and expand or contract to accommodate the
amount of data currently in the model.
You can also detail parts and assemblies with BOM balloons, which are circular callouts in an assembly
drawing that display components listed in the BOM table. BOM balloons are tied to the bill of materials
table. If you select a table row, the corresponding balloon highlights, and vice versa.
You can create balloons by clicking Create Balloons and then selecting one of the following balloon
types:
• All
• By View – You must select the view on which the balloons display.
• By Component – You must select the desired assembly component on which the balloons display.
• By Component and View – You must select an assembly component in a particular view on which
the balloons display.
• By Record – You must select a specific row in a BOM table.
Manipulating Balloons
You can manipulate placed BOM balloons in the drawing. The following options are available:
• Merge balloons – You can nest balloons by clicking Merge Balloons .
• Detach balloons – You can separate balloons by clicking Detach Balloons .
• Split balloons – You can split balloons by clicking Split Balloons . This option enables you to
create a copy of a balloon that represents multiple quantities and assign a portion of that quantity
to the new copy.
• Redistribute Quantity – You can redistribute balloon quantities by clicking Redistribute Quantity .
This option enables you to move a quantity from one balloon to another.
Editing BOM Balloons Settings
You can edit the settings for BOM balloons within the Table Properties dialog box. When a drawing
has placed BOM balloons, the BOM Balloons tab activates. You can edit the following properties
of BOM balloons:
• Select which region to apply settings, if multiple repeat regions are selected.
• Control the type of balloon. Options include:
– Simple Circle.
– Quantity Split Circle.
– Custom – This option requires a custom balloon symbol (*.sym).
• Set the BOM balloon parameter to use from the repeat region. The default parameter is rpt.index.
• Set the Reference Balloon Te xt – By default, REF is used.
PROCEDURE - Creating BOM Balloons

Drawing_Details\Tables _BOM-Balloons TABLES_4.DRW
Task 1: Create balloons for the assembly.
3. Click Create Balloons and select Create
Balloons – All from the Balloons group.
4. Select a row from the BOM table.

• Notice that the corresponding balloon
highlights.

5. Select a balloon from the view.
• Notice that the corresponding table row
highlights.
Task 2: Edit the BOM balloon settings.

1. Query-select the BOM table.
2. Select Properties from the mini toolbar.
• In the Table Properties dialog box, notice that
the BOM Balloons tab is now available.
3. Select the BOM Balloons tab.
• Select Quantity Split Circle from the Type
drop-down list.
• Click OK .
Task 3: Manipulate the balloons.

1. Notice that the entire balloon quantity of 5 is on
the bolt.
2. Click Split Balloons from the Balloons group.

3. Select the balloon.
4. Type 3 as the quantity of balloons to remove
and press ENTER.
5. Select the edge of the bolt.
6. Select a location for the balloon.

Task 4: Update the assembly and observe the BOM table update.
1. Select VALVE .ASM from the model tree.
2. Right-click and select Open .
3. Select the bolt pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern .
5. Notice the INFORMATION WINDOW and read
its contents.
• Click Close.
6. Notice the view and the balloon quantity have
updated.
7. Notice that the BOM table has also updated.

Creating Part Catalog Drawings
You can use report tables to document family table parts in drawings.
Part Catalog Drawings Theory: Creating Part Catalog Tables:
• Document family table parts in drawings • Create table
• Display • Create 2-D repeat region
– Instance names • Add report symbols
– Instance parameter names Editing the Table:
– Instance parameter values
• Apply filters
• Requirements
• Sort data
– Family table model
Instance Drawings:
– Meaningful names
¨ Features/Dimensions/Instances • Replace instances
• Copy drawing
Figure 1 – Creating Part Catalog Tables Process

Part Catalog Drawings Theory
• You can document part family table information using a 2-D (two-dimensional) repeat region within a
table. You can display instance names, instance parameter names and instance parameter values.
• Before you can document the information in a drawing you need to create a part family table model
with instances to describe the part variations. It is advisable to use meaningful names for the items
included in the family table, such as features and dimensions, because this information is extracted
from the model and displayed in the drawing table.
Creating Part Catalog Tables
Creating part catalog tables involves first creating a drawing and then adding a generic instance of
a part family model to the drawing. You can then proceed to create the part catalog table. This
involves the following steps:
• Create table – First you need to create a table. Ensure that you configure the correct number of rows
and columns and specify the correct column width and row height.
• Create 2-D repeat region – You need to create a 2-D (two-dimensional) repeat region to enable the
table to expand in two directions: horizontally and vertically.
• Add report symbols – You need to add appropriate report symbol parameters including:
– fam.inst.name – This parameter lists the names of the family table instances.
– fam.inst.param.name – This parameter lists the names of the family table instance parameters.
– fam.inst.param.value – This parameter lists the values of the family table instance parameters.
Editing the Table
You can use the following options to edit the appearance of the table:
• Apply filters – You can apply filters to remove unwanted columns or rows from the resulting table.
• Sort data – You can configure sort regions to arrange the order in which items are listed in the table:
– Default Sort – Sorts items in a forward direction, by ASCII character value.
– No Default – Sorts items in the order they appear in the family table editor.
Instance Drawings
You can create separate drawings for each part family table instance. Two steps are involved:
• Replace instances – You can replace the generic component with an instance in the drawing.
• Copy drawing – You can then copy the drawing to create a new drawing referencing the instance.
You can repeat this process to create drawings for each instance in the family table.
PROCEDURE - Creating Part Catalog Drawings

Drawing_Details\Part_Catalog FUEL_CAP.DRW
Task 1: Configure a repeat region.
2. Create a 2-D repeat region in the table.
• Zoom into the drawing table.
• From the menu manager, click Add > Two-D.
• Select the lower-left cell in the table to locate
the boundary of the first region, as shown.
• Then select the upper-right cell in the table
to locate the boundary of the second region,
as shown.
• Then select the lower-right cell in the table
to locate the boundary of the both regions,
as shown.
• Click Switch Syms to view the 2-D repeat
region, as shown.
• Click Switch Syms > Done to complete the
repeat region configuration.
3. Add the family table instance name symbol to a
table cell.
• Select the left cell in the lower row, as shown.
• Click fam > inst > name.
4. Add the family table instance parameter name
symbol to a table cell.
• Select the right cell in the upper row, as
shown.
• Click fam > inst > param > name.

5. Add the family table instance parameter value
symbol to a table cell.
• Select the right cell in the lower row, as
shown.
• Click fam > inst > param > value.
6. Click Update Tables , from the Data group.
• Notice that the table has updated with family table information, as shown.
7. Sort the repeat region to show the data as it appears in the family table.
• Click Sort Regions.
• Select the No Default check box.
• Click Done > Done.
• Notice that the table is now sorted so that the columns appear as they do in the family table.

Module 46
Detailing Sheetmetal Designs

Adding Flat and Formed States
Flat states enable you to add fully formed and fully flat views of your designs to a drawing.
Figure 1 – Formed Model Figure 2 – Flat State
Figure 3 – The Drawing
Adding the Flat and Formed States

A flat state is a completely unbent copy of your part. It streamlines the creation of flat patterns needed
in manufacturing because you can create any number of flat states, at any time in your design process,
whether your part is fully formed or fully flat.
You use family tables to control flat states. You can:
• Use the Create command to produce a new flat state instance.
• Use the Update command to transfer features you added to a flat state from the flat state to the
generic part, except for features you suppressed. You can then delete or suppress desired features,
which are then deleted or suppressed in any other flat state in that part's family table.
• Use the Show command to list the flat state instances related to the generic part. You select the
instances from the list, and they open in a new window.
You can make any necessary modifications to individual flat state instances. Any new features you add
to a flat state are enabled in that specific flat state instance, but suppressed in the generic part. Any
features you delete from a flat state are suppressed in the specific flat state instance, but still enabled
in the generic part. Keep in mind that any features you add to the generic part, after you create the
flat state, are added to all flat state instances.
When you create a flat state instance, the unbend or the flat state is automatically added to the end
of the generic part's model tree. Any modifications made to the generic do not affect the flat state.
Therefore, in the generic, a flat state works exactly as a flat pattern. Any features added to the generic
are automatically reordered to always be inserted before the unbend.
When you create a flat state instance, it is automatically added to the generic part's family table. If
you, in turn, add or remove features from a flat state instance, the system records those changes in the
generic part's family table.
PROCEDURE - Adding Flat and Formed States

Sheetmetal\Views_Flat-Formed CREATE NEW
Task 1: Create a new drawing.
1. Click File > New.
2. Select Drawing as the Type.
3. Type RIGHT_PANEL in the File name field.
4. Clear the Use default template check box.
5. Click OK from the New dialog box.
6. Click Browse and double-click RIGHT_PANEL.PRT in the Open dialog box.
7. Click OK from the New Drawing dialog box.
8. If necessary, select The generic and click Open.
Task 2: Add the general view.
General View .
2. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog
box.
3. Click the top-right corner of the drawing to
place the new view.
4. In the Drawing View dialog box, select 3D from
the Model view names list and click Apply.
5. Select View Display from the Categories list.
6. Select No Hidden from the Display style
drop-down list.
7. Click OK to complete the view definition.
Task 3: Add the flat state instance.
1. If necessary, select the Layout tab.
2. Click Drawing Models from the Model Views group.
3. Click Add Model from the menu manager.
4. Select RIGHT_PANEL.PRT and click Open.
5. Select RIGHT_PANEL_FLAT1 and click Open.
6. Notice the information displayed in the message log.
• RIGHT_PANEL_FLAT1 has been added to drawing RIGHT_PANEL.
7. Click Done/Return.

Task 4: Add a general view of the flat state instance.
1. Right-click in the graphics window and select General View .

2. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box.
3. Click in the center of the drawing to place the new view.
4. In the Drawing View dialog box, select TOP from the Model view names list and click Apply.
5. Select View Display from the Categories list.
6. Select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list and click Apply.
7. Select Scale from the Categories list.
8. Select the Custom scale option and type 2 as the scale value.
9. Click OK to complete the view definition.
10. Right-click and select Lock View Movement , to disable it.
11. Move the view to the desired location.
12. Click anywhere on the drawing to de-select the view.

Auto Ordinate Dimensions
You can quickly create ordinate dimensions in a view.
You use the Auto Ordinate command to create ordinate dimensions automatically.
• Select the surfaces to dimension.
• Select edge, curve, or datum as the baseline.
Figure 1 – Selected Surfaces
Figure 2 – Ordinate Dimensions
Auto Ordinate Dimensions

You can automatically ordinate the dimensions in your drawing using the Auto Ordinate command. This
command saves you time when detailing and organizing your sheetmetal model in drawings.
To use auto ordinate dimensioning, select the Annotate tab in the Drawing ribbon. Select Auto Ordinate
Dimension from the Orient Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotations group. Then
select the surfaces for which you want to create ordinate dimensions. The surfaces must be selected
within the same view.
Once you select the appropriate surfaces, you select a base line entity, which can be an edge, curve,
or datum plane. The ordinate dimensions appear, enabling you to adjust their position, witness lines,
and so on.

PROCEDURE - Auto Ordinate Dimensions
Sheetmetal\Dimensions_Auto-Ordinate AUTOORDINATE .DRW
Task 1: Create auto ordinate dimensions for the tabs on the top of the flat state view.
3. Select Auto Ordinate Dimension from the Ordinate Dimension types drop-down menu
in the Annotations group.
4. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces, as shown.
5. Middle-click and select the edge shown as the

baseline.
6. Middle-click to complete the dimensions.
7. Click in the drawing background to de-select all dimensions.

Task 2: Clean up the dimensions.
1. Select R0.5 dimension and click Delete from the mini toolbar.
2. Click to create a selection rectangle and drag it around the dimensions as shown below.
3. Select a highlighted dimension and drag the ends of the witness lines to the position shown.
4. Select 0 baseline dimension and drag its

witness line endpoint to an appropriate location.

Bend Line Notes
A bend line note describes the basic information about the bend type, bend direction, and bend
angle.
Bend line notes describe:
• Bend Type
• Bend Direction
• Bend Angle
– Measured as deflection from the flat.
Figure 1 – Bend Notes

Bend Line Notes
A bend line note describes the basic information about the bend type, bend direction, and bend angle:
• Bend Type – Formed or rolled.
• Bend Direction – Up or down.
• Bend Angle – Angle in degrees.
– Measured as deflection from the flat.
The bend line notes are automatically created for each bend in your design. The notes are parametric
and aligned with the bend, so they enable you to easily provide drawing dimensions and bend
annotations. This information enables manufacturers to program their bending machines, locate punch
positions, and create dimension inspection documents.
You can customize the display order by changing the smt_bend_notes_order configuration option. You
can also customize the bend line note symbol by modifying the symbol source files.
The following is an example bend line note:
The following table defines each bend line note element:

Element Description Default Symbol
Bend Type

Formed Inside bend radius is equal to
or smaller than ten times the
sheetmetal thickness.
(Inside Bend Radius =< Thickness
* 10)
Rolled Inside bend radius is greater
than ten times the sheetmetal
thickness.
(Inside Bend Radius > Thickness
* 10)
Bend Direction
Up Inside radius is on the
sheetmetal's driving surface.
Down Inside radius is on the
sheetmetal's offset surface.
Bend Angle
Creo Parametric measures the 45°
angle of the bend as the angle
of deflection from the flat. The
bend angle displays according
to the format set in the ang_units
configuration option.

PROCEDURE - Bend Line Notes
Sheetmetal\Notes_Bend-Line BENDNOTES.DRW
Task 1: Display the bend lines and bend notes in the drawing.
2. In the drawing tree, select new_view_2 and click Show Model Annotations from the mini
toolbar.
3. Select the Datums Tab in the Show Model Annotations dialog box.
• Click Select All to select all datum axes and click Apply.
• Click Select All to select all bend notes.
5. Click OK.

Bend Order Tables
The bend order table is used to document the bend order for manufacturing.
• Bends are added in sequence to match the
manufacturing process.
• Multiple bends can be added to a given
sequence.
Figure 1 – Bent Part
Figure 2 – Sequence 1 and 2 Figure 3 – Sequence 3 and 4

Bend Order Tables
The four bend sequences displayed in the slide result in the Bend Table .
Bend Table
The bend order table is used to document the bend order for manufacturing. When creating the bend
order table, you start with the model completely unbent.
You use bend order tables to document the dimensioning and the order of the bend features in your
sheetmetal design. You can display bend order tables in sheetmetal drawings to better illustrate the
bending process for manufacturing. You can also store and edit the tables with a text editor, in a
file named PARTNAME.BOT.
You create bend order tables by fully unbending your part and then recording the bend back process.
You select the bend or groups of bends in the sequence that matches your manufacturing process.
You cannot create or edit a bend order table on a completely unbent part, so a flat state is used.
The table can also provide you with information concerning bends that are not 90 degrees. This can
be very helpful when you use bend tables or a bend formula that does not consider the bend angle
in its calculation.
Bend order tables are shown on a production drawing by creating a note and reading it in the .bot file. If
you change the table in Sheetmetal mode, the note on the drawing automatically updates; however,
you must manually add any new bends to the table.
To create or work with bend order tables, you need your sheetmetal part to be in a bent condition.
The standard bend order table contains:
• The bend sequence number.
• The number of bends in a sequence.
• The bend number ID.
• Bend direction.
• Bend angle.
• Bend radius.
• Bend length.
PROCEDURE - Bend Order Tables

Sheetmetal\Tables _Bend-Order BENDORDER.DRW
Task 1: Open the RIGHT_PANEL.PRT model and create the bend order sequence for the main bends.
2. Select RIGHT_PANEL.PRT in the model tree,
then right-click and select Open .
3. Click Open from the Select Instance dialog box.
4. Create the first bend in the sequence.
• Select Bend Order from the Bends drop-down
menu.

5. Rotate the model, as shown.
6. Zoom in to the model and select the two bend surfaces, as shown.
7. Click Add Sequence in the Bend Order dialog

box.
8. Zoom in and select the bend surface, as shown.
9. Click Add Sequence.


11. Click Add Sequence.
13. Click OK.
Task 2: Add the bend table to the drawing.
1. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Windows and select BENDORDER.DRW.
3. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
5. Select the flat view.
6. Click Select All to select all four Bend Notes.
7. Click OK in the Show Model Annotations dialog box.
8. The bend table is added to the drawing.
Note: You can place more views in the drawing while displaying feature details and dimensions. The
dimensions and notes can be arranged in the drawing as desired. If you are interested in learning more
about creating drawings for parts, you can request information for the course Detailing with Creo
Parametric.

Module 47
Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners

Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension
You can rapidly create fasteners and required holes.
• Tools tab
– Intelligent Fastener group
• Built-in Intelligence
– Screws
– Hardware
– Holes
• Fastener Definition
– Dialog box
– Hardware library
– 2D and 3D - Preview
– Heli-Coil inserts library
• IFX Versions
Figure 1 – Screw Fastener Definition Dialog Box
Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension

The Intelligent Fastener extension (IFX) enables you to rapidly place common fasteners in an assembly.
Intelligent fastener functionality is accessed from the Intelligent Fastener group on the Tools tab in
the ribbon.
IFX has a built-in Intelligence to the assembly of fasteners. Screws and Bolts can be placed rapidly
with required hardware such as nuts and washers. In addition, IFX automatically creates any required
holes in components as features at the part level.
Once the placement references are selected, you can configure the fastener using the Screw Fastener
Definition dialog box. The dialog box contains several options to access the built-in hardware library:
• Catalog – mm or inch
• Screw Type
• Thread
– Diameter Value
– Measure Diameter – Select an assembly reference (such as a hole) to measure the diameter.
– Length Value
– Set Length Automatically – Enables the system to select the appropriate length from the library.
This option is momentary and does not remain in effect each time the dialog box is opened.
– Permanently Set Length Automatically – Maintains the automatic length option as the default each
time the dialog box is opened, until the icon is manually disabled.
• Washers – Under the head of the fastener, and under the nut.
• Nut Type
• Hole Layout
– Tolerances
– Counterbore
• Heli-coil Inserts
2D and 3D - Previews:

• The Screw Fastener Definition dialog box also provides a color-coded 2D - Preview of the fastener
connection. The 2D - Preview updates with the fastener and hardware selections, and also displays a
representation of the affected assembly components.
• The 3D - Preview can be enabled using the Preview button in the Screw Fastener Definition dialog
box. A wireframe preview of the fastener is displayed in the graphics window.
IFX Versions:
• The basic Intelligent Fastener functionality (Lite) is provided with PTC Creo Parametric. You can
upgrade to the Intelligent Fastener extension (Full) to access the advanced functionality as outlined
in the following table:
Library Lite Full
Screws (mm and inch)
DIN EN ISO 1207, 2009,1580, 4762, 10642
DIN 84, 85, 580, 912, 921, 931, 933, 960, 961, 963, 6912, 7990, 7984, 7991
X X
ISO 4014, 4017, 6914, 8765, 8676,
EN 24017,
EN ISO 1207
Washers (mm and inch)
Plain – wide and narrow X X
Lock – regular and heavy
Nuts (mm and inch) X X
Inserts (mm and inch) X X
Dowels (mm and inch) X
Customization X
Placement Lite Full

Automatic hole creation X X
Counterbores X X
Automatic length selection X X
Automatic thread diameter selection X X
Pattern fastener during placement X X
Assemble fastener on all points/axes X
Create holes without external references X
Alignment of fasteners on beams with sloped inner surfaces X
Assembling nuts to subassemblies (encapsulated/welded nuts) X
Validation Lite Full

Updating hole positions X X
Fastener length X X

Assembling Intelligent Fasteners
Selected references determine the fastener type.
• Location References
– Axis/Point/Hole
– Dimension References
• Opposing References
– Bolt/Nut
• Aligning References
– Bolt/Thread Figure 1 – Opposing References for
Bolt/Nut Connection
Figure 2 – Aligning References for Bolt/Thread Figure 3 – Bolt/Thread and Bolt/Nut

Connection Connections
Assembling Intelligent Fasteners

To assemble intelligent fasteners, you select Location and Placement references. The references
selected determine the fastener type.
Location References can be:
• An axis, point, or surface of a hole – These references are selected when using the Assemble on
point or axis option.
• A pair of XY dimension references to locate the center axis – These references are selected when
using the Assemble by mouse click option. During placement, the system displays the current offset
values, which update as the cursor is moved. If you leave a valid position, the values disappear and
the preview is grayed out.
Placement references can be two opposing surfaces or two aligning surfaces:
• Opposing Surfaces – Face in opposite directions, and result in a Screw/Nut connection.
• Aligning Surfaces – Face in the same direction, and result in a Screw/Thread connection.
Once the Location and Placement references are defined, you can use the Screw Fastener Definition
dialog box to configure the fastener type, size, and options.
PROCEDURE - Assembling Intelligent Fasteners

Intelligent_Fastener\Asm-Std IFX-STD1.ASM
Task 1: Create a bolt and nut connection using an axis.
.

• Click the Screw drop-down menu from
the Intelligent Fastener group and select
Assemble on reference .
• Select datum axis AA_1.
3. Select the top surface of the upper plate and

the bottom surface of the lower plate.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Preview and expand 2D - Preview, if
necessary.
• Select mm from the Catalog types drop-down
list.
• Click ISO Fastener to collapse the list.
• Select DIN 7984 - 8.8 from the Screw types
drop-down list.
• Select M12 from the Thread types drop-down
list.
• Select 25.000 from the Thread length
drop-down list.
• Notice that the bolt length is too short in 2D
- Preview.
6. Click Set Length Automatically .
• Notice that the bolt length is updated in 2D
- Preview.
7. Click Show Hole Layout .

• Select Medium Fit - 14 from the ISO types
drop-down list.
• Select the Side 1 - Counterbore check box.
• Click Permanently Set Length Automatically
to correct the bolt length.
Note: Clicking Permanently Set Length
Automatically will make the automatic length
option the default in the dialog box until it is disabled.

8. Select the top Side 2 Washers check box.
• Select DIN 127-A.
9. Select the Nut check box.
• Select ISO 4033-12.
10. Click OK.
11. Disable Annotation Display from the In
Graphics toolbar.
12. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.
• View the nut and washer assembly and press
CTRL+D.
13. Open PART1.PRT from the model tree.

• In the model tree, select the hole feature
IFX_ID_414.
• Notice the hole feature on the model and
click Close .
14. In the model tree, select Tree Filters from

the Settings types drop-down menu.
• Select the Features check box.
• Click OK.
15. Expand PART2.PRT and Group IFX_SCREW.
• Notice the created hole in PART2.PRT and the
fastener components.
Task 2: Create a bolt and nut connection using a hole.

1. Click the Screw drop-down menu and select
• Select a surface of the hole shown.

the bottom surface of the lower plate.

3. Click OK.
• Notice that the thread defaults to M8.
4. Select M12 from the Thread types drop-down
list and notice the 2D - Preview updates.
5. Click Measure Diameter .
• Select the surface of the hole again.
• Notice that the thread reverts to M8.
6. Clear the Side 1 - Counterbore check box.
7. Disable Permanently Set Length Automatically
.
8. Click OK.
Task 3: Create a bolt and thread connection using a datum point.
• Select datum point APNT0.

the top surface of the lower plate.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Set Length Automatically .

• Select both Side 1 Washers check boxes and
set the types to:
– DIN 127-A and DIN 125-1-A
• Notice 2D - Preview.
• Click OK.
Task 4: Create bolt and thread connections using mouse click locations.
Assemble by mouse click .
• Select the dimension references shown.

the top surface of the lower plate.
3. Click OK.
4. Leave all of the previous settings and click OK.

5. Place the first component at dimension of
approximately 15.000 | 15.000.
Note: Use the cursor location on the placement
surface to visually judge the placement, and not the
tip of the bolt.
6. Place the second component at a dimension of
approximately 50.000 | 50.000.
• Middle-click in the background to finish
placements.
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners

You can manipulate fasteners using various techniques.
• Suppress / Resume
• Reassemble
• Redefine
• Pattern
• Delete
• Edit mouse click dimensions
Figure 1 – Editing Dimensions
Figure 2 – Reassemble Figure 3 – Redefine, Pattern, and Delete
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners

Once created, you can manipulate intelligent fasteners using various options found in the Intelligent
Fastener group within the Tools tab:
• Suppress/Resume – Suppresses or Resumes all intelligent fasteners. Any created holes remain
visible.
• Reassemble – Allows you to select an existing fastener and repeat the assembly to another reference.
• Redefine – Provides access to the Screw Fastener Definition dialog box, where any fastener options
can be changed. Redefining a fastener causes any child fasteners to update.
• Pattern – You can manually or reference pattern an intelligent fastener. If a fastener is placed on a
member of a pattern, you are provided with the option to assemble a single fastener or pattern the
fastener using a Reference Pattern.
• Delete – Deletes the entire fastener connection, including any hardware and created holes in
components. If the fastener has been repeated using the Reassemble option, you are prompted
with the option to delete the selected fastener, or all occurrences.
When editing dimensions for fasteners placed using the mouse click option, you can edit the created
axis in the model tree to access the offset dimensions. Once regenerated, the fasteners update
parametrically.
PROCEDURE - Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners

Intelligent_Fastener\Manip-Std IFX-STD2.ASM
Task 1: Manipulate existing IFX fasteners.
.
2. Disable Annotation Display from the In
Graphics toolbar.
• Click the Intelligent Fastener group
drop-down menu and select Suppress.
• Notice that the fasteners are suppressed but
the holes remain.
4. Click the Intelligent Fastener group drop-down
menu and select Resume.
5. In the model tree, select Tree Filters from
the Settings types drop-down menu.
• Select the Features check box.
• Click OK.
6. Edit datum axis AA_2.
• Edit both the dimensions to 50 and press
ENTER.
• Regenerate the model.
7. Click Reassemble from the Intelligent
Fastener group.
• Select the center bolt.
• Select the top-left datum point APNT0.
• Click Apply.

8. Select the upper-right hole.
• Click OK.
• Select Assemble single instance? and click
OK.
Note: Selecting Pattern fastener? would have
resulted in fasteners in both holes.
9. Click Redefine from the Intelligent Fastener

group.
• Select the upper-left bolt.
• Select Redefine all elements from the
Redefine Options dialog box, if necessary.
• Click OK.
• Click the Screw type drop-down list.
• Click ISO Fastener to expand the list.
• Select ISO 4762 - 8.8 from the Screw types
drop-down list.
• Clear the bottom Side 1 Washers check box.
• Click OK in the Additional Options dialog box
and notice that all three bolts update.
10. Select Group IFX_SCREW_1 and click Pattern
• Click OK from the dashboard.
11. Click in the background to de-select the pattern.

12. Click Delete from the Intelligent Fastener
group.
• Select the lower-left bolt.
• Click Yes.
• Notice that the bolt/nut and hole have been
removed.
13. With the Delete button still active, select the
upper-left bolt.
• Click No.
• Notice that only the selected bolt was
deleted.
14. With the Delete button still active, select the

center bolt.
• Click Yes.
• Middle-click in the background to finish
deleting fasteners.

Task 2: Pattern IFX fasteners.

• Double-click IFX-PATTERN .ASM.
2. Select the Tools tab.

• Click Reassemble .
• Select the center bolt.
• Select any available bolt hole and click OK.
• Select Pattern fastener? and click OK.

Module 48
Utilizing Design Exploration

Understanding Design Exploration
Use a Design Exploration session to evaluate design changes in a safe environment.
• Manual change process:
– Challenging
– Time consuming
• Design Exploration session:
– Checkpoint Tree
– Toolbar
• Benefits:
– Safe
– Quick
• Model Types:
– Parts
– Assemblies Figure 1 – Design Exploration Session
Understanding Design Exploration
The Design Exploration extension (DEX) for PTC Creo Parametric enables you to explore design
changes on part and assembly models.
Changing a product design and exploring new ideas can be a challenge, especially when developing
complex systems with many interdependent components. Typically, this process involves the manual
backup of models to temporary folders, repeatedly closing and cleaning the session, and manually
reviewing multiple iterations before making a decision. Design Exploration assists with the process
of creating, changing, and evaluating new designs with a specifically designed, safe and efficient
environment. When the design is finalized, you can store the exploration session to illustrate how a
particular design was decided upon.
Once a Design Exploration session is started:
• You enter an environment where you can explore design changes using a hierarchy of checkpoints.
• The Checkpoint Tree and the Design Exploration toolbar become available next to the model tree.
• You can safely make and store design changes, or revert to the original model state at any time.
A Design Exploration session has the following benefits:
• Provides a safe environment for “what-if” scenarios:
– Eliminates multiple manual backups.
– Organizes and manages design changes.
– Generates a separate encrypted file that is not automatically controlled by a PDM system, but can
be checked in and tracked.
• Reduces iterations and errors:
– Explore significant changes and multiple design directions before committing to models.
– Apply significant changes to model when ready.
• Save time by quickly exploring multiple design alternatives.
• Eliminate accidental data loss due to overwriting of design models.
You can utilize a Design Exploration session with the following modeling environments:
• Solid or Sheetmetal Part
• Assembly and Mechanism
• Options Modeler, Interchange
• Cabling and Piping
• Mold and Welding
• Process
Note: Drawings are not directly supported by Design Exploration at this time. If drawings of the models
exist, they can be regenerated normally once the Design Exploration session is complete. If drawings are
in session they remain open, however they cannot be activated until the Design Exploration session is
complete.
Exploring Part and Assembly Designs

You can create and activate checkpoints while exploring designs.
• Design Exploration process
– Open a model
– Start DEX session
– Make changes
– Create / Activate Checkpoints
– Accept / Cancel changes
• Checkpoints
– System and user created
– Store incremental changes Figure 1 – Exploring Part Changes
Figure 2 – Checkpoint Tree for Each Session Figure 3 – Exploring Assembly Changes
Exploring Part and Assembly Designs
Use the following process when exploring model designs:
• Open a model In Session.
• Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Start. The current modeling session
is paused.
• The system automatically creates a snapshot of the entire session content into an initial Checkpoint
called “Pre-modified”. If models were modified before starting the session, an "Entry Checkpoint"
is also created.
• Make any number of changes to the model, without risking the original models.
• Create Checkpoints at any time to capture changes made since the previous Checkpoint.
• At any point you can instantly switch between Checkpoints. The system replaces In Session model
iterations as captured in the activated Checkpoint, without losing any information.
• Once changes are complete and a decision is made, you can:
– Save the Design Exploration session to a file.
– Accept the current model state and resume the modeling session.
– Cancel the changes and return to the original model.
• Keep the following in mind about checkpoints:
– At least one system created Checkpoint is created upon entering the DEX session.
– Each Checkpoint stores only the incremental model changes relatively to the previous Checkpoint.
– You can provide a Checkpoint name, add comments, and also define keywords to be used for
a later search.
PROCEDURE - Exploring Part and Assembly Designs

Design_Exploration\Explore ARM.PRT
Task 1: Utilize a Design Exploration session on a part model.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Start.
• Click OK.
3. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.
• In the model tree, click RECT.
4. Select the Options tab from the dashboard.
• Select Through All from the Side 1 and Side 2 Depth types drop-down menus.
5. Select the Properties tab.
• Type CUTOUT in the Name field and press ENTER.
7. Click Add New Checkpoint from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Type Rectangle in the Name field.
• Click OK.
8. Edit the definition of CUTOUT.

• In the model tree, click SLANT.
9. Click Add New Checkpoint .
• Type Slanted in the Name field.
• Click OK.

• In the model tree, click CURV.
• Type Curved in the Name field.
• Click OK.
12. Right-click each checkpoint in the Checkpoint

Tree and select Activate for the following:
• Pre-modified
• Rectangle
• Slanted
• Curved
13. Click Accept from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Clear the Save the Design Exploration session check box.
• Click OK.
Task 2: Utilize a Design Exploration session on an assembly model.

• Double-click VALVE .ASM.
2. In the model tree, select Tree Filters from the Settings types drop-down menu.
• Select the Suppressed objects check box.
• Click OK.
3. Suppress ARM.PRT.
• Click OK.
• Click OK.
5. Activate BODY.PRT.
6. Edit one of the three flanges on the Valve body.
• Edit the 3 EXTRUDES quantity to 5 and press
ENTER.

7. Double-click Add checkpoint in the Checkpoint
Tree .
• Type Five Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.
8. Query-select the hole shown on the Valve and
edit it.
• Edit the 3 HOLES quantity to 4 and press
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A to activate the assembly.
9. Double-click Add checkpoint in the Checkpoint
Tree .
• Type Four Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
10. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of
BOLT _HEX.PRT.
• Right-click the top BOLT _HEX.PRT within the
Pattern 1 feature and select Replace .
11. Select Unrelated Component in the Replace
By category.
• Click Open .
• Double-click BOLT _CROSS.PRT.
12. Click Edit Ref Table in the Replace dialog box.
• Click Evaluate in the Reference Pairing Table
dialog box.
• Click OK > OK.
13. Double-click Add checkpoint from the
Checkpoint Tree .
• Type Bolt Cross in the Name field.
• Click OK.
• Pre-modified
• Entry checkpoint
• Five Flanges
• Four Bolts
• Bolt Cross

15. Click Accept .
• Clear the Save the Design Exploration
session check box.
• Click OK.
16. In the model tree, select ARM.PRT and click
Resume from the mini toolbar.
Creating Design Exploration Branches

You can create a branching hierarchy of checkpoints.
• Create a branch.
– Activate a Checkpoint with successors.
– Add New Checkpoint.
• Each new Checkpoint becomes active.
Figure 1 – Part Model Branches
Figure 2 – Assembly Model Checkpoint Tree Figure 3 – Assembly Model Branch

Creating Design Exploration Branches
You can create branches of checkpoints in the Checkpoint Tree to form a Design Exploration hierarchy.
Branching enables you to create and investigate any number of design path decisions.
• Creating Branches:
– Activate a checkpoint node that has successors. (In other words, activate a node that is not the last
node in the Checkpoint Tree) . Then click Add New Checkpoint .
– Keep in mind that each time a new checkpoint is created, the new checkpoint is then automatically
active. If a number of branches at the same level are desired, you need to re-activate the upper
level branch before creating the next new branch.
– If you want to create a branch on the last node in the tree, you can create a temporary last
checkpoint, create the branch, and then delete the temporary node.
• Deleting Branches:
– If some checkpoints along the branch are no longer needed, you can delete them without losing
downstream information.
– Any sub-nodes from the deleted checkpoint are merged into its successor. You can also delete
an entire branch.
PROCEDURE - Creating Design Exploration Branches
Design_Exploration\Branch ARM.PRT
Task 1: Create Design Exploration branches in a part.
• Click OK.
• Notice the suppressed CUTOUT feature in the model tree.
• Click OK.
4. Double-click the central feature of the model.
• Edit the 6 width dimension to 10 and press
ENTER.

• Type Thick in the Name field.
• Click OK.

• Edit the 10 width dimension back to 6 and
press ENTER.
• Edit the 76 length dimension to 96 and press
ENTER.
• Type Long in the Name field.
• Click OK.
• Edit the 96 length dimension to 66 and press
ENTER.
• Type Short in the Name field.
• Click OK.
10. Select the Thick checkpoint and click Activate
.
• In the model tree, select the CUTOUT feature
and click Resume from the mini toolbar.
• Type Thick Slanted in the Name field.
• Click OK.

.
• Select the CUTOUT feature and click Resume
.
• In the model tree, select the CURV sketch.
• Type Thick Curved in the Name field.
• Click OK.
15. Select the Long checkpoint and click Activate
.
• In the model tree, select CUTOUT and click
Resume .
• Type Long Slanted in the Name field.
• Click OK.
17. Select the Long checkpoint and click Activate
.
• In the model tree, select CUTOUT and click
Resume .
• Select the CURV sketch.
• Type Long Curved in the Name field.
• Click OK.
• Pre-modified
• Thick
– Thick Slanted
– Thick Curved
• Long
– Long Slanted
– Long Curved
• Short

21. With the Short checkpoint still selected, click Delete from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Read the prompt and click OK.
22. Select Thick Curved and click Activate .
• Click OK.
Task 2: Create Design Exploration branches in an assembly.

• Double-click VALVE .ASM.
• Click OK.
3. Suppress ARM.PRT.
• Click OK.
• Click OK.
5. In the model tree, activate BODY.PRT.
6. Edit one of the three flanges on the valve body.
ENTER.
7. Double-click Add Checkpoint in the Checkpoint
Tree .
• Type Four Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.
8. Edit a flange again.
ENTER.
Tree .
• Type Five Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.

10. Edit the flange again.
ENTER.
Tree .
• Type Six Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.
12. Right-click the Four Flanges checkpoint and

select Activate.
13. Click Update .
14. Select Create a new checkpoint as a successor
of the active checkpoint from update
Checkpoint with Successors message box, if
necessary.
15. Click OK.
17. Query-select to edit the hole shown.
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A to activate the assembly.
Tree .
• Type Four Hex Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
19. Right-click the Four Flanges checkpoint and

select Activate.
• Select the BOLT _HEX.PRT shown.
20. Right-click and select Replace .

By category.
• Click Open .
22. Click Edit Ref Table in the Replace dialog box.
• Click Evaluate in the Reference Pairing Table
dialog box.
• Click OK > OK.
24. Query-select the same previous hole to edit.
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A.
Tree .
• Type Four Cross Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
26. Right-click the Five Flanges checkpoint and
select Activate.
28. Query-select the same previous hole to edit it.
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A.

Tree .
• Type Five Hex Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.

30. Right-click the Five Flanges checkpoint and
select Activate.
• Select the BOLT _HEX.PRT shown.
31. Right-click and select Replace .

• Select Unrelated Component.
• Click Open .
32. Click Edit Ref Table .
• Click Evaluate.
• Click OK > OK.
34. Query-select the same previous hole to edit it.
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A.
Tree .
• Type Five Cross Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
• Pre-modified
• Entry checkpoint
• Four Flanges
– Four Hex Bolts
– Four Cross Bolts
• Five Flanges
– Five Hex Bolts
– Five Cross Bolts
• Six Flanges

37. Right-click the Six Flanges checkpoint and
select Delete.
• Click OK.
38. Right-click the Four Hex Bolts checkpoint and
select Activate.
39. Click Accept from the Checkpoint Tree
toolbar.
• Clear the Save the Design Exploration
session check box.
• Click OK.
40. Select ARM.PRT and click Resume .
Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions

You can save a Design Exploration session to a file.
• Opening *.tmz files

• Updating Checkpoints
• Saving options
– File > Save
– Save Session
– Store Models
– Accept
– Cancel
Figure 1 – Design Exploration Session
Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions

You can save the entire Design Exploration session into a *.tmz file. You can then select and open a
previously saved Design Exploration session (*.tmz) file using the following methods:
• Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
• Click File > Open (with the All Files (*) Type selected in the File Open dialog box).
• Use the Folder browser window.
Since DEX stores the entire session, you cannot open a saved Design Exploration session when there
are already models In Session. You must erase all open models from session before opening the
Design Exploration session.
At any time within a Design Exploration session, you can make a change and use the Update option to
update a checkpoint. Keep in mind the following when updating checkpoints:
• If you update a checkpoint with successors, you can:
– Create a new checkpoint as a successor of the active checkpoint.
– Update the active checkpoint and delete its successors.
• If you modify models after setting an active checkpoint, and do not update or create a new
checkpoint, modifications will be lost when activating a different checkpoint.
There are several options and points to consider when saving within a Design Exploration session.
When saving from the File Menu using File > Save or Save from the quick access toolbar:
• Models cannot be saved (or checked-in to a PDM system) within an active Design Exploration session.
• While in a Design Exploration session, the File > Save command can instead be used to create
checkpoints.
• Once the DEX session is accepted or cancelled you may save or check in the model normally.
There are several options within the DEX toolbar to save and manage *.tmz files:
• Click Save Design Exploration Session – This method saves the DEX session to the specified *.tmz
file and leaves the Design Exploration session open.
• Click Store Models – This method saves the DEX session to the specified *.tmz file, complete with
all required models and leaves the Design Exploration session open.
• Click Accept – This method saves and closes the DEX session, accepting the current model state
and resuming the modeling session. All model iterations along the path to the current checkpoint are
applied to the current model In Session. After accepting, the model can be saved (or checked-in)
normally.
• Click Cancel – This method closes the Design Exploration session, cancelling any changes made
within the Design Exploration session, and returns to the original model. Within the Close Design
Exploration Session dialog box, you have the option of saving the session to a *.tmz file and/or
erasing all In Session models.
Keep the following in mind about *.tmz files:
• By default, Design Exploration stores only incremental changes. The first system-created checkpoint
stores only paths of the start models locations, for minimal file size.
• If you are not ready to decide which checkpoint to accept, or would like to review with others,
you can make the *.tmz file available. They can then explore your checkpoints or add their own to
the checkpoint tree.
• If you plan to send a *.tmz file to a user who does not have access to same file system or the same
original model locations, you must use the Store Models option to back up all the start models
into the *.tmz file.
• When you are connected to a PDM server you can only download or check-out models, but you
cannot upload or check in models until you resume the original modeling session.
• When the design is finalized, you can store the *.tmz file to illustrate how a particular design was
decided upon.
• Design Exploration *.tmz files are not incremented with a numeric extension for each saved iteration.
You can enter a new name for the *.tmz file or overwrite the previous file.
• The content of the *.tmz file is encrypted and compressed to avoid any confusion between this
experimental data and any design models.
PROCEDURE - Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions

Design_Exploration\Open_Save ARM.PRT
Task 1: Open, Update, and Save a Design Exploration session for a part model.

2. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
• Double-click ARM_DEX.TMZ.
• Read the message in the dialog box and click Close.
• Click Erase Not Displayed .
• Click OK.
4. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
• Double-click ARM_DEX.TMZ.
• Notice the options in the dialog box and click OK.
5. Select the Thick Curved checkpoint and click
Activate .
• Edit CUTOUT.
• Edit the left radius to 24 and the right radius
to 20.
6. Select the Thick Curved checkpoint and click
Update .
.
• Edit EXTRUDE 1.
• Edit the 12 dimension to 10.
8. Select the Thick checkpoint and click Update
.
• Verify Create a new checkpoint as a
successor of the active checkpoint is
selected and click OK.
• Type Thick Flush in the Name field.
• Click OK.
9. With the Thick Flush checkpoint still active, edit
Protrusion id 42.
• Edit the 13 dimension to 10.

10. Select the Long checkpoint and click Activate .
• Read the message in the dialog box and click Cancel.
11. Select the Thick Flush checkpoint and click Update .
12. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
• Read the message and the option in the dialog box and click Cancel.
13. Click Save Design Exploration Session from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Edit the name to arm_dex2 and click OK.
Note: This method saves the DEX session and leaves the session open.
• Verify that the Save the Design Exploration session check box is selected and click OK.
Note: This method saves and closes the DEX session, returning to the model.
• Notice that no dialog box appears.
Note: Once the DEX session is closed, you may save the model normally.
• Click Erase Not Displayed .
• Click OK.
Task 2: Open, Update, and Save a Design Exploration session for an assembly model.
1. In the Folder Browser , click Working

Directory .
• Double-click VALVE _DEX.TMZ.
• Click OK.
2. Right-click Four Cross Bolts and select Activate.
3. Press CTRL and select both of the
BOLT _HEX.PRT components in the model tree.
• Right-click and select Replace .
By category.
• Click Open .
• Click Evaluate.
• Click OK > OK.
6. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

7. Right-click the Four Cross Bolts checkpoint and
select Update.
8. Right-click the Five Cross Bolts checkpoint and
select Activate.
9. Press CTRL and select both of the
BOLT _HEX.PRT components in the model tree.
• Right-click and select Replace .
10. Select Unrelated Component.

• Click Open .
• Click Evaluate.
• Click OK > OK.
12. Right-click the Five Cross bolts checkpoint and select Update.
13. Click Save Design Exploration Session .
• Type valve_dex2 in the Name field and click OK.
Note: This method saves the DEX session and leaves the session open.
14. Click Store Models .
• Click Save Design Exploration Session .
• Double-click the Backup folder.
• Type valve_dex3 in the Name field and click OK.
Note: This method saves the DEX session complete with all required models and leaves the session
open.
15. Click Cancel from the Check point Tree toolbar.
• Select the Erase all models from memory and return to an empty Creo Parametric session
check box.
• Click OK.
Note: This method closes the DEX session without saving, and erases all models from session. In our
example, the DEX session was previously saved to the VALVE _DEX2.TMZ and VALVE _DEX3.TMZ files.

Module 49
Using Unite Technology

Understanding Unite Technology
With Unite technology, you can open both Creo files and non-PTC CAD files into Creo Parametric
and create and maintain design intent between them.
• Open non-PTC 3-D CAD formats.

• Import non-PTC 3-D CAD formats.
• Update non-PTC data with its new versions within your designs.
• You can make changes to non-PTC 3-D CAD formats within Creo Parametric.
– Model must first be converted.
• Perform the Save As function on key non-PTC 3-D formats.
• License considerations.
Figure 1 – Assembly Created using Unite

Technology Figure 2 – Assembly’s Model Tree
Understanding Unite Technology

Creo’s Unite technology enables design teams to easily incorporate non-PTC data into existing
designs, and create and manage design intent between these data formats. Unite technology also
enables design teams to efficiently convert non-PTC data and easily share PTC Creo data in the most
common CAD formats.
With Unite technology, you can perform the following operations:
• Open – Open key non-PTC 3-D CAD formats into Creo Parametric, including SolidWorks, CATIA, and
NX. You can assemble these files as components into an assembly like any Creo Parametric model.
• Import – Import common non-PTC 3-D CAD formats into Creo Parametric, including SolidWorks,
CATIA, NX, Solid Edge, and Inventor. Import converts non-PTC CAD data into PTC Creo part and
assembly models.
• Update – Automatically update non-PTC data with its new versions within your designs. If you have
an assembly that contains non-PTC data and a change is made to that data in its native CAD system,
you can incorporate the changes from SolidWorks, CATIA, and NX formats.
• Save As – Perform the Save As function on key non-PTC 3-D formats, including SolidWorks, CATIA,
and NX.
• Make changes – You can make changes to non-PTC 3-D CAD formats within Creo Parametric. Either
add new features to the model or manipulate the existing geometry using Flexible Modeling. To
make changes, the data must first be converted on-demand. The system converts only the parts and
parent assemblies that are changed, as opposed to changing the entire assembly. This workflow
greatly reduces the efforts that are required.
You can use Unite technology for:
• Consolidation – Consolidate to a single CAD system with ease.
• Collaboration – Collaborate effectively in a multi-CAD environment.

Licensing Considerations
To use Unite technology, there is no need for any non-PTC licenses or software to be installed.
However, to use the Update and Save As functionality for SolidWorks, CATIA, and NX, you must have
the Collaboration Extension licenses installed.
Creating and using Unite Profiles

You can create format-specific profiles and templates to load foreign data as easily as PTC Creo
data.
• Use the Import Profile Editor.

• Save the profile out as a .DIP file.
• Specify a different profile for each CAD type:
– CATIA V5
– SolidWorks
– NX
• Capture settings in a config.pro file.
Figure 1 – Import Profile Editor
Figure 2 – Specifying Different Profiles
Creating and using Unite Profiles

You can create format-specific profiles and templates to load foreign data as easily as PTC Creo data.
Use the Import Profile Editor to create the profiles. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the
Data Exchange category then click Setup Import and Open Profiles from the Import and Open Profiles
section. In the Current Profile - Import Profile dialog box, select the desired options for the profile.
You can then save the profile out as a .DIP file.
In the Data Exchange category of the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, you can specify a .DIP
profile for CATIA V5, SolidWorks, and NX. You can also set other options for open and import behavior.
If desired, you can then export these settings to a config.pro file. You can then load the config.pro
file manually or automatically at Creo startup.

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using Unite Profiles
Unite\Profiles NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a new profile and save it.
2. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box,
select the Data Exchange category.
3. Click Setup Import and Open Profiles from the
Import and Open Profiles section.
4. In the Current Profile - Import Profile dialog box,
notice the various tabs.
• Select the Use templates check box.
• Next to the Part field, click Options.
• Select solid_part_mmks and click OK.
• Next to the Assembly field, click Options.
• Select mmks_asm_design and click OK.
• Clear the Enable ATB check box.
• Select External as the Model Accuracy.
5. Select the Surface tab.
6. Notice the various Shape and Boundary options
available.
7. Select the Curve tab.

8. Notice the Spline/B-Spline and Polyline options.
9. Select the Point tab.

10. Select the Create labels for points check box.
11. Select the Topology tab.

12. Notice the various surface and surface healing
options.

13. Select the Misc tab.
14. Select the Include colors check box for CATIA
V5.
15. Select the Filter tab.

16. Notice the various import options.
17. Select the Direct Modeling tab.

18. Notice the options available.
19. In the Current Profile - Import Profile dialog box, click File > Save As.
20. In the Save A Copy dialog box, type open-profile as the File name and click OK.
• Click File > Exit.
Task 2: Add the profile to the config.pro.
1. In the Open profiles section, click the drop-down
button to the right of the CATIA V5 field then
click Browse....
2. In the Open dialog box, select OPEN-PROFILE.
DIP and click Open.
3. Click the drop-down button to the right of the
Creo Elements/Direct field then click Browse....
DIP and click Open.
SolidWorks field then click Browse....
DIP and click Open.
NX field then click Browse....
DIP and click Open.

9. Click Export Configurations.
10. In the Save As dialog box, click Working
Directory .
• Select config.pro.
• Click OK.
11. Click OK from the Creo Parametric Options
dialog box.
Using Unite Technology to Assemble Components

You can open non-PTC 3-D CAD components into Creo Parametric natively and assemble them to
create design intent.
• CAD types include:

– SolidWorks
– CATIA
– NX
• Models display in the model tree:
– With different CAD system icon.
– With CAD system file extension.
• Import data, also:
– Solid Edge parts and assemblies. Figure 1 – Assembling a SolidWorks
– Inventor files. Sub-Assembly
Figure 2 – Assembling an NX Part Figure 3 – Assembling a CATIA V5 Part
Using Unite Technology to Assemble Components

Using Unite technology, you can open non-PTC 3-D CAD data into Creo Parametric, including
SolidWorks, CATIA, and NX CAD data types. You can then select references like any Creo model and
assemble components to create design intent.
The non-PTC model displays in the model tree with a different CAD icon and with a different file
extension. This makes it very easy to distinguish the different CAD formats.
In addition to opening the above-listed non-PTC CAD data, you can also import both Solid Edge parts
and assemblies, as well as Inventor files. During the import process, you can select which information
is imported or use the standard template. This imported geometry can then be referenced using all
available assembly constraints.

PROCEDURE - Using Unite Technology to Assemble Components
Unite\Assemble NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Load the profile to use for opening models.
2. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Configuration Editor category.
• Click Import/Export and select Import configuration file.
• Select CONFIG.PRO and click Open.
• Click OK > No.
3. In the ribbon, click Open and double-click
UNITE-ASSY.ASM.
5. At the top of the model tree, click Settings

and select Tree Filters .
6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the
Features check box and click OK.
7. In the model tree, expand the BODY.PRT node.
8. Notice that this first assembled component is a
Creo Parametric model.
9. Collapse the BODY.PRT node.
Task 2: Assemble non-PTC 3-D CAD components.
1. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the

Component group.
2. In the Open dialog box, select SolidWorks Part
(*.sldprt) as the Type.
• Notice the SolidWorks models display with a
different icon.
3. In the Open dialog box, select SolidWorks
Assembly (*.sldasm) as the Type.
• Again, notice the SolidWorks assembly
displays with a different icon.
• Select SHAFT-SUB.SLDASM and click Open.

4. Assemble the sub-assembly using two
Coincident constraints.
5. Click Complete Component from the
dashboard.
6. Click Assemble .
7. In the Open dialog box, select NX File (*.prt) as
the Type.
• Notice the NX model displays with a different
icon.
• Select COVER.PRT and click Open.
8. Orient the component approximately as shown.
9. Assemble the component using two Coincident

constraints and one Oriented constraint.
10. Click Complete Component .
11. Click Assemble .

12. In the Open dialog box, select CATIA V5
CATPart (*.CATPart) as the Type.
• Notice the CATIA model displays with a
different icon.
• Select PLATE.CATPART and click Open.

13. Orient the component approximately as shown.
14. Assemble the component using two Coincident

constraints and one Oriented constraint.
16. In the model tree, expand the SHAFT-SUB.

SLDASM node.
17. Notice that the components display with a
different CAD system icon.
18. In the model tree, expand the remaining nodes.

19. Notice the form of each of the models.
Note: The datum entities in each of the models
originated from the template models specified in the
profile .DIP file.

Module 50
Introduction to Flexible Modeling

Understanding Flexible Modeling
Flexible Modeling is a geometry-based set of editing tools integrated directly into Creo Parametric.
• No new geometry creation.

• Multiple model types.
– Imported geometry.
– Legacy models.
– Creo Parametric models.
• Example use cases:
– Vendor files
– Obsolete design intent
– Emergency changes Figure 1 – Flexible Modeling Offset
Figure 2 – Model Tree Figure 3 – Flexible Modeling Tab
Understanding Flexible Modeling

Flexible Modeling is a geometry-based set of editing tools and does not support the creation of new
geometry. All operations are purely geometry-based and do not leverage existing feature-based
model information. Feature or component references to existing geometry are automatically redirected
to the modified geometry. Consequently, parts assembled to a pin maintain their references and move
with the pin if you move it using the Flexible Modeling Move feature.
Due to the geometry-based focus, Flexible Modeling tools perform identically on imported geometry
as they do on legacy Pro/ENGINEER or new Creo Parametric models. Flexible Modeling is not a
standalone modeling system. Rather, it is integrated directly into Creo Parametric and contains a
set of tools that operate in conjunction with standard parametric modeling techniques. Typical use
cases include:
• Working with models with old or outdated design intent.
– Editing of non-native geometry files.
– Assignment of new design intent.
– Control of surface sets as “features.”
• Working with models that contain obsolete design intent.
– Old parametric models are difficult to use/modify.
– Part design requirements have evolved; new control is required.
– Assign new design intent rather than rebuild.
• Creating emergency changes (on any model).
– Perform immediate modifications without being required to understand the existing model
or design intent.
Independent of the underlying geometry, Flexible Modeling creates parametric features that store the
geometry selection method and geometry manipulation techniques within the feature.

Understanding the Flexible Modeling User Interface
All the basic Creo Parametric UI items and functionality remain intact within the Flexible Modeling
environment. The Flexible Modeling ribbon contains the following groups:
• Shape Surface Selection • Recognition

• Transform • Edit Features
Figure 1 – Flexible Modeling User Interface
Understanding the Flexible Modeling User Interface

Because Flexible Modeling is integrated directly into Creo Parametric, all the basic Creo Parametric UI
items and functionality remain intact within the Flexible Modeling environment. This includes:
• Graphics window and display style options.
• Model tree, Folder Browser, and PTC Creo Parametric Browser.
• Quick Access toolbar, File menu, ribbon, dashboards, and In Graphics toolbar.
• Status bar and message log.
• File management.
• Basic 3-D orientation.
• Edit, Edit Definition, and drag handles.
The Flexible Modeling tab in the ribbon contains the tools used for selecting, transforming, recognizing,
and editing features, as shown in Figure 1.
Shape Surface Selection Group
The Shape Surface Selection group includes the shape selection tools and the Geometry Rules tool.
The shape selection tools enable you to quickly gather the desired geometry surfaces to perform
manipulations on them.
The Geometry Rules tools provide additional options for surface selection. The Geometry Rules tools
enable you to filter by Coplanar, Parallel, Coaxial, Equal radius, and Same convexity. Additional
satisfaction criteria can be selected so that All or Any of the selected rules apply.
Transform Group
The Transform group contains the key tools used to modify geometry features in Flexible Modeling.
Each of these tools includes several tabs with additional settings and options, such as attaching a
transformed selection of surfaces or maintaining them as a quilt, or automatically re-creating the
necessary rounds.

Recognition Group
The Recognition group contains important tools that help you leverage similar geometry on a model,
thus enabling you to make a change to one set of geometry and propagate the changes to the other,
similar geometry.
The Recognition group also contains tools to help you control how the system handles round-like and
chamfer-like geometry. These settings impact the resulting geometry solutions when transforms
are made.
Edit Features Group
The Edit Features group contains a tool for attaching surface geometry to solid geometry, as well a
tool to aid in removing any unwanted geometry from the model.
The Flexible Modeling Process

The typical Flexible Modeling process can be summarized in three high-level steps.
• Selecting initial surface.
• Creating the required surface set.
• Applying a Transform, Recognition, or Feature
Edit operation.
Step 1 – Selecting Initial Surface
Step 2 – Creating the Surface Set Step 3 – Applying a Transform Feature

Selecting the Initial Surface
As you are now aware, the Flexible Modeling tools only function with geometry. As a result, you must
select a surface, known as a seed surface, to create a Flexible Modeling feature. When you select the
Flexible Modeling tab, the selection filter automatically updates to Geometry, enabling the selection
process to immediately start.
You typically first select the surfaces of the geometry that you want to move or modify; however, it is
also possible to select individual surfaces or surface sets after you initiate a tool.
Creating the Required Surface Set
The shape selection tools and geometry rules help you recognize and collect design intent surface
sets in conjunction with the seed surface. The shape selection tools analyze the geometry and function
in the same way on both imported and native Creo Parametric models.
Complete the selection of the required surface set using any of the following methods:
• Use the shape selection tools in the Shape Surface Selection group in the ribbon.
• Use the Geometry Rules in the Shape Surface Selection group in the ribbon.
• Right-click in the graphics window to access selection tools such as Tangent Surfaces and Solid
Surfaces.
• Select a combination of surfaces by pressing CTRL and using the tools above.
You can also manually create the required surface set using a combination of standard Creo surface
selections, such as:
• Pressing CTRL and selecting multiple individual surfaces.
• Pressing SHIFT and selecting Seed and Boundary or Loop Surfaces.
Be aware that Flexible Geometry features evaluate the selection criteria with every part regeneration.
Creating the surface set without the use of smart selection rules limits the potential of the Flexible
Modeling features.
Applying Transform, Recognition, or Feature Edit Operations
With the surfaces selected, you are ready to perform Transform, Recognition, or Feature Edit
operations. Transform operations enable you to modify the geometry. For example, you can move
the location of a boss or increase or decrease a hole diameter. Recognition operations enable you to
propagate changes and impact how the changes affect other geometry. Feature Edits enable you
to attach quilts or remove geometry.
PROCEDURE - The Flexible Modeling Process

Process\Flex_Modeling HUB.PRT
Step 1: Import a step file into Creo Parametric and assemble it into an assembly.
2. Notice the model contains no geometry.
3. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and
select Import .
4. In the Open dialog box, double-click HUB.STP.
5. Click OK from the File dialog box.
Note: It is common to receive a vendor file in the form of a STP file.

8. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar
and double-click AXLE.ASM.
Note: The HUB.PRT had already been assembled.
There are four additional components in the
assembly that need to be placed.

9. In the model tree, right-click SHAFT.PRT and
select Edit Definition .
10. Select the top surface of each model to create
the first Coincident constraint.
11. Select the small, vertical flat surface on
each model to create the second Coincident
constraint.
12. Select the cylindrical surface on each model to
create the third Coincident constraint.
14. In the model tree, right-click the first BOLT .PRT

and select Edit Definition .
15. In the dashboard, click Place Using Interface
and click Yes from the Warning dialog box.
16. Select the cylindrical hole surface on one of the
HUB.PRT bosses to create the first Coincident
constraint.
17. Select the top surface of the same HUB.PRT
boss to create the second Coincident constraint.
19. Edit the definition of the other two BOLT .PRT

components and place them in the same way
you placed the first one.
Step 2: Make changes to the HUB.PRT using Flexible Modeling.
1. In the Quick Access toolbar, click Windows

and select HUB.PRT.
2. In the ribbon, select the Flexible Modeling tab.
3. Select the top surface on the left boss.
4. Click Offset from the Transform group.

5. In the dashboard, edit the offset value to 10.
7. Select the top surface on the right boss.
8. Click Offset .
9. Edit the offset value to -10.
11. Select the interior hole surface.

12. Click Cut from the Shape Surface Selection
group.
Note: Shape selection tools help you to quickly
select the geometry you wish to modify.
13. Click Pattern from the Recognition group.

14. Notice the system recognizes the other two
holes.
Note: A pattern recognition feature was created in the model tree.

16. Select the interior hole surface again.
17. Click Modify Analytic from the Transform
group.
18. Edit the Radius value to 7.
19. In the ribbon, select the Options tab.

20. Click in the Pattern/Symmetry/Mirror feature
collector to activate it.
21. In the model tree, select feature Pattern
Recognition 1.
Note: The radius update propagated to the other members of the pattern recognition feature.
Orientations and select 3D2.
24. Select the cylindrical surface on the center hole.
25. Click Cut to select the entire set of geometry.
26. Select Move by Dimension from the Move

types drop-down menu in the Transform group.
27. Press CTRL and select the two non-parallel
surfaces.
28. Edit the angle from 30 to 45 degrees.

29. Click Saved Orientations and select 3D3.
30. Notice that there is another set of geometry on
the underside of the part that needs to move
with the hole.

31. In the graphics window, right-click and select
References > Move surfaces.
32. Press CTRL and select the flat surface.
33. Right-click and select Shape Surfaces.

34. In the Shape Surface Sets dialog box, verify that
Boss is the Primary shape selected.
• Clear the Include secondary shapes check
box.
• Click OK.
36. Notice that both sets of geometry moved
together.
38. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
39. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer
types drop-down menu in the Engineering
group.
40. Press CTRL and select the three edges.
41. Edit the D value to 1.
Note: You can still add additional Creo Parametric features to the model outside of Flexible Modeling.
43. Click Save and click Close from the Quick
Access toolbar to return to the assembly.
44. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access
toolbar.
45. Notice that the SHAFT.PRT location updated to
the new hole location.
46. Notice that the BOLT .PRT models moved to the
newly offset surfaces.

Module 51
Shape Surface Selection

Using the Selection Filter
The selection filter enables you to filter the types of entities you want to select.
• Flexible Modeling selection filters:

– Geometry
¨ Default
– Surface Regions
• These selection filters enable the tools in the
Shape Surface Selection group.
Figure 1 – Selection Filter
Figure 2 – Geometry Selection Figure 3 – Surface Region Selection
Using the Selection Filter

Under normal Creo Parametric modeling, the selection filter is set to Smart by default. However, when
the Flexible Modeling tab is selected, the selection filter is automatically set to Geometry. This limits the
scope of entities available for selection to only geometry elements so that features cannot be selected.
Note: Remember, Flexible Modeling is a geometry-based set of editing tools.
You can select most of the surfaces using the Geometry filter. In some cases, however, the Geometry
filter is not sufficiently specific and the Surface Regions filter is necessary. If a surface contains multiple
loops, the Surface Regions filter automatically divides the separate regions and proceeds to manage
them as if they were separate surfaces.
Note: You can also query-select a surface region even when the selection filter is set to Geometry.
The tools in the Shape Surface Selection group only become available when geometry or surface
regions are selected. They remain grayed out if features are selected.

PROCEDURE - Using the Selection Filter
Flexible_Modeling\Selection_Filter REGION_SELECTION.PRT
Task 1: Use the Geometry selection filter.
2. Notice the selection filter is set to Smart in the status bar.
Note: By default, the selection filter in Creo Parametric is set to Smart.
3. In the ribbon, select the Flexible Modeling tab, and notice that the selection filter automatically
changes to Geometry.
4. Cursor over the model and select the cylindrical

surface.
5. Notice that the tools in the Shape Surface

Selection group become available.
6. Select the front, planar surface.

Note: The preselection highlight indicates the Surface
type.
Task 2: Use the Surface Regions selection filter.

1. With the selection filter set to Geometry, select
the top planar surface on the model.
geometry.
Note: All surface regions are highlighted and selected.

3. Edit the selection filter to Surface Regions.
4. Select the top planar surface again.

Note: The multiple surface regions have been
separated. As a result, you can now select the correct
entity, and the preselection highlight indicates the
Surface Region type.
Selection group are active.
6. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

7. Edit the selection filter back to Smart.
8. Select a feature on the model.
Selection group are not active.
Note: Because a feature is not a valid input for the
shape selection tools, the tools are not active. Only
surfaces are valid inputs.
Note: This model geometry was imported as a single feature. Thus, it does not contain individual Creo
Parametric features.
Using the Shape Selection Workflow

Shape selection helps you select the surface geometry on which to perform Flexible Modeling
operations.
• Workflow:
– Select “seed” surface.
– Pre-select/Select shape selection tool.
• Shape Surface Selection group tools.
• Additional RMB tools.
Figure 1 – Shape Surface Selection Group

Using the Shape Selection Workflow
When using any of the Flexible Modeling tools, you must select the surface geometry you want to
perform the operation on. The shape selection tools help you to quickly select the desired surface
geometry. Flexible Modeling operations can use either the action-object workflow or object-action
workflow. You can either select the surface geometry first and start the Flexible Modeling operation, or
you can start the Flexible Modeling operation and then select the surface geometry.
The workflow for using Shape Selection is as follows:
• Select a seed surface – Select a surface that is part of the geometry you wish to perform a Flexible
Modeling operation on.
• Pre-select/Select a shape selection tool – Depending on the tool selected, the system selects
additional, neighboring surface geometry to the seed surface. Pre-selecting a shape selection tool
previews the surface geometry the tool would select.
• Press CTRL and select an additional seed surface – To add or remove additional surface sets, select
an additional seed surface.
• Pre-select/Select an additional shape selection tool.
The following are shape selection tools available in the Shape Surface Selection group:
• Boss
• Bosses
• Cut
• Cuts
• Round/Chamfer
• Rounds/Chamfers
There are additional shape selection options available by right-clicking in the graphics window after
selecting a seed surface. These include:
• Shape Surfaces – Opens the Shape Surface Sets dialog box that displays context-sensitive shape
selections based on the selected seed surface.
• Tangent Surfaces – Selects all surfaces tangent to the seed surface.
• Solid Surfaces – Selects all solid surfaces in the model.
Applying Boss Selections

Surface geometry that protrudes from the model can be selected using the boss selection tools.
• There are two boss selection tools available:

– Boss
– Bosses
¨ Boss and smaller surfaces that intersect them.
¨ Secondary shapes
• System places an emphasis on convex surfaces.
Figure 1 – Boss Shape Selection Figure 2 – Bosses Shape Selection
Applying Boss Selections

Surface geometry that protrudes from the model can be selected using the boss selection tools. The
Boss selection tool can be used to collect the surfaces of a protrusion shape, beginning from the seed
surface over the convex edges of the geometry, as shown in Figure 1.
The Bosses selection tool selects the Boss selection tool results as well as any smaller surfaces that
intersect them, as shown in Figure 2. The smaller surfaces that intersect them are also known as
secondary shapes. Again, the system places an emphasis on the secondary shapes being convex.
When you select the seed surface, the Boss and Bosses tools become available. If you cursor
over these tools in the Shape Surface Selection group, the system pre-selects the resulting surfaces
in the graphics window, as shown in the figures. Clicking one of these tools actually selects the
pre-selected surfaces.
PROCEDURE - Applying Boss Selections

Flexible_Modeling\Boss_Selections BOSS_SELECTION.PRT
Task 1: Investigate Boss selections using the Boss selection tools.
3. Select the front planar surface, as shown.
Note: In the Flexible Modeling tab, the selection filter is set to Geometry by default.
4. With the planar seed surface selected, cursor
over Boss in the Shape Surface Selection
group.
5. Notice that the main surfaces forming a boss
are pre-selected.
6. With the planar surface still selected, cursor

over Bosses in the Shape Surface Selection
group.
7. Notice the pre-selection difference between
the Boss and Bosses selection tools.
8. Click in the background of the graphics window

to de-select all geometry.
9. Select the cylindrical surface.
10. With the cylindrical surface selected, cursor

over Boss .
11. Notice that the hole and the smaller protrusion
pattern at the bottom are not pre-selected.

12. With the cylindrical surface still selected, cursor
over Bosses .
13. Notice that the hole and the smaller protrusion
pattern at the bottom are both pre-selected.
14. Click Bosses to select the geometry.
15. Press CTRL and select the flat, vertical surface

on the rear protrusion.
16. Click Bosses .
17. Notice that both sets of geometry are now
selected.
18. Press CTRL and select the front planar surface.

Shape Surfaces .
Boss is selected as the Primary shape.
• Verify that the Include secondary shapes
• Click OK.

Applying Cut Selections
Surface geometry created by removing material from the model can be selected using the Cut
selection tools.
• There are two cut selection tools available:

– Cut
– Cuts
¨ Cut and smaller surfaces that intersect them.
¨ Secondary shapes
• System places an emphasis on concave surfaces.
Figure 1 – Cut Shape Selection Figure 2 – Cuts Shape Selection
Applying Cut Selections

Surface geometry created by removing material from the model can be selected using the Cut
selection tools. The Cut selection tool can be used to collect the surfaces of a cut shape, beginning
from the seed surface over the concave edges of the geometry, as shown in Figure 1.
The Cuts selection tool selects Cut selection tool results as well as any smaller surfaces that intersect
them, as shown in Figure 2. The smaller surfaces that intersect them are also known as secondary
shapes. Again, the system places an emphasis on the secondary shapes being concave.
When you select the seed surface, the Cut and Cuts tools become available. If you cursor
over these tools in the Shape Surface Selection group, the system pre-selects the resulting surfaces
in the graphics window, as shown in the figures. Clicking one of these tools actually selects the
pre-selected surfaces.
PROCEDURE - Applying Cut Selections

Flexible_Modeling\Cut_Selections CUT_SELECTION.PRT
Task 1: Investigate Cut selections using the Cut selection tools.
3. Select the bottom planar surface in the cut.
Note: When the Flexible Modeling tab is active,
the selection filter is set to Geometry by default.

4. With the planar surface selected, cursor over
Cut in the Shape Surface Selection group.
5. Select the hole surface.
6. With the hole surface selected, cursor over Cut

.
7. Notice the other hole surface is pre-selected,
but the chamfer surfaces are not.
8. Cursor over Cuts in the Shape Surface

Selection group.
9. Notice the chamfer surfaces are now
pre-selected.
10. Select a side surface in the rear pocket.
11. With the surface selected, cursor over Cut .
12. With the surface still selected, cursor over Cuts

.
13. Notice that the cylinder’s top surface as well
as the smaller hole surfaces and rounds are
pre-selected.
14. Click Cuts to select the geometry.

15. Press CTRL and select a side surface in the
other pocket.
16. Click Cuts .
selected.
18. Press CTRL and select the hole surface again.

Shape Surfaces .
Cut is selected as the Primary shape.
• Click OK.

Applying Round and Chamfer Selections
Round and chamfer surface geometry can be selected using the round and chamfer selection tools.
• There are two round and chamfer selection tools available:

– Round/Chamfer
– Rounds/Chamfers
¨ Round/Chamfer and adjacent surfaces of same radius and concavity
¨ Secondary shapes
• Transition surfaces are also collected.
Figure 1 – Round/Chamfer Shape Figure 2 – Rounds/Chamfers Shape

Selection on Round Selection on Round
Figure 3 – Round/Chamfer Shape Selection Figure 4 – Rounds/Chamfers Shape

on Chamfer Selection on Chamfer
Applying Round and Chamfer Selections

Surface geometry that forms rounds or chamfers on the edges of other geometry can be selected
using the round and chamfer selection tools. The Round/Chamfer selection tool can be used to collect
these round-like and chamfer-like surfaces, beginning with a seed surface.
The Rounds/Chamfers selection tool selects the Round/Chamfer selection tool results as well as
any additional adjacent round-like surfaces that are of the same radius and concavity as the original
seed surface. When you collect surfaces from round shapes, the transition surfaces connecting them
are also collected.
Note: Round geometry that has intentionally been unrecognized using the Not Rounds feature is not able
to be selected using the Round/Chamfer or Rounds/Chamfers shape selection tools.
Note: Chamfer geometry that has intentionally been recognized using the Recognize Chamfers feature
helps with selection of geometry using the Round/Chamfer or Rounds/Chamfers shape selection tools.

PROCEDURE - Applying Round and Chamfer Selections
Flexible_Modeling\Round-Chamfer_Selections
ROUND-CHAMFER_SELECT.PRT
Task 1: Investigate Round selections using the Round/Chamfer selection tools.
3. Select the larger round surface, as shown.
4. With the round seed surface selected, cursor

over Round/Chamfer in the Shape Surface
Selection group.
5. With the round surface still selected, cursor over

Rounds/Chamfers in the Shape Surface
Selection group.
6. Notice the pre-selection difference between
the Round/Chamfer and Rounds/Chamfers
selection tools.
Note: While the Round/Chamfer selection tool finishes at the first transition, the Rounds/Chamfers
selection tool expands the selection to round surfaces that are connected to these transitions and
have the same radius value.
7. Click Rounds/Chamfers to select the
geometry.
9. Press CTRL and select the bottom round surface

on the right cooling fin.
10. With the round seed surface selected, cursor
over Round/Chamfer in the Shape Surface
Selection group.

11. Cursor over Rounds/Chamfers to view the
pre-selection difference.
geometry.
selected.
14. Press CTRL and select the right round surface.
Shape Surfaces .
Round is selected as the Primary shape.
• Click OK.
17. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

Task 2: Investigate Chamfer selections using the Round/Chamfer selection tools.
1. Select the larger chamfer surface, as shown.
2. With the chamfer seed surface selected, cursor

over Round/Chamfer .
3. With the chamfer surface still selected, click

Rounds/Chamfers to select the geometry.
4. Notice the selection difference between
the Round/Chamfer and Rounds/Chamfers
selection tools.

6. Press CTRL and select the top chamfer surface
on the hexagon cut.

geometry.
selected.
9. Press CTRL and select the top chamfer surface.

Shape Surfaces .

Chamfer is selected as the Primary shape.
• Click OK.

Module 52
Flexible Move

Applying Flexible Move using the Dragger
You can drag geometry to a new location.
• Translate and rotate geometry.

• Uses the 3D Dragger
– Free move
– Change the movement origin.
• With and without translation/rotation values
– Depends on how you drag the geometry.
Figure 1 – Using the Default 3D Dragger Origin
Figure 2 – Selecting a New Origin Figure 3 – Specifying a Translation Value

Applying Flexible Move
There are three different methods available for moving geometry using Flexible Modeling:
• Move using Dragger
• Move by Dimension
• Move using Constraints
When you start any of these tools, you can switch to the other two options in the dashboard.
Moving Geometry using the 3D Dragger
To move geometry using the 3D Dragger, select Move using Dragger from the Move types
drop-down menu in the Transform group. You can translate and rotate geometry using the default 3D
Dragger origin shown in Figure 1. By default, no dimensions are available for you to specify the distance
to drag the geometry. You are dragging the geometry using Free move.
You can relocate the 3D Dragger origin by selecting a different reference. The 3D Dragger is relocated
to the new position. The system enables movement only in the degrees of freedom permitted by the
new reference. For example, if you select an edge, you can only translate or rotate the geometry along
and about that edge, respectively. If you select a planar reference, you can translate the geometry
normal to the surface. You can also translate and rotate the geometry in the surface’s planar direction.
The 3D Dragger cannot be moved outside of the planar reference’s boundary.
Once you begin to translate or rotate the geometry, a translation or rotation value becomes available,
enabling you to type in an exact dimension. Dimension values can be typed in the dashboard or edited
by double-clicking the value in the graphics window. When geometry is dragged in a 2-D plane,
however, dimensions do not become available.
PROCEDURE - Applying Flexible Move using the Dragger

Flexible_Modeling\Move_Drag DRAGGER.PRT
Task 1: Move boss geometry using the default 3D Dragger origin.
4. Select a planar, vertical surface on the boss
geometry.
5. Click Bosses from the Shape Surface
Selection group.
6. Select Move using Dragger from the Move

7. Click the 3D Dragger XY-plane to move the
boss freely in the selected plane.
8. Drag the boss to a new location, as shown.

Note: The base geometry of the boss is
automatically updated to adapt to the existing
geometry.

Task 2: Move boss geometry using other 3D Dragger origins.
1. In the model tree, right-click Move 1 and select
Edit Definition .
2. In the graphics window, select the front, vertical
surface.
3. Notice that the 3D Dragger relocates to this
reference.
4. Notice the degrees of freedom available.
5. Drag the 3D Dragger translation arrow toward

you slightly.
6. Notice that there is now a translation dimension
value available.
7. Edit the translation value to 80.
8. Select the top, front edge as the new 3D

Dragger origin.
10. Drag the 3D Dragger translation arrow to the left

slightly.
11. Notice that there is now another translation
dimension value available.
13. Drag the 3D Dragger rotation arc

counter-clockwise slightly.
14. Notice that there is now a rotational angular
15. Edit the rotation angle to 90.
Note: The geometry currently does not intersect any
of the model.

16. Select the front, right edge as the new 3D
Dragger origin.
18. Drag the 3D Dragger translation arrow down

slightly.
19. Notice that there is now another translation
Task 3: Move cut geometry using the 3D Dragger.

1. Select the angled, vertical surface of the cut.
group.
3. Click Move using Dragger .

4. Drag the vertical translation arrow down
approximately as shown.
5. Drag the rightmost translation arrow to the left

approximately as shown.

Applying Flexible Move by Dimension
You can create Flexible Move features by defining dimensional references.
• Translate geometry
– Specify parallel dimension references.
• Rotate geometry
– Specify non-parallel dimension references.
– Pivot point
Figure 1 – Selecting Dimension References
Figure 2 – Translating Geometry Figure 3 – Rotating Geometry

Moving Geometry by Dimension
To move geometry by dimensions, select Move by Dimension from the Move types drop-down
menu in the Transform group. You must specify two references:
• One reference must be part of the geometry that is to be moved.
• One reference must be part of the geometry that remains stationary.
Once the references are selected, a dimension is created between them. The dimension displayed is
the current distance or angle between the two selected references. You can drag the handle or edit
the dimension directly from the graphics window or within the Dimensions tab of the dashboard.
You can either translate or rotate geometry, depending on the references selected:
• To translate geometry, select two parallel references. Select from either surfaces or edges. You
can also select a cylindrical surface as a reference, and the system creates the dimension from the
edge of the surface.
• To rotate geometry, select two non-parallel references. Select from either surfaces or edges. The
system extends both references until they intersect to determine the initial angle value, with the pivot
point being that intersection point.

PROCEDURE - Applying Flexible Move by Dimension
Flexible_Modeling\Move_Dimension DIMENSION.PRT
Task 1: Translate boss geometry with Move by Dimension.
4. Select a planar, vertical surface on the boss
geometry.
Selection group.
6. Select Move by Dimension from the Move
7. Press CTRL and select the two parallel surfaces.
8. Notice that a translation dimension is created
between the references.
9. Drag the handle forward and edit the dimension

to 60.
10. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard
and click in the background to de-select all
geometry.
Task 2: Rotate boss geometry with Move by Dimension.

1. Select the boss geometry again using Bosses
shape selection.
2. Click Move by Dimension .
3. Press CTRL and select the two non-parallel
surfaces.
4. Notice that an angular dimension is created
between the references.

5. Drag the handle forward and edit the angle to
15.
6. Click Complete Feature and de-select all
geometry.
7. Select the boss geometry again using Bosses

shape selection.
8. Click Move by Dimension , press CTRL, and
select the two non-parallel edges.
9. Drag the handle back and edit the angle to 1.
geometry.
Task 3: Translate cut geometry with Move by Dimension.

1. Select the angled, vertical surface of the cut.
group.

select the two parallel surfaces.
4. Drag the handle to the left and edit the

dimension to 150.
geometry.

Task 4: Rotate cut geometry with Move by Dimension.
1. Select the cut geometry again using Cut
shape selection.
select the two non-parallel surfaces.
3. Drag the handle back and edit the angle to 30.

Applying Flexible Move using Constraints

Selected geometry can be moved using conventional Creo assembly placement constraints.
• Constraints are added one at a time.

• Two references specified per constraint:
– Moved Reference
– Fixed Reference
• Constraint status must be Fully Constrained.
Figure 1 – Original Position
Figure 2 – Adding Constraints Figure 3 – Fully Constrained Move

Moving Geometry using Constraints
You can move geometry using conventional Creo Parametric assembly placement constraints.
However, instead of using constraints to determine how a part is located within an assembly, you use
constraints to determine how the selected geometry is relocated in the model. Instead of specifying
references to assemble one component to another, you specify references to move geometry with
respect to the rest of the model.
To move geometry using constraints, select Move using Constraints from the Move types
drop-down menu in the Transform group. You add constraints one at a time, specifying two references
for each constraint:
• One reference must be part of the geometry that is to be moved. This reference is known as the
Moved Reference. You can select this reference either from the geometry on its original location or at
its new location based on the constraints already applied.
• One reference must be part of the geometry that remains stationary. This reference is known as
the Fixed Reference.
Tip: The geometry being moved dynamically updates its location based on the constraints created.
Therefore, it is often easier to select the Moved Reference on the new location geometry rather than
the original location geometry.
The same constraints available in Assembly mode are available when moving geometry using
constraints:
• Automatic • Distance
• Angle Offset • Parallel
• Coincident • Normal
• Coplanar • Centered
• Tangent • Fix
Tip: The default constraint type is Automatic. With the Automatic option, the system automatically
determines the constraint type that is created based on the references selected and the orientation of the
geometry being moved. Because of this reason, it is usually better to specify the constraint type manually
rather than letting the system determine it for you.
As constraints are added, the geometry becomes further and further constrained and progresses
through the same range of constraint statuses that is found in Assembly mode:
• No Constraints
• Partially Constrained
• Fully Constrained
• Constraints Invalid
Unlike conventional Assembly mode, the constraint status must be Fully Constrained before the
Flexible Move feature can be completed.

PROCEDURE - Applying Flexible Move using Constraints
Flexible_Modeling\Move_Constraints CONSTRAINTS.PRT
Task 1: Move boss geometry using constraints.
4. Select the planar, vertical surface on the boss
geometry.
Selection group.
6. Select Move using Constraints from the
Move types drop-down menu in the Transform
group.
7. In the ribbon, select the Placement tab.
• Select Distance as the Constraint Type.
8. Select the two surfaces and edit the Offset to
50.
9. Click Change Constraint Orientation from
the dashboard.
10. Notice the constraint status is Partially
Constrained.
11. In the Placement tab, select New Constraint.

• Select Coincident as the Constraint Type.
13. Select the two surfaces.
Note: It is often easier to select the Moved Reference from the dynamic preview geometry because
you can visualize the orientation better.
16. In the dashboard, click Change Constraint
Orientation
• Edit the distance to 42.
17. Notice the constraint status is Fully Constrained.

18. In the Placement tab, select the Coincident
constraint.
• Edit the Constraint Type to Distance and
edit the Offset to -80.
Task 2: Move cut geometry using constraints.

2. Select the planar, vertical surface on the cut
geometry.
group.
4. Click Move using Constraints .

5. In the ribbon, select the Placement tab.
6. Select the two surfaces and edit the Offset to
70.
7. Notice the constraint status is Partially
Constrained.

• Select Fix as the Constraint Type.
11. Notice the constraint status is Fully Constrained.
Tip: You can use the Fix constraint to automatically make the Flexible Move fully constrained at its
current position. This is beneficial if you have the geometry moved to the desired location but its status
is still Partially Constrained.

12. In the Placement tab, right-click the Fix
constraint and select Delete.
• Click New Constraint.
13. Select the vertical edge and the back, vertical
surface.

geometry.

CREO Module 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CREO Module 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Creo for Design Engineers

Course Handbook Layout:

Course Handbook Layout

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

3. Click Working Directory to view the current

3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as

This completes the procedure.

Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 1

Figure 1 – Retrieval Customization Dialog Box

PROCEDURE - Retrieving Assembly Subsets

1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.

11. Click Open > Yes and press ENTER to accept

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 3

5. Click Remove By Size in the Retrieval

7. Drag the slider to the left until CYLINDER.PRT

8. Click Remove Large Components .

Module 30 | Page 4 © 2021 PTC

10. Click Open.

11. Click Close .

This completes the procedure.

Understanding Standard Simplified Reps

Figure 1 – Simplified Reps Tab

Understanding Custom Simplified Reps

Simplified Rep Status Types:

Figure 2 – Simplified Content Figure 3 – Reduced Clutter

Module 30 | Page 6 © 2021 PTC

Using Automatic Representations

Figure 2 – Opening a Simplified Rep as

PROCEDURE - Using Automatic Representations

1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 9

1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC .ASM (Do

4. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.

5. Click Close , click Erase Not Displayed , and click OK.

1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC .ASM (Do

4. In the model tree, notice that the components

Module 30 | Page 10 © 2021 PTC

6. In the graphics window, cursor over the

8. Select the surface.

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 11

Task 4: Measure the automatic rep geometry.

5. Expand the measure dialog box.

Task 5: Enable an On Demand Geometry Rep to measure a diameter.

1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter .

Module 30 | Page 12 © 2021 PTC

1. Click View Manager from the In Graphics

4. In the view manager, right-click simplified rep

This completes the procedure.

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 13

Figure 1 – Master Rep Figure 2 – With Excluded Components

Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps

Module 30 | Page 14 © 2021 PTC

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 15

This completes the procedure.

Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 17

Module 30 | Page 18 © 2021 PTC

© 2021 PTC Module 30 | Page 19

This completes the procedure.

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep

Figure 1 – Process Diagram

Figure 2 – Complete Assembly Figure 3 – Single Solid Envelope Part